trim trailing whitespace from manpages

Signed-off-by: Thomas E. Dickey <dickey@invisible-island.net>

185 files changed, 2084 insertions, 2074 deletions

diff --git a/man/AllPlanes.man b/man/AllPlanes.man
index 47e37505..70d837e8 100644
--- a/man/AllPlanes.man
+++ b/man/AllPlanes.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -49,34 +49,34 @@
 .SH NAME
 AllPlanes, BlackPixel, WhitePixel, ConnectionNumber, DefaultColormap, DefaultDepth, XListDepths, DefaultGC, DefaultRootWindow, DefaultScreenOfDisplay, DefaultScreen, DefaultVisual, DisplayCells, DisplayPlanes, DisplayString, XMaxRequestSize, XExtendedMaxRequestSize, LastKnownRequestProcessed, NextRequest, ProtocolVersion, ProtocolRevision, QLength, RootWindow, ScreenCount, ScreenOfDisplay, ServerVendor, VendorRelease \- Display macros and functions
 .SH SYNTAX
-unsigned long AllPlanes; 
+unsigned long AllPlanes;
 .HP
 unsigned long BlackPixel\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \^\fIscreen_number\fP\^);
 .HP
-unsigned long WhitePixel\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \^\fIscreen_number\fP\^); 
+unsigned long WhitePixel\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \^\fIscreen_number\fP\^);
 .HP
-int ConnectionNumber\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+int ConnectionNumber\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .HP
 Colormap DefaultColormap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^,
-\^int \fIscreen_number\fP\^); 
+\^int \fIscreen_number\fP\^);
 .HP
-int DefaultDepth\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, \^int \fIscreen_number\fP\^); 
+int DefaultDepth\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, \^int \fIscreen_number\fP\^);
 .HP
 int *XListDepths\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, int \fIscreen_number\fP, int
-\fIcount_return\fP\^); 
+\fIcount_return\fP\^);
 .HP
-GC DefaultGC\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, \^int \fIscreen_number\fP\^); 
+GC DefaultGC\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, \^int \fIscreen_number\fP\^);
 .HP
-Window DefaultRootWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+Window DefaultRootWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .HP
-Screen *DefaultScreenOfDisplay\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+Screen *DefaultScreenOfDisplay\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .HP
-int DefaultScreen\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+int DefaultScreen\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .HP
 Visual *DefaultVisual\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, \^int
-\fIscreen_number\fP\^); 
+\fIscreen_number\fP\^);
 .HP
-int DisplayCells\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, \^int \fIscreen_number\fP\^); 
+int DisplayCells\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, \^int \fIscreen_number\fP\^);
 .HP
 int DisplayPlanes\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, \^int \fIscreen_number\fP\^);
 .HP
@@ -86,22 +86,22 @@ long XMaxRequestSize(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^)
 .HP
 long XExtendedMaxRequestSize(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^)
 .HP
-unsigned long LastKnownRequestProcessed\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+unsigned long LastKnownRequestProcessed\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .HP
-unsigned long NextRequest\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+unsigned long NextRequest\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .HP
-int ProtocolVersion\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+int ProtocolVersion\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .HP
-int ProtocolRevision\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+int ProtocolRevision\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .HP
-int QLength\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+int QLength\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .HP
-Window RootWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, \^int \fIscreen_number\fP\^); 
+Window RootWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, \^int \fIscreen_number\fP\^);
 .HP
-int ScreenCount\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+int ScreenCount\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .HP
 Screen *ScreenOfDisplay\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, int
-\fIscreen_number\fP\^); 
+\fIscreen_number\fP\^);
 .HP
 char *ServerVendor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^)
 .HP
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ Returns the number of depths.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B AllPlanes
-macro returns a value with all bits set to 1 suitable for use in a plane 
+macro returns a value with all bits set to 1 suitable for use in a plane
 argument to a procedure.
 .LP
 The
@@ -142,7 +142,7 @@ specified screen.
 .LP
 The
 .B XListDepths
-function returns the array of depths 
+function returns the array of depths
 that are available on the specified screen.
 If the specified screen_number is valid and sufficient memory for the array
 can be allocated,
@@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ as necessary for the following functions:
 .BR XDrawSegments ,
 .BR XFillArcs ,
 .BR XFillRectangles ,
-and 
+and
 .BR XPutImage .
 .LP
 The
@@ -222,7 +222,8 @@ The Xlib functions
 and
 .B XSetRegion
 will use the extended-length encoding as necessary, if supported
-by the server.  Use of the extended-length encoding in other Xlib
+by the server.
+Use of the extended-length encoding in other Xlib
 functions (for example,
 .BR XDrawPoints ,
 .BR XDrawRectangles ,
diff --git a/man/BlackPixelOfScreen.man b/man/BlackPixelOfScreen.man
index be3f63dc..fdec32d9 100644
--- a/man/BlackPixelOfScreen.man
+++ b/man/BlackPixelOfScreen.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ int WidthOfScreen\^(\^Screen *\fIscreen\fP\^);
 int WidthMMOfScreen\^(\^Screen *\fIscreen\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIscreen\fP 1i
-Specifies the appropriate 
+Specifies the appropriate
 .B Screen
 structure.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ macro returns the default visual of the specified screen.
 .LP
 The
 .B DoesBackingStore
-macro returns 
+macro returns
 .BR WhenMapped ,
 .BR NotUseful ,
 or
@@ -162,12 +162,12 @@ macro returns the height of the specified screen in millimeters.
 .LP
 The
 .B MaxCmapsOfScreen
-macro returns the maximum number of installed colormaps supported 
+macro returns the maximum number of installed colormaps supported
 by the specified screen.
 .LP
 The
 .B MinCmapsOfScreen
-macro returns the minimum number of installed colormaps supported 
+macro returns the minimum number of installed colormaps supported
 by the specified screen.
 .LP
 The
diff --git a/man/Compose.man b/man/Compose.man
index 71231698..aba221ac 100644
--- a/man/Compose.man
+++ b/man/Compose.man
@@ -46,8 +46,10 @@ file from the list in
 .PP
 Compose files can use an
 .RB \*q include \*q
-instruction.  This allows local modifications to be made to existing compose
-files without including all of the content directly.  For example, the
+instruction.
+This allows local modifications to be made to existing compose
+files without including all of the content directly.
+For example, the
 system's iso8859-1 compose file can be included with a line like this:
 .RS 4
 .BI "include \*q" %S/iso8859-1/Compose \*q
@@ -74,12 +76,15 @@ by using:
 .RS
 .B "include \*q%L\*q"
 .RE
-and then rewrite only the few rules that you need to change.  New
+and then rewrite only the few rules that you need to change.
+New
 compose rules can be added, and previous ones replaced.
 .SH FILE FORMAT
 .\" Based on grammar description in modules/im/ximcp/imLcPrs.c
 Compose files are plain text files, with a separate line for each compose
-sequence.   Comments begin with \fB#\fP characters.   Each compose sequence
+sequence.
+Comments begin with \fB#\fP characters.
+Each compose sequence
 specifies one or more events and a resulting input sequence, with an optional
 comment at the end of the line:
 .RS
@@ -97,7 +102,8 @@ it must match exactly.
 MODIFIER may be one of Ctrl, Lock, Caps, Shift, Alt or Meta.
 Each modifier may be preceded by a
 .RB \*q "~" \*q
-character to indicate that the modifier must not be present. If
+character to indicate that the modifier must not be present.
+If
 .RB \*q "None" \*q
 is specified, no modifier may be present.
 .PP
@@ -110,18 +116,21 @@ as input when the sequence of events is input:
 Keysyms are specified without the \fBXK_\fP prefix.
 .PP
 Strings may be direct text encoded in the locale for which the compose file is
-to be used, or an escaped octal or hexadecimal character code.   Octal codes
+to be used, or an escaped octal or hexadecimal character code.
+Octal codes
 are specified as \fB\*q\\123\*q\fP and hexadecimal codes as
 \fB\*q\\x3a\*q\fP.
 It is not necessary to specify in the right part of a rule a locale encoded
-string in addition to the keysym name.  If the string is omitted, Xlib
+string in addition to the keysym name.
+If the string is omitted, Xlib
 figures it out from the keysym according to the current locale.
 I.e., if a rule looks like:
 .RS
 \fB<dead_grave> <A> : \*q\\300\*q Agrave\fP
 .RE
 the result of the composition is always the letter with the "\\300"
-code.  But if the rule is:
+code.
+But if the rule is:
 .RS
 \fB<dead_grave> <A> : Agrave\fP
 .RE
diff --git a/man/DisplayOfCCC.man b/man/DisplayOfCCC.man
index 9ffb5a68..8d089be8 100644
--- a/man/DisplayOfCCC.man
+++ b/man/DisplayOfCCC.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,15 +50,15 @@
 DisplayOfCCC, VisualOfCCC, ScreenNumberOfCCC, ScreenWhitePointOfCCC, ClientWhitePointOfCCC \- Color Conversion Context macros
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-Display *DisplayOfCCC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^); 
+Display *DisplayOfCCC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^);
 .HP
-Visual *VisualOfCCC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^); 
+Visual *VisualOfCCC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^);
 .HP
-int ScreenNumberOfCCC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^); 
+int ScreenNumberOfCCC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^);
 .HP
-XcmsColor *ScreenWhitePointOfCCC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^); 
+XcmsColor *ScreenWhitePointOfCCC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^);
 .HP
-XcmsColor *ClientWhitePointOfCCC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^); 
+XcmsColor *ClientWhitePointOfCCC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIccc\fP 1i
 Specifies the CCC.
diff --git a/man/ImageByteOrder.man b/man/ImageByteOrder.man
index eb37dccf..90ebfd0c 100644
--- a/man/ImageByteOrder.man
+++ b/man/ImageByteOrder.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ XY format (bitmap) or for each pixel value in Z format.
 .LP
 The
 .B BitmapBitOrder
-macro returns 
+macro returns
 .B LSBFirst
 or
 .B MSBFirst
diff --git a/man/IsCursorKey.man b/man/IsCursorKey.man
index 9a53edcb..7e0c12c3 100644
--- a/man/IsCursorKey.man
+++ b/man/IsCursorKey.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -68,13 +68,13 @@ Specifies the KeySym that is to be tested.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B IsCursorKey
-macro returns 
+macro returns
 .B True
 if the specified KeySym is a cursor key.
 .LP
 The
 .B IsFunctionKey
-macro returns 
+macro returns
 .B True
 if the KeySym is a function key.
 .LP
diff --git a/man/XAddConnectionWatch.man b/man/XAddConnectionWatch.man
index 9222a419..f34b12f8 100644
--- a/man/XAddConnectionWatch.man
+++ b/man/XAddConnectionWatch.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -52,18 +52,18 @@ XAddConnectionWatch, XRemoveConnectionWatch, XProcessInternalConnection, XIntern
 .HP
 typedef void (*XConnectionWatchProc)\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XPointer
 \fIclient_data\fP\^, int \fIfd\fP\^, Bool \fIopening\fP\^, XPointer
-*\fIwatch_data\fP\^); 
+*\fIwatch_data\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XAddConnectionWatch\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XWatchProc
-\fIprocedure\fP\^, XPointer \fIclient_data\fP\^); 
+\fIprocedure\fP\^, XPointer \fIclient_data\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XRemoveConnectionWatch\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XWatchProc
-\fIprocedure\fP\^, XPointer \fIclient_data\fP\^); 
+\fIprocedure\fP\^, XPointer \fIclient_data\fP\^);
 .HP
 void XProcessInternalConnection\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fIfd\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XInternalConnectionNumbers\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int
-**\fIfd_return\fP\^, int *\fIcount_return\fP\^); 
+**\fIfd_return\fP\^, int *\fIcount_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIclient_data\fP 1i
 Specifies the additional client data.
diff --git a/man/XAddHost.man b/man/XAddHost.man
index 468ce133..4bb93b4f 100644
--- a/man/XAddHost.man
+++ b/man/XAddHost.man
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 .\" Copyright \(co 1985, 1986, 1987, 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1994, 1996 X Consortium
 .\"
 .\" All rights reserved.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a
 .\" copy of this software and associated documentation files (the
 .\" "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
 .\" copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in all copies of
 .\" the Software and that both the above copyright notice(s) and this
 .\" permission notice appear in supporting documentation.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
 .\" OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
 .\" MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
@@ -21,12 +21,12 @@
 .\" FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
 .\" NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
 .\" WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder
 .\" shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
 .\" or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization
 .\" of the copyright holder.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\" X Window System is a trademark of The Open Group.
 .\"
 .\" Copyright 2004 Oracle and/or its affiliates. All rights reserved.
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -76,9 +76,9 @@
 XAddHost, XAddHosts, XListHosts, XRemoveHost, XRemoveHosts, XSetAccessControl, XEnableAccessControl, XDisableAccessControl, XHostAddress, XServerInterpretedAddress \- control host access and host control structure
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-int XAddHost\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, XHostAddress *\fIhost\fP\^); 
+int XAddHost\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, XHostAddress *\fIhost\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XAddHosts\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, XHostAddress *\fIhosts\fP, 
+int XAddHosts\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, XHostAddress *\fIhosts\fP,
 int \fInum_hosts\fP\^);
 .HP
 XHostAddress *XListHosts\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, int *\fInhosts_return\fP,
@@ -143,19 +143,19 @@ errors.
 .LP
 The
 .B XListHosts
-function returns the current access control list as well as whether the use 
+function returns the current access control list as well as whether the use
 of the list at connection setup was enabled or disabled.
 .B XListHosts
 allows a program to find out what machines can make connections.
 It also returns a pointer to a list of host structures that
-were allocated by the function. 
+were allocated by the function.
 When no longer needed,
 this memory should be freed by calling
 .BR XFree .
 .LP
 The
 .B XRemoveHost
-function removes the specified host from the access control list 
+function removes the specified host from the access control list
 for that display.
 The server must be on the same host as the client process, or a
 .B BadAccess
@@ -173,12 +173,12 @@ errors.
 .LP
 The
 .B XRemoveHosts
-function removes each specified host from the access control list for that 
-display.  
+function removes each specified host from the access control list for that
+display.
 The X server must be on the same host as the client process, or a
 .B BadAccess
 error results.
-If you remove your machine from the access list, 
+If you remove your machine from the access list,
 you can no longer connect to that server,
 and this operation cannot be reversed unless you reset the server.
 .LP
@@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ errors.
 .LP
 The
 .B XSetAccessControl
-function either enables or disables the use of the access control list 
+function either enables or disables the use of the access control list
 at each connection setup.
 .LP
 .B XSetAccessControl
@@ -231,7 +231,7 @@ typedef struct {
 } XHostAddress;
 .EE
 .LP
-The family member specifies which protocol address family to use 
+The family member specifies which protocol address family to use
 (for example, TCP/IP or DECnet) and can be
 .BR FamilyInternet ,
 .BR FamilyInternet6 ,
@@ -242,8 +242,8 @@ or
 The length member specifies the length of the address in bytes.
 The address member specifies a pointer to the address.
 .LP
-For the ServerInterpreted family, the length is ignored and the address 
-member is a pointer to a 
+For the ServerInterpreted family, the length is ignored and the address
+member is a pointer to a
 .B XServerInterpretedAddress
 structure which contains:
 .LP
diff --git a/man/XAllocClassHint.man b/man/XAllocClassHint.man
index 22e0b0ea..bf0e19f1 100644
--- a/man/XAllocClassHint.man
+++ b/man/XAllocClassHint.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Specifies the
 .B XClassHint
 structure that is to be used.
 .IP \fIclass_hints_return\fP 1i
-Returns the 
+Returns the
 .B XClassHint
 structure.
 .IP \fIw\fP 1i
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ structure.
 Note that the pointer fields in the
 .B XClassHint
 structure are initially set to NULL.
-If insufficient memory is available, 
+If insufficient memory is available,
 .B XAllocClassHint
 returns NULL.
 To free the memory allocated to this structure,
@@ -132,15 +132,15 @@ typedef struct {
         char *res_class;
 } XClassHint;
 .LP
-The res_name member contains the application name, 
-and the res_class member contains the application class. 
+The res_name member contains the application name,
+and the res_class member contains the application class.
 Note that the name set in this property may differ from the name set as WM_NAME.
 That is, WM_NAME specifies what should be displayed in the title bar and,
 therefore, can contain temporal information (for example, the name of
 a file currently in an editor's buffer).
-On the other hand, 
+On the other hand,
 the name specified as part of WM_CLASS is the formal name of the application
-that should be used when retrieving the application's resources from the 
+that should be used when retrieving the application's resources from the
 resource database.
 .SH DIAGNOSTICS
 .TP 1i
diff --git a/man/XAllocColor.man b/man/XAllocColor.man
index 69d58b77..1a669079 100644
--- a/man/XAllocColor.man
+++ b/man/XAllocColor.man
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ unsigned long *\fIgmask_return\fP\^, unsigned long *\fIbmask_return\fP\^);
 int XFreeColors\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, Colormap \fIcolormap\fP\^, unsigned
 long \fIpixels\fP\^[\^], int \fInpixels\fP\^, unsigned long \fIplanes\fP\^);
 .IP \fIcolor_name\fP 1i
-Specifies the color name string (for example, red) whose color 
+Specifies the color name string (for example, red) whose color
 definition structure you want returned.
 .IP \fIcolormap\fP 1i
 Specifies the colormap.
@@ -84,13 +84,13 @@ Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIexact_def_return\fP 1i
 Returns the exact RGB values.
 .IP \fIncolors\fP 1i
-Specifies the number of pixel values that are to be returned in the 
-pixels_return array. 
+Specifies the number of pixel values that are to be returned in the
+pixels_return array.
 .IP \fInpixels\fP 1i
-Specifies the number of pixels. 
+Specifies the number of pixels.
 .IP \fInplanes\fP 1i
-Specifies the number of plane masks that are to be returned in the plane masks 
-array. 
+Specifies the number of plane masks that are to be returned in the plane masks
+array.
 .IP \fInreds\fP 1i
 .br
 .ns
@@ -101,11 +101,11 @@ array.
 .br
 .ns
 Specify the number of red, green, and blue planes.
-The value you pass must be nonnegative. 
+The value you pass must be nonnegative.
 .IP \fIpixels\fP 1i
-Specifies an array of pixel values. 
+Specifies an array of pixel values.
 .IP \fIpixels_return\fP 1i
-Returns an array of pixel values. 
+Returns an array of pixel values.
 .IP \fIplane_mask_return\fP 1i
 Returns an array of plane masks.
 .\" *** JIM: NEED MORE INFO FOR THIS. ***
@@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ It returns both the exact database definition and
 the closest color supported by the screen.
 The allocated color cell is read-only.
 The pixel value is returned in screen_def_return.
-If the color name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding, 
+If the color name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding,
 the result is implementation-dependent.
 Use of uppercase or lowercase does not matter.
 If screen_def_return and exact_def_return
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ The number of colors must be positive and the number of planes nonnegative,
 or a
 .B BadValue
 error results.
-If ncolors and nplanes are requested, 
+If ncolors and nplanes are requested,
 then ncolors pixels
 and nplane plane masks are returned.
 No mask will have any bits set to 1 in common with
@@ -195,23 +195,23 @@ By ORing together each pixel with zero or more masks,
 ncolors * %2 sup nplanes% distinct pixels can be produced.
 All of these are
 allocated writable by the request.
-For 
+For
 .B GrayScale
-or 
+or
 .BR PseudoColor ,
-each mask has exactly one bit set to 1. 
-For 
+each mask has exactly one bit set to 1.
+For
 .BR DirectColor ,
 each has exactly three bits set to 1.
-If contig is 
+If contig is
 .B True
 and if all masks are ORed
-together, a single contiguous set of bits set to 1 will be formed for 
+together, a single contiguous set of bits set to 1 will be formed for
 .B GrayScale
-or 
+or
 .B PseudoColor
 and three contiguous sets of bits set to 1 (one within each
-pixel subfield) for 
+pixel subfield) for
 .BR DirectColor .
 The RGB values of the allocated
 entries are undefined.
@@ -228,41 +228,41 @@ errors.
 .EQ
 delim %%
 .EN
-The specified ncolors must be positive; 
+The specified ncolors must be positive;
 and nreds, ngreens, and nblues must be nonnegative,
 or a
 .B BadValue
 error results.
-If ncolors colors, nreds reds, ngreens greens, and nblues blues are requested, 
-ncolors pixels are returned; and the masks have nreds, ngreens, and 
+If ncolors colors, nreds reds, ngreens greens, and nblues blues are requested,
+ncolors pixels are returned; and the masks have nreds, ngreens, and
 nblues bits set to 1, respectively.
-If contig is 
+If contig is
 .BR True ,
 each mask will have
 a contiguous set of bits set to 1.
 No mask will have any bits set to 1 in common with
 any other mask or with any of the pixels.
-For 
+For
 .BR DirectColor ,
 each mask
 will lie within the corresponding pixel subfield.
 By ORing together
-subsets of masks with each pixel value, 
-ncolors * %2 sup (nreds+ngreens+nblues)% distinct pixel values can be produced. 
+subsets of masks with each pixel value,
+ncolors * %2 sup (nreds+ngreens+nblues)% distinct pixel values can be produced.
 All of these are allocated by the request.
 However, in the
-colormap, there are only ncolors * %2 sup nreds% independent red entries, 
-ncolors * %2 sup ngreens% independent green entries, 
-and ncolors * %2 sup nblues% independent blue entries. 
-This is true even for 
+colormap, there are only ncolors * %2 sup nreds% independent red entries,
+ncolors * %2 sup ngreens% independent green entries,
+and ncolors * %2 sup nblues% independent blue entries.
+This is true even for
 .BR PseudoColor .
 When the colormap entry of a pixel
-value is changed (using 
+value is changed (using
 .BR XStoreColors ,
 .BR XStoreColor ,
-or 
+or
 .BR XStoreNamedColor ),
-the pixel is decomposed according to the masks, 
+the pixel is decomposed according to the masks,
 and the corresponding independent entries are updated.
 .B XAllocColorPlanes
 returns nonzero if it succeeded or zero if it failed.
@@ -279,11 +279,11 @@ The
 function frees the cells represented by pixels whose values are in the
 pixels array.
 The planes argument should not have any bits set to 1 in common with any of the
-pixels. 
+pixels.
 The set of all pixels is produced by ORing together subsets of
 the planes argument with the pixels.
 The request frees all of these pixels that
-were allocated by the client (using 
+were allocated by the client (using
 .IN XAllocColor
 .IN XAllocNamedColor
 .IN XAllocColorCells
@@ -291,10 +291,10 @@ were allocated by the client (using
 .BR XAllocColor ,
 .BR XAllocNamedColor ,
 .BR XAllocColorCells ,
-and 
+and
 .BR XAllocColorPlanes ).
 Note that freeing an
-individual pixel obtained from 
+individual pixel obtained from
 .B XAllocColorPlanes
 may not actually allow
 it to be reused until all of its related pixels are also freed.
@@ -304,8 +304,8 @@ and if a client allocates the same read-only entry multiple times,
 it must free the entry that many times before the entry is actually freed.
 .LP
 All specified pixels that are allocated by the client in the colormap are
-freed, even if one or more pixels produce an error. 
-If a specified pixel is not a valid index into the colormap, a 
+freed, even if one or more pixels produce an error.
+If a specified pixel is not a valid index into the colormap, a
 .B BadValue
 error results.
 If a specified pixel is not allocated by the
@@ -316,8 +316,8 @@ to
 .BR XCreateColormap ),
 a
 .B BadAccess
-error results. 
-If more than one pixel is in error, 
+error results.
+If more than one pixel is in error,
 the one that gets reported is arbitrary.
 .LP
 .B XFreeColors
@@ -346,8 +346,8 @@ Unless a specific range is specified for an argument, the full range defined
 by the argument's type is accepted.  Any argument defined as a set of
 alternatives can generate this error.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-XCreateColormap(__libmansuffix__), 
+XCreateColormap(__libmansuffix__),
 XQueryColor(__libmansuffix__),
-XStoreColors(__libmansuffix__) 
+XStoreColors(__libmansuffix__)
 .br
 \fI\*(xL\fP
diff --git a/man/XAllocIconSize.man b/man/XAllocIconSize.man
index c3393892..ae5162ff 100644
--- a/man/XAllocIconSize.man
+++ b/man/XAllocIconSize.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ structure.
 Note that all fields in the
 .B XIconSize
 structure are initially set to zero.
-If insufficient memory is available, 
+If insufficient memory is available,
 .B XAllocIconSize
 returns NULL.
 To free the memory allocated to this structure,
@@ -121,7 +121,7 @@ error.
 \s-1WM_ICON_SIZES\s+1
 The window manager may set this property on the root window to
 specify the icon sizes it supports.
-The C type of this property is 
+The C type of this property is
 .BR XIconSize .
 .SH STRUCTURES
 The
diff --git a/man/XAllocSizeHints.man b/man/XAllocSizeHints.man
index ee0fc025..0606a567 100644
--- a/man/XAllocSizeHints.man
+++ b/man/XAllocSizeHints.man
@@ -40,11 +40,11 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
-.ds xL Xlib \- C Language X Interface, \fRO'Reilly and Associates, 
+.ds xL Xlib \- C Language X Interface, \fRO'Reilly and Associates,
 .ds xC Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual
 '\" t
 .TH XAllocSizeHints __libmansuffix__ __xorgversion__ "XLIB FUNCTIONS"
@@ -90,16 +90,16 @@ structure.
 Note that all fields in the
 .B XSizeHints
 structure are initially set to zero.
-If insufficient memory is available, 
+If insufficient memory is available,
 .B XAllocSizeHints
 returns NULL.
 To free the memory allocated to this structure,
 use
 .BR XFree .
 .LP
-The 
+The
 .B XSetWMNormalHints
-function replaces the size hints for the WM_NORMAL_HINTS property 
+function replaces the size hints for the WM_NORMAL_HINTS property
 on the specified window.
 If the property does not already exist,
 .B XSetWMNormalHints
@@ -113,24 +113,24 @@ and
 .B BadWindow
 errors.
 .LP
-The 
+The
 .B XGetWMNormalHints
-function returns the size hints stored in the WM_NORMAL_HINTS property 
+function returns the size hints stored in the WM_NORMAL_HINTS property
 on the specified window.
 If the property is of type WM_SIZE_HINTS, is of format 32,
-and is long enough to contain either an old (pre-ICCCM) 
-or new size hints structure, 
+and is long enough to contain either an old (pre-ICCCM)
+or new size hints structure,
 .B XGetWMNormalHints
-sets the various fields of the 
+sets the various fields of the
 .B XSizeHints
-structure, sets the supplied_return argument to the list of fields 
+structure, sets the supplied_return argument to the list of fields
 that were supplied by the user (whether or not they contained defined values),
 and returns a nonzero status.
 Otherwise, it returns a zero status.
 .LP
-If 
+If
 .B XGetWMNormalHints
-returns successfully and a pre-ICCCM size hints property is read, 
+returns successfully and a pre-ICCCM size hints property is read,
 the supplied_return argument will contain the following bits:
 .LP
 .EX
@@ -138,8 +138,8 @@ the supplied_return argument will contain the following bits:
  PMaxSize|PResizeInc|PAspect)
 .EE
 .LP
-If the property is large enough to contain the base size 
-and window gravity fields as well, 
+If the property is large enough to contain the base size
+and window gravity fields as well,
 the supplied_return argument will also contain the following bits:
 .LP
 .EX
@@ -151,17 +151,17 @@ can generate a
 PN BadWindow
 error.
 .LP
-The 
+The
 .B XSetWMSizeHints
-function replaces the size hints for the specified property 
+function replaces the size hints for the specified property
 on the named window.
 If the specified property does not already exist,
 .B XSetWMSizeHints
 sets the size hints for the specified property
 on the named window.
 The property is stored with a type of WM_SIZE_HINTS and a format of 32.
-To set a window's normal size hints, 
-you can use the 
+To set a window's normal size hints,
+you can use the
 .B XSetWMNormalHints
 function.
 .LP
@@ -173,29 +173,29 @@ and
 .B BadWindow
 errors.
 .LP
-The 
+The
 .B XGetWMSizeHints
-function returns the size hints stored in the specified property 
+function returns the size hints stored in the specified property
 on the named window.
-If the property is of type WM_SIZE_HINTS, is of format 32, 
-and is long enough to contain either an old (pre-ICCCM) 
-or new size hints structure, 
+If the property is of type WM_SIZE_HINTS, is of format 32,
+and is long enough to contain either an old (pre-ICCCM)
+or new size hints structure,
 .B XGetWMSizeHints
-sets the various fields of the 
+sets the various fields of the
 .B XSizeHints
 structure, sets the supplied_return argument to the
-list of fields that were supplied by the user 
-(whether or not they contained defined values), 
+list of fields that were supplied by the user
+(whether or not they contained defined values),
 and returns a nonzero status.
 Otherwise, it returns a zero status.
-To get a window's normal size hints, 
-you can use the 
+To get a window's normal size hints,
+you can use the
 .B XGetWMNormalHints
 function.
 .LP
-If 
+If
 .B XGetWMSizeHints
-returns successfully and a pre-ICCCM size hints property is read, 
+returns successfully and a pre-ICCCM size hints property is read,
 the supplied_return argument will contain the following bits:
 .LP
 .EX
@@ -203,8 +203,8 @@ the supplied_return argument will contain the following bits:
  PMaxSize|PResizeInc|PAspect)
 .EE
 .LP
-If the property is large enough to contain the base size 
-and window gravity fields as well, 
+If the property is large enough to contain the base size
+and window gravity fields as well,
 the supplied_return argument will also contain the following bits:
 .LP
 .EX
@@ -359,19 +359,19 @@ The max_width and max_height members specify the maximum window size.
 The width_inc and height_inc members define an arithmetic progression of
 sizes (minimum to maximum) into which the window prefers to be resized.
 The min_aspect and max_aspect members are expressed
-as ratios of x and y, 
+as ratios of x and y,
 and they allow an application to specify the range of aspect
 ratios it prefers.
 The base_width and base_height members define the desired size of the window.
-The window manager will interpret the position of the window 
-and its border width to position the point of the outer rectangle 
+The window manager will interpret the position of the window
+and its border width to position the point of the outer rectangle
 of the overall window specified by the win_gravity member.
 The outer rectangle of the window includes any borders or decorations
 supplied by the window manager.
 In other words,
 if the window manager decides to place the window where the client asked,
-the position on the parent window's border named by the win_gravity 
-will be placed where the client window would have been placed 
+the position on the parent window's border named by the win_gravity
+will be placed where the client window would have been placed
 in the absence of a window manager.
 .LP
 Note that use of the
diff --git a/man/XAllocStandardColormap.man b/man/XAllocStandardColormap.man
index 2222443f..f042b14d 100644
--- a/man/XAllocStandardColormap.man
+++ b/man/XAllocStandardColormap.man
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -87,16 +87,16 @@ structure.
 Note that all fields in the
 .B XStandardColormap
 structure are initially set to zero.
-If insufficient memory is available, 
+If insufficient memory is available,
 .B XAllocStandardColormap
 returns NULL.
 To free the memory allocated to this structure,
 use
 .BR XFree .
 .LP
-The 
+The
 .B XSetRGBColormaps
-function replaces the RGB colormap definition in the specified property 
+function replaces the RGB colormap definition in the specified property
 on the named window.
 If the property does not already exist,
 .B XSetRGBColormaps
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ restriction that only RGB_DEFAULT_MAP contain more than one definition.
 The
 .B XSetRGBColormaps
 function usually is only used by window or session managers.
-To create a standard colormap, 
+To create a standard colormap,
 follow this procedure:
 .IP 1. 5
 Open a new connection to the same server.
@@ -128,11 +128,11 @@ Determine the color characteristics of the visual.
 Allocate cells in the colormap (or create it with
 .BR AllocAll ).
 .IP \(bu 5
-Call 
+Call
 .B XStoreColors
 to store appropriate color values in the colormap.
 .IP \(bu 5
-Fill in the descriptive members in the 
+Fill in the descriptive members in the
 .B XStandardColormap
 structure.
 .IP \(bu 5
@@ -153,23 +153,23 @@ and
 .B BadWindow
 errors.
 .LP
-The 
+The
 .B XGetRGBColormaps
-function returns the RGB colormap definitions stored 
+function returns the RGB colormap definitions stored
 in the specified property on the named window.
-If the property exists, is of type RGB_COLOR_MAP, is of format 32, 
+If the property exists, is of type RGB_COLOR_MAP, is of format 32,
 and is long enough to contain a colormap definition,
 .B XGetRGBColormaps
 allocates and fills in space for the returned colormaps
 and returns a nonzero status.
-If the visualid is not present, 
+If the visualid is not present,
 .B XGetRGBColormaps
-assumes the default visual for the screen on which the window is located; 
-if the killid is not present, 
+assumes the default visual for the screen on which the window is located;
+if the killid is not present,
 .B None
 is assumed, which indicates that the resources cannot be released.
-Otherwise, 
-none of the fields are set, and 
+Otherwise,
+none of the fields are set, and
 .B XGetRGBColormaps
 returns a zero status.
 Note that it is the caller's responsibility to honor the ICCCM
@@ -218,30 +218,30 @@ The colormap member is the colormap created by the
 .B XCreateColormap
 function.
 The red_max, green_max, and blue_max members give the maximum
-red, green, and blue values, respectively.  
-Each color coefficient ranges from zero to its max, inclusive.  
+red, green, and blue values, respectively.
+Each color coefficient ranges from zero to its max, inclusive.
 For example,
 a common colormap allocation is 3/3/2 (3 planes for red, 3
-planes for green, and 2 planes for blue).  
-This colormap would have red_max = 7, green_max = 7, 
-and blue_max = 3.  
-An alternate allocation that uses only 216 colors is red_max = 5, 
+planes for green, and 2 planes for blue).
+This colormap would have red_max = 7, green_max = 7,
+and blue_max = 3.
+An alternate allocation that uses only 216 colors is red_max = 5,
 green_max = 5, and blue_max = 5.
 .LP
 The red_mult, green_mult, and blue_mult members give the
-scale factors used to compose a full pixel value. 
+scale factors used to compose a full pixel value.
 (See the discussion of the base_pixel members for further information.)
 For a 3/3/2 allocation, red_mult might be 32,
-green_mult might be 4, and blue_mult might be 1.  
-For a 6-colors-each allocation, red_mult might be 36, 
+green_mult might be 4, and blue_mult might be 1.
+For a 6-colors-each allocation, red_mult might be 36,
 green_mult might be 6, and blue_mult might be 1.
 .LP
 The base_pixel member gives the base pixel value used to
-compose a full pixel value.  
-Usually, the base_pixel is obtained from a call to the 
+compose a full pixel value.
+Usually, the base_pixel is obtained from a call to the
 .B XAllocColorPlanes
-function.  
-Given integer red, green, and blue coefficients in their appropriate 
+function.
+Given integer red, green, and blue coefficients in their appropriate
 ranges, one then can compute a corresponding pixel value by
 using the following expression:
 .LP
@@ -249,13 +249,13 @@ using the following expression:
 (r * red_mult + g * green_mult + b * blue_mult + base_pixel) & 0xFFFFFFFF
 .EE
 .LP
-For 
+For
 .B GrayScale
-colormaps, 
-only the colormap, red_max, red_mult, 
-and base_pixel members are defined. 
-The other members are ignored.  
-To compute a 
+colormaps,
+only the colormap, red_max, red_mult,
+and base_pixel members are defined.
+The other members are ignored.
+To compute a
 .B GrayScale
 pixel value, use the following expression:
 .LP
@@ -274,15 +274,15 @@ depending on the size of the integer type used to do the computation,
 The visualid member gives the ID number of the visual from which the
 colormap was created.
 The killid member gives a resource ID that indicates whether
-the cells held by this standard colormap are to be released 
+the cells held by this standard colormap are to be released
 by freeing the colormap ID or by calling the
 .B XKillClient
 function on the indicated resource.
 (Note that this method is necessary for allocating out of an existing colormap.)
 .LP
-The properties containing the 
+The properties containing the
 .B XStandardColormap
-information have 
+information have
 the type RGB_COLOR_MAP.
 .SH DIAGNOSTICS
 .TP 1i
diff --git a/man/XAllocWMHints.man b/man/XAllocWMHints.man
index 86df6dcc..22ebb227 100644
--- a/man/XAllocWMHints.man
+++ b/man/XAllocWMHints.man
@@ -40,11 +40,11 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
-.ds xL Xlib \- C Language X Interface, \fRO'Reilly and Associates, Sebastopol, 1991. 
+.ds xL Xlib \- C Language X Interface, \fRO'Reilly and Associates, Sebastopol, 1991.
 .ds xC Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual
 '\" t
 .TH XAllocWMHints __libmansuffix__ __xorgversion__ "XLIB FUNCTIONS"
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@
 XAllocWMHints, XSetWMHints, XGetWMHints, XWMHints \- allocate window manager hints structure and set or read a window's WM_HINTS property
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-XWMHints *XAllocWMHints\^(void\^); 
+XWMHints *XAllocWMHints\^(void\^);
 .HP
 int XSetWMHints\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, Window \fIw\fP, XWMHints *\fIwmhints\fP\^);
 .HP
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIw\fP 1i
 Specifies the window.
 .IP \fIwmhints\fP 1i
-Specifies the 
+Specifies the
 .B XWMHints
 structure to be used.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ structure.
 Note that all fields in the
 .B XWMHints
 structure are initially set to zero.
-If insufficient memory is available, 
+If insufficient memory is available,
 .B XAllocWMHints
 returns NULL.
 To free the memory allocated to this structure,
@@ -97,9 +97,9 @@ errors.
 .LP
 The
 .B XGetWMHints
-function reads the window manager hints and 
-returns NULL if no WM_HINTS property was set on the window 
-or returns a pointer to a 
+function reads the window manager hints and
+returns NULL if no WM_HINTS property was set on the window
+or returns a pointer to a
 .B XWMHints
 structure if it succeeds.
 When finished with the data,
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ error.
 .TP 1i
 \s-1WM_HINTS\s+1
 Additional hints set by the client for use by the window manager.
-The C type of this property is 
+The C type of this property is
 .BR XWMHints .
 .SH STRUCTURES
 The
@@ -212,33 +212,33 @@ typedef struct {
 .LP
 The input member is used to communicate to the window manager the input focus
 model used by the application.
-Applications that expect input but never explicitly set focus to any 
-of their subwindows (that is, use the push model of focus management), 
+Applications that expect input but never explicitly set focus to any
+of their subwindows (that is, use the push model of focus management),
 such as X Version 10 style applications that use real-estate
-driven focus, should set this member to 
+driven focus, should set this member to
 .BR True .
 Similarly, applications
 that set input focus to their subwindows only when it is given to their
-top-level window by a window manager should also set this member to 
+top-level window by a window manager should also set this member to
 .BR True .
 Applications that manage their own input focus by explicitly setting
-focus to one of their subwindows whenever they want keyboard input 
-(that is, use the pull model of focus management) should set this member to 
+focus to one of their subwindows whenever they want keyboard input
+(that is, use the pull model of focus management) should set this member to
 .BR False .
 Applications that never expect any keyboard input also should set this member
-to 
+to
 .BR False .
 .LP
 Pull model window managers should make it possible for push model
 applications to get input by setting input focus to the top-level windows of
-applications whose input member is 
+applications whose input member is
 .BR True .
 Push model window managers should
-make sure that pull model applications do not break them 
-by resetting input focus to 
+make sure that pull model applications do not break them
+by resetting input focus to
 .B PointerRoot
 when it is appropriate (for example, whenever an application whose
-input member is 
+input member is
 .B False
 sets input focus to one of its subwindows).
 .LP
@@ -273,14 +273,14 @@ T}	T{
 T}
 .TE
 The icon_mask specifies which pixels of the icon_pixmap should be used as the
-icon.  
+icon.
 This allows for nonrectangular icons.
 Both icon_pixmap and icon_mask must be bitmaps.
 The icon_window lets an application provide a window for use as an icon
 for window managers that support such use.
 The window_group lets you specify that this window belongs to a group
 of other windows.
-For example, if a single application manipulates multiple 
+For example, if a single application manipulates multiple
 top-level windows, this allows you to provide enough
 information that a window manager can iconify all of the windows
 rather than just the one window.
diff --git a/man/XAllowEvents.man b/man/XAllowEvents.man
index 5006098f..4b958039 100644
--- a/man/XAllowEvents.man
+++ b/man/XAllowEvents.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,13 +51,13 @@ XAllowEvents \- release queued events
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XAllowEvents\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, int \fIevent_mode\fP\^,
-Time \fItime\fP\^); 
+Time \fItime\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIevent_mode\fP 1i
 Specifies the event mode.
-You can pass 
+You can pass
 .BR AsyncPointer ,
 .BR SyncPointer ,
 .BR AsyncKeyboard ,
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ You can pass either a timestamp or
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B XAllowEvents
-function releases some queued events if the client has caused a device 
+function releases some queued events if the client has caused a device
 to freeze.
 It has no effect if the specified time is earlier than the last-grab
 time of the most recent active grab for the client or if the specified time
diff --git a/man/XAnyEvent.man b/man/XAnyEvent.man
index 23618f49..9efb9f42 100644
--- a/man/XAnyEvent.man
+++ b/man/XAnyEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@
 .SH NAME
 XAnyEvent, XEvent \- generic X event structures
 .SH STRUCTURES
-All the event structures declared in 
+All the event structures declared in
 .Pn < X11/Xlib.h >
 have the following common members:
 .EX
diff --git a/man/XButtonEvent.man b/man/XButtonEvent.man
index 66a41c43..ce19cab5 100644
--- a/man/XButtonEvent.man
+++ b/man/XButtonEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -142,14 +142,14 @@ dispatchers.
 These structures have the following common members:
 window, root, subwindow, time, x, y, x_root, y_root, state, and same_screen.
 The window member is set to the window on which the
-event was generated and is referred to as the event window. 
+event was generated and is referred to as the event window.
 As long as the conditions previously discussed are met,
 this is the window used by the X server to report the event.
 The root member is set to the source window's root window.
 The x_root and y_root members are set to the pointer's coordinates
 relative to the root window's origin at the time of the event.
 .LP
-The same_screen member is set to indicate whether the event 
+The same_screen member is set to indicate whether the event
 window is on the same screen
 as the root window and can be either
 .B True
@@ -162,21 +162,21 @@ If
 .BR False ,
 the event and root windows are not on the same screen.
 .LP
-If the source window is an inferior of the event window, 
+If the source window is an inferior of the event window,
 the subwindow member of the structure is set to the child of the event window
 that is the source window or the child of the event window that is
 an ancestor of the source window.
 Otherwise, the X server sets the subwindow member to
 .BR None .
-The time member is set to the time when the event was generated 
+The time member is set to the time when the event was generated
 and is expressed in milliseconds.
 .LP
-If the event window is on the same screen as the root window, 
+If the event window is on the same screen as the root window,
 the x and y members
 are set to the coordinates relative to the event window's origin.
 Otherwise, these members are set to zero.
 .LP
-The state member is set to indicate the logical state of the pointer buttons 
+The state member is set to indicate the logical state of the pointer buttons
 and modifier keys just prior to the event,
 which is the bitwise inclusive OR of one or more of the
 button or modifier key masks:
@@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ value.
 For the
 .B XPointerMovedEvent
 structure, this member is called is_hint.
-It can be set to 
+It can be set to
 .B NotifyNormal
 or
 .BR NotifyHint .
diff --git a/man/XChangeKeyboardControl.man b/man/XChangeKeyboardControl.man
index a6174133..5acf4aeb 100644
--- a/man/XChangeKeyboardControl.man
+++ b/man/XChangeKeyboardControl.man
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -53,18 +53,18 @@ XChangeKeyboardControl, XGetKeyboardControl, XAutoRepeatOn, XAutoRepeatOff, XBel
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XChangeKeyboardControl\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, unsigned long
-\fIvalue_mask\fP\^, XKeyboardControl *\fIvalues\fP\^); 
+\fIvalue_mask\fP\^, XKeyboardControl *\fIvalues\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XGetKeyboardControl\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, XKeyboardState
-*\fIvalues_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIvalues_return\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XAutoRepeatOn\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+int XAutoRepeatOn\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XAutoRepeatOff\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+int XAutoRepeatOff\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XBell\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, int \fIpercent\fP\^); 
+int XBell\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, int \fIpercent\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XQueryKeymap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, char \fIkeys_return\fP[32]\^); 
+int XQueryKeymap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, char \fIkeys_return\fP[32]\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Returns an array of bytes that identifies which keys are pressed down.
 Each bit represents one key of the keyboard.
 .IP \fIpercent\fP 1i
 Specifies the volume for the bell,
-which can range from \-100 to 100 inclusive. 
+which can range from \-100 to 100 inclusive.
 .IP \fIvalue_mask\fP 1i
 Specifies which controls to change.
 This mask is the bitwise inclusive OR of the valid control mask bits.
@@ -140,11 +140,11 @@ error.
 .LP
 The
 .B XQueryKeymap
-function returns a bit vector for the logical state of the keyboard, 
-where each bit set to 1 indicates that the corresponding key is currently 
+function returns a bit vector for the logical state of the keyboard,
+where each bit set to 1 indicates that the corresponding key is currently
 pressed down.
 The vector is represented as 32 bytes.
-Byte N (from 0) contains the bits for keys 8N to 8N + 7 
+Byte N (from 0) contains the bits for keys 8N to 8N + 7
 with the least significant bit in the byte representing key 8N.
 .LP
 Note that the logical state of a device (as seen by client applications)
@@ -227,20 +227,20 @@ typedef struct {
         int led;
         int led_mode;   /\&* LedModeOn, LedModeOff */
         int key;
-        int auto_repeat_mode;   /\&* AutoRepeatModeOff, AutoRepeatModeOn, 
+        int auto_repeat_mode;   /\&* AutoRepeatModeOff, AutoRepeatModeOn,
                                 AutoRepeatModeDefault */
 } XKeyboardControl;
 .EE
 .LP
-The key_click_percent member sets the volume for key clicks between 0 (off) 
-and 100 (loud) inclusive, if possible.  
+The key_click_percent member sets the volume for key clicks between 0 (off)
+and 100 (loud) inclusive, if possible.
 A setting of \-1 restores the default.
 Other negative values generate a
 .B BadValue
 error.
 .LP
 The bell_percent sets the base volume for the bell between 0 (off) and 100
-(loud) inclusive, if possible.  
+(loud) inclusive, if possible.
 A setting of \-1 restores the default.
 Other negative values generate a
 .B BadValue
@@ -251,27 +251,27 @@ Other negative values generate a
 .B BadValue
 error.
 The bell_duration member sets the duration of the
-bell specified in milliseconds, if possible.  
+bell specified in milliseconds, if possible.
 A setting of \-1 restores the default.
 Other negative values generate a
 .B BadValue
 error.
 .LP
 If both the led_mode and led members are specified,
-the state of that LED is changed, if possible.  
+the state of that LED is changed, if possible.
 The led_mode member can be set to
 .B LedModeOn
 or
 .BR LedModeOff .
 If only led_mode is specified, the state of
-all LEDs are changed, if possible.  
-At most 32 LEDs numbered from one are supported. 
+all LEDs are changed, if possible.
+At most 32 LEDs numbered from one are supported.
 No standard interpretation of LEDs is defined.
 If led is specified without led_mode, a
 .B BadMatch
-error results. 
+error results.
 .LP
-If both the auto_repeat_mode and key members are specified, 
+If both the auto_repeat_mode and key members are specified,
 the auto_repeat_mode of that key is changed (according to
 .BR AutoRepeatModeOn ,
 .BR AutoRepeatModeOff ,
@@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ typedef struct {
 } XKeyboardState;
 .EE
 .LP
-For the LEDs, 
+For the LEDs,
 the least significant bit of led_mask corresponds to LED one,
 and each bit set to 1 in led_mask indicates an LED that is lit.
 The global_auto_repeat member can be set to
@@ -327,9 +327,9 @@ The global_auto_repeat member can be set to
 or
 .BR AutoRepeatModeOff .
 The auto_repeats member is a bit vector.
-Each bit set to 1 indicates that auto-repeat is enabled 
+Each bit set to 1 indicates that auto-repeat is enabled
 for the corresponding key.
-The vector is represented as 32 bytes.  
+The vector is represented as 32 bytes.
 Byte N (from 0) contains the bits for keys 8N to 8N + 7
 with the least significant bit in the byte representing key 8N.
 .SH DIAGNOSTICS
diff --git a/man/XChangeKeyboardMapping.man b/man/XChangeKeyboardMapping.man
index 6b26549a..cdc066e6 100644
--- a/man/XChangeKeyboardMapping.man
+++ b/man/XChangeKeyboardMapping.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,29 +51,29 @@ XChangeKeyboardMapping, XGetKeyboardMapping, XDisplayKeycodes, XSetModifierMappi
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XChangeKeyboardMapping(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, int \fIfirst_keycode\fP,
-int \fIkeysyms_per_keycode\fP, KeySym *\fIkeysyms\fP, int \fInum_codes\fP\^); 
+int \fIkeysyms_per_keycode\fP, KeySym *\fIkeysyms\fP, int \fInum_codes\fP\^);
 .HP
 KeySym *XGetKeyboardMapping(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, KeyCode
 \fIfirst_keycode\fP, int \fIkeycode_count\fP, int
-*\fIkeysyms_per_keycode_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIkeysyms_per_keycode_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XDisplayKeycodes\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int
-*\fImin_keycodes_return\fP\^, int *\fImax_keycodes_return\fP\^); 
+*\fImin_keycodes_return\fP\^, int *\fImax_keycodes_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XSetModifierMapping(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP, XModifierKeymap
-*\fImodmap\fP\^); 
+*\fImodmap\fP\^);
 .HP
-XModifierKeymap *XGetModifierMapping(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+XModifierKeymap *XGetModifierMapping(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .HP
-XModifierKeymap *XNewModifiermap(\^int \fImax_keys_per_mod\fP\^); 
+XModifierKeymap *XNewModifiermap(\^int \fImax_keys_per_mod\fP\^);
 .HP
 XModifierKeymap *XInsertModifiermapEntry\^(\^XModifierKeymap *\fImodmap\fP,
-KeyCode \fIkeycode_entry\fP, int \fImodifier\fP\^); 
+KeyCode \fIkeycode_entry\fP, int \fImodifier\fP\^);
 .HP
 XModifierKeymap *XDeleteModifiermapEntry\^(\^XModifierKeymap *\fImodmap\fP,
-KeyCode \fIkeycode_entry\fP, int \fImodifier\fP\^); 
+KeyCode \fIkeycode_entry\fP, int \fImodifier\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XFreeModifiermap(\^XModifierKeymap *\fImodmap\fP\^); 
+int XFreeModifiermap(\^XModifierKeymap *\fImodmap\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Specifies the first KeyCode that is to be changed or returned.
 .IP \fIkeycode_count\fP 1i
 Specifies the number of KeyCodes that are to be returned.
 .IP \fIkeycode_entry\fP 1i
-Specifies the KeyCode. 
+Specifies the KeyCode.
 .IP \fIkeysyms\fP 1i
 Specifies an array of KeySyms.
 .IP \fIkeysyms_per_keycode\fP 1i
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ Returns the minimum number of KeyCodes.
 .IP \fImodifier\fP 1i
 Specifies the modifier.
 .IP \fImodmap\fP 1i
-Specifies the 
+Specifies the
 .B XModifierKeymap
 structure.
 .IP \fInum_codes\fP 1i
@@ -109,20 +109,20 @@ The
 .B XChangeKeyboardMapping
 function defines the symbols for the specified number of KeyCodes
 starting with first_keycode.
-The symbols for KeyCodes outside this range remain unchanged.  
+The symbols for KeyCodes outside this range remain unchanged.
 The number of elements in keysyms must be:
 .LP
 .EX
 num_codes * keysyms_per_keycode
 .EE
 .LP
-The specified first_keycode must be greater than or equal to min_keycode 
+The specified first_keycode must be greater than or equal to min_keycode
 returned by
 .BR XDisplayKeycodes ,
-or a 
+or a
 .B BadValue
 error results.
-In addition, the following expression must be less than or equal to 
+In addition, the following expression must be less than or equal to
 max_keycode as returned by
 .BR XDisplayKeycodes ,
 or a
@@ -134,28 +134,28 @@ first_keycode + num_codes \- 1
 .EE
 .LP
 KeySym number N, counting from zero, for KeyCode K has the following index
-in keysyms, counting from zero: 
+in keysyms, counting from zero:
 .LP
-.EX 
+.EX
 (K \- first_keycode) * keysyms_per_keycode + N
 .EE
 .LP
 The specified keysyms_per_keycode can be chosen arbitrarily by the client
-to be large enough to hold all desired symbols. 
-A special KeySym value of 
+to be large enough to hold all desired symbols.
+A special KeySym value of
 .B NoSymbol
-should be used to fill in unused elements 
-for individual KeyCodes.  
-It is legal for 
+should be used to fill in unused elements
+for individual KeyCodes.
+It is legal for
 .B NoSymbol
 to appear in nontrailing positions
 of the effective list for a KeyCode.
 .B XChangeKeyboardMapping
-generates a 
+generates a
 .B MappingNotify
 event.
 .LP
-There is no requirement that the X server interpret this mapping. 
+There is no requirement that the X server interpret this mapping.
 It is merely stored for reading and writing by clients.
 .LP
 .B XChangeKeyboardMapping
@@ -169,42 +169,42 @@ The
 .B XGetKeyboardMapping
 function returns the symbols for the specified number of KeyCodes
 starting with first_keycode.
-The value specified in first_keycode must be greater than 
+The value specified in first_keycode must be greater than
 or equal to min_keycode as returned by
 .BR XDisplayKeycodes ,
 or a
 .B BadValue
 error results.
-In addition, the following expression must be less than or equal 
+In addition, the following expression must be less than or equal
 to max_keycode as returned by
 .BR XDisplayKeycodes :
 .LP
-.EX 
+.EX
 first_keycode + keycode_count \- 1
 .EE
 .LP
-If this is not the case, a 
+If this is not the case, a
 .B BadValue
-error results. 
+error results.
 The number of elements in the KeySyms list is:
 .LP
-.EX 
+.EX
 keycode_count * keysyms_per_keycode_return
 .EE
 .LP
 KeySym number N, counting from zero, for KeyCode K has the following index
-in the list, counting from zero: 
+in the list, counting from zero:
 .EX
 (K \- first_code) * keysyms_per_code_return + N
 .EE
 .LP
-The X server arbitrarily chooses the keysyms_per_keycode_return value 
-to be large enough to report all requested symbols. 
-A special KeySym value of 
+The X server arbitrarily chooses the keysyms_per_keycode_return value
+to be large enough to report all requested symbols.
+A special KeySym value of
 .B NoSymbol
 is used to fill in unused elements for
 individual KeyCodes.
-To free the storage returned by 
+To free the storage returned by
 .BR XGetKeyboardMapping ,
 use
 .BR XFree .
@@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Not all KeyCodes in this range are required to have corresponding keys.
 .LP
 The
 .B XSetModifierMapping
-function specifies the KeyCodes of the keys (if any) that are to be used 
+function specifies the KeyCodes of the keys (if any) that are to be used
 as modifiers.
 If it succeeds,
 the X server generates a
@@ -240,10 +240,10 @@ structure, a
 .B BadLength
 error results.
 .LP
-The modifiermap member of the 
+The modifiermap member of the
 .B XModifierKeymap
-structure contains 8 sets of max_keypermod KeyCodes, 
-one for each modifier in the order 
+structure contains 8 sets of max_keypermod KeyCodes,
+one for each modifier in the order
 .BR Shift ,
 .BR Lock ,
 .BR Control ,
@@ -251,30 +251,30 @@ one for each modifier in the order
 .BR Mod2 ,
 .BR Mod3 ,
 .BR Mod4 ,
-and 
+and
 .BR Mod5 .
-Only nonzero KeyCodes have meaning in each set, 
+Only nonzero KeyCodes have meaning in each set,
 and zero KeyCodes are ignored.
-In addition, all of the nonzero KeyCodes must be in the range specified by 
-min_keycode and max_keycode in the 
+In addition, all of the nonzero KeyCodes must be in the range specified by
+min_keycode and max_keycode in the
 .B Display
 structure,
-or a 
+or a
 .B BadValue
 error results.
 .LP
-An X server can impose restrictions on how modifiers can be changed, 
+An X server can impose restrictions on how modifiers can be changed,
 for example,
 if certain keys do not generate up transitions in hardware,
 if auto-repeat cannot be disabled on certain keys,
-or if multiple modifier keys are not supported.  
-If some such restriction is violated, 
+or if multiple modifier keys are not supported.
+If some such restriction is violated,
 the status reply is
 .BR MappingFailed ,
 and none of the modifiers are changed.
 If the new KeyCodes specified for a modifier differ from those
 currently defined and any (current or new) keys for that modifier are
-in the logically down state, 
+in the logically down state,
 .B XSetModifierMapping
 returns
 .BR MappingBusy ,
@@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ and none of the modifiers is changed.
 .B XSetModifierMapping
 can generate
 .B BadAlloc
-and 
+and
 .B BadValue
 errors.
 .LP
@@ -294,7 +294,7 @@ function returns a pointer to a newly created
 structure that contains the keys being used as modifiers.
 The structure should be freed after use by calling
 .BR XFreeModifiermap .
-If only zero values appear in the set for any modifier, 
+If only zero values appear in the set for any modifier,
 that modifier is disabled.
 .LP
 The
@@ -346,6 +346,6 @@ alternatives can generate this error.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 XFree(__libmansuffix__),
 XkbGetMap(__libmansuffix__),
-XSetPointerMapping(__libmansuffix__) 
+XSetPointerMapping(__libmansuffix__)
 .br
 \fI\*(xL\fP
diff --git a/man/XChangePointerControl.man b/man/XChangePointerControl.man
index 02aff02d..718a40a4 100644
--- a/man/XChangePointerControl.man
+++ b/man/XChangePointerControl.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@
 .ds xC Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual
 .TH XChangePointerControl __libmansuffix__ __xorgversion__ "XLIB FUNCTIONS"
 .SH NAME
-XChangePointerControl, XGetPointerControl \- control pointer 
+XChangePointerControl, XGetPointerControl \- control pointer
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XChangePointerControl\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Bool \fIdo_accel\fP\^,
@@ -69,10 +69,10 @@ Returns the numerator for the acceleration multiplier.
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIdo_accel\fP 1i
-Specifies a Boolean value that controls whether the values for 
+Specifies a Boolean value that controls whether the values for
 the accel_numerator or accel_denominator are used.
 .IP \fIdo_threshold\fP 1i
-Specifies a Boolean value that controls whether the value for the 
+Specifies a Boolean value that controls whether the value for the
 threshold is used.
 .IP \fIthreshold\fP 1i
 Specifies the acceleration threshold.
@@ -83,15 +83,15 @@ The
 .B XChangePointerControl
 function defines how the pointing device moves.
 The acceleration, expressed as a fraction, is a
-multiplier for movement. 
+multiplier for movement.
 For example,
 specifying 3/1 means the pointer moves three times as fast as normal.
-The fraction may be rounded arbitrarily by the X server.  
+The fraction may be rounded arbitrarily by the X server.
 Acceleration
 only takes effect if the pointer moves more than threshold pixels at
 once and only applies to the amount beyond the value in the threshold argument.
 Setting a value to \-1 restores the default.
-The values of the do_accel and do_threshold arguments must be 
+The values of the do_accel and do_threshold arguments must be
 .B True
 for the pointer values to be set,
 or the parameters are unchanged.
diff --git a/man/XChangeSaveSet.man b/man/XChangeSaveSet.man
index 564dfed4..b2ae79b1 100644
--- a/man/XChangeSaveSet.man
+++ b/man/XChangeSaveSet.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Specifies the window that you want to add or delete from the client's save-set.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 Depending on the specified mode,
 .B XChangeSaveSet
-either inserts or deletes the specified window from the client's save-set. 
+either inserts or deletes the specified window from the client's save-set.
 The specified window must have been created by some other client,
 or a
 .B BadMatch
diff --git a/man/XChangeWindowAttributes.man b/man/XChangeWindowAttributes.man
index 07e0b102..65573c48 100644
--- a/man/XChangeWindowAttributes.man
+++ b/man/XChangeWindowAttributes.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ int XSetWindowBackground\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, unsigne
 .HP
 int XSetWindowBackgroundPixmap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window
 \fIw\fP\^, Pixmap \fIbackground_pixmap\fP\^);
-.HP 
+.HP
 int XSetWindowBorder\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, unsigned long \fIborder_pixel\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XSetWindowBorderPixmap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, Pixmap \fIborder_pixmap\fP\^);
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ Specifies the background pixmap,
 or
 .BR None .
 .IP \fIborder_pixel\fP 1i
-Specifies the entry in the colormap. 
+Specifies the entry in the colormap.
 .IP \fIborder_pixmap\fP 1i
 Specifies the border pixmap or
 .BR CopyFromParent .
@@ -101,13 +101,13 @@ function uses the window attributes in the
 structure to change the specified window attributes.
 Changing the background does not cause the window contents to be
 changed.
-To repaint the window and its background, use 
+To repaint the window and its background, use
 .BR XClearWindow .
 Setting the border or changing the background such that the
 border tile origin changes causes the border to be repainted.
-Changing the background of a root window to 
+Changing the background of a root window to
 .B None
-or 
+or
 .B ParentRelative
 restores the default background pixmap.
 Changing the border of a root window to
@@ -115,41 +115,41 @@ Changing the border of a root window to
 restores the default border pixmap.
 Changing the win-gravity does not affect the current position of the
 window.
-Changing the backing-store of an obscured window to 
+Changing the backing-store of an obscured window to
 .B WhenMapped
 or
 .BR Always ,
 or changing the backing-planes, backing-pixel, or
 save-under of a mapped window may have no immediate effect.
 Changing the colormap of a window (that is, defining a new map, not
-changing the contents of the existing map) generates a 
+changing the contents of the existing map) generates a
 .B ColormapNotify
 event.
 Changing the colormap of a visible window may have no
 immediate effect on the screen because the map may not be installed
 (see
 .BR XInstallColormap ).
-Changing the cursor of a root window to 
+Changing the cursor of a root window to
 .B None
 restores the default
 cursor.
 Whenever possible, you are encouraged to share colormaps.
 .LP
-Multiple clients can select input on the same window. 
+Multiple clients can select input on the same window.
 Their event masks are maintained separately.
-When an event is generated, 
-it is reported to all interested clients. 
-However, only one client at a time can select for 
+When an event is generated,
+it is reported to all interested clients.
+However, only one client at a time can select for
 .BR SubstructureRedirectMask ,
 .BR ResizeRedirectMask ,
 and
 .BR ButtonPressMask .
-If a client attempts to select any of these event masks 
-and some other client has already selected one, 
+If a client attempts to select any of these event masks
+and some other client has already selected one,
 a
 .B BadAccess
 error results.
-There is only one do-not-propagate-mask for a window, 
+There is only one do-not-propagate-mask for a window,
 not one per client.
 .LP
 .B XChangeWindowAttributes
@@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ function sets the background of the window to the specified pixel value.
 Changing the background does not cause the window contents to be changed.
 .B XSetWindowBackground
 uses a pixmap of undefined size filled with the pixel value you passed.
-If you try to change the background of an 
+If you try to change the background of an
 .B InputOnly
 window, a
 .B BadMatch
@@ -188,12 +188,12 @@ The
 function sets the background pixmap of the window to the specified pixmap.
 The background pixmap can immediately be freed if no further explicit
 references to it are to be made.
-If 
+If
 .B ParentRelative
-is specified, 
+is specified,
 the background pixmap of the window's parent is used,
 or on the root window, the default background is restored.
-If you try to change the background of an 
+If you try to change the background of an
 .B InputOnly
 window, a
 .B BadMatch
@@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ can generate
 and
 .B BadWindow
 errors.
-.LP 
+.LP
 The
 .B XSetWindowBorder
 function sets the border of the window to the pixel value you specify.
diff --git a/man/XCirculateEvent.man b/man/XCirculateEvent.man
index 5e64a852..ea81f683 100644
--- a/man/XCirculateEvent.man
+++ b/man/XCirculateEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
diff --git a/man/XCirculateRequestEvent.man b/man/XCirculateRequestEvent.man
index e8bc92dd..6ba24be0 100644
--- a/man/XCirculateRequestEvent.man
+++ b/man/XCirculateRequestEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
diff --git a/man/XClearArea.man b/man/XClearArea.man
index af59d7aa..1a538934 100644
--- a/man/XClearArea.man
+++ b/man/XClearArea.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -69,12 +69,12 @@ Specifies the window.
 .ns
 .IP \fIheight\fP 1i
 Specify the width and height, which are the dimensions of the rectangle.
-.ds Xy 
+.ds Xy
 .IP \fIx\fP 1i
 .br
 .ns
 .IP \fIy\fP 1i
-Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the origin of the window 
+Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the origin of the window
 and specify the upper-left corner of the rectangle.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
@@ -87,16 +87,16 @@ If width is zero, it
 is replaced with the current width of the window minus x.
 If height is
 zero, it is replaced with the current height of the window minus y.
-If the window has a defined background tile, 
+If the window has a defined background tile,
 the rectangle clipped by any children is filled with this tile.
 If the window has
-background 
+background
 .BR None ,
-the contents of the window are not changed.  
+the contents of the window are not changed.
 In either
-case, if exposures is 
+case, if exposures is
 .BR True ,
-one or more 
+one or more
 .B Expose
 events are generated for regions of the rectangle that are either visible or are
 being retained in a backing store.
@@ -119,21 +119,21 @@ The
 function clears the entire area in the specified window and is
 equivalent to
 .B XClearArea
-(display, w, 0, 0, 0, 0, 
+(display, w, 0, 0, 0, 0,
 .BR False ).
 If the window has a defined background tile, the rectangle is tiled with a
-plane-mask of all ones and 
+plane-mask of all ones and
 .B GXcopy
 function.
 If the window has
-background 
+background
 .BR None ,
-the contents of the window are not changed.  
+the contents of the window are not changed.
 If you specify a window whose class is
 .BR InputOnly ,
 a
 .B BadMatch
-error results. 
+error results.
 .LP
 .B XClearWindow
 can generate
diff --git a/man/XClientMessageEvent.man b/man/XClientMessageEvent.man
index 99accaf2..70133927 100644
--- a/man/XClientMessageEvent.man
+++ b/man/XClientMessageEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -92,12 +92,12 @@ but expanded from the 16-bit least-significant bits to a full 32-bit value.
 The window member is set to the window that is most useful to toolkit
 dispatchers.
 .LP
-The message_type member is set to an atom that indicates how the data 
+The message_type member is set to an atom that indicates how the data
 should be interpreted by the receiving client.
 The format member is set to 8, 16, or 32 and specifies whether the data
 should be viewed as a list of bytes, shorts, or longs.
 The data member is a union that contains the members b, s, and l.
-The b, s, and l members represent data of twenty 8-bit values, 
+The b, s, and l members represent data of twenty 8-bit values,
 ten 16-bit values, and five 32-bit values.
 Particular message types might not make use of all these values.
 The X server places no interpretation on the values in the window,
diff --git a/man/XColormapEvent.man b/man/XColormapEvent.man
index 98b2e3a5..ff415dec 100644
--- a/man/XColormapEvent.man
+++ b/man/XColormapEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -88,17 +88,17 @@ but expanded from the 16-bit least-significant bits to a full 32-bit value.
 The window member is set to the window that is most useful to toolkit
 dispatchers.
 .LP
-The window member is set to the window whose associated 
+The window member is set to the window whose associated
 colormap is changed, installed, or uninstalled.
 For a colormap that is changed, installed, or uninstalled,
-the colormap member is set to the colormap associated with the window. 
+the colormap member is set to the colormap associated with the window.
 For a colormap that is changed by a call to
 .BR XFreeColormap ,
 the colormap member is set to
 .BR None .
-The new member is set to indicate whether the colormap 
+The new member is set to indicate whether the colormap
 for the specified window was changed or installed or uninstalled
-and can be 
+and can be
 .B True
 or
 .BR False .
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ If it is
 .BR False ,
 the colormap was installed or uninstalled.
 The state member is always set to indicate whether the colormap is installed or
-uninstalled and can be 
+uninstalled and can be
 .B ColormapInstalled
 or
 .BR ColormapUninstalled .
diff --git a/man/XConfigureEvent.man b/man/XConfigureEvent.man
index d5eefc39..6d43f9a0 100644
--- a/man/XConfigureEvent.man
+++ b/man/XConfigureEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -97,29 +97,29 @@ depending on whether
 or
 .B SubstructureNotify
 was selected.
-The window member is set to the window whose size, position, 
+The window member is set to the window whose size, position,
 border, and/or stacking
 order was changed.
 .LP
-The x and y members are set to the coordinates relative to the parent window's 
+The x and y members are set to the coordinates relative to the parent window's
 origin and indicate the position of the upper-left outside corner of the window.
-The width and height members are set to the inside size of the window, 
+The width and height members are set to the inside size of the window,
 not including
 the border.
 The border_width member is set to the width of the window's border, in pixels.
 .LP
-The above member is set to the sibling window and is used 
+The above member is set to the sibling window and is used
 for stacking operations.
 If the X server sets this member to
 .BR None ,
 the window whose state was changed is on the bottom of the stack
 with respect to sibling windows.
-However, if this member is set to a sibling window, 
+However, if this member is set to a sibling window,
 the window whose state was changed is placed on top of this sibling window.
 .LP
 The override_redirect member is set to the override-redirect attribute of the
 window.
-Window manager clients normally should ignore this window if the 
+Window manager clients normally should ignore this window if the
 override_redirect member
 is
 .BR True .
diff --git a/man/XConfigureRequestEvent.man b/man/XConfigureRequestEvent.man
index 95dbd673..ea930b42 100644
--- a/man/XConfigureRequestEvent.man
+++ b/man/XConfigureRequestEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ The window member is set to the window that is most useful to toolkit
 dispatchers.
 .LP
 The parent member is set to the parent window.
-The window member is set to the window whose size, position, border width, 
+The window member is set to the window whose size, position, border width,
 and/or stacking order is to be reconfigured.
 The value_mask member indicates which components were specified in the
 .B ConfigureWindow
diff --git a/man/XConfigureWindow.man b/man/XConfigureWindow.man
index d9832954..f7e617ca 100644
--- a/man/XConfigureWindow.man
+++ b/man/XConfigureWindow.man
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -60,10 +60,10 @@ int XResizeWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, unsigned
 \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned \fIheight\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XMoveResizeWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, int
-\fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned \fIheight\fP\^); 
+\fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned \fIheight\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XSetWindowBorderWidth\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
-unsigned \fIwidth\fP\^); 
+unsigned \fIwidth\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Specifies which values are to be set using information in
 the values structure.
 This mask is the bitwise inclusive OR of the valid configure window values bits.
 .IP \fIvalues\fP 1i
-Specifies the 
+Specifies the
 .B XWindowChanges
 structure.
 .IP \fIw\fP 1i
@@ -88,8 +88,8 @@ Specify the width and height, which are the interior dimensions of the window.
 .br
 .ns
 .IP \fIy\fP 1i
-Specify the x and y coordinates, which define the new location of the top-left pixel 
-of the window's border or the window itself if it has no border 
+Specify the x and y coordinates, which define the new location of the top-left pixel
+of the window's border or the window itself if it has no border
 or define the new position of the window relative to its parent.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ If a sibling is specified without a stack_mode or if the window
 is not actually a sibling,
 a
 .B BadMatch
-error results. 
+error results.
 Note that the computations for
 .BR BottomIf ,
 .BR TopIf ,
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ other arguments passed to
 not its initial geometry.
 Any backing store contents of the window, its
 inferiors, and other newly visible windows are either discarded or
-changed to reflect the current screen contents 
+changed to reflect the current screen contents
 (depending on the implementation).
 .LP
 .B XConfigureWindow
@@ -131,26 +131,26 @@ The
 function moves the specified window to the specified x and y coordinates,
 but it does not change the window's size, raise the window, or
 change the mapping state of the window.
-Moving a mapped window may or may not lose the window's contents 
-depending on if the window is obscured by nonchildren 
+Moving a mapped window may or may not lose the window's contents
+depending on if the window is obscured by nonchildren
 and if no backing store exists.
-If the contents of the window are lost, 
+If the contents of the window are lost,
 the X server generates
 .B Expose
 events.
 Moving a mapped window generates
 .B Expose
-events on any formerly obscured windows. 
+events on any formerly obscured windows.
 .LP
-If the override-redirect flag of the window is 
+If the override-redirect flag of the window is
 .B False
 and some
-other client has selected 
+other client has selected
 .B SubstructureRedirectMask
 on the parent, the X server generates a
 .B ConfigureRequest
 event, and no further processing is
-performed.  
+performed.
 Otherwise, the window is moved.
 .LP
 .B XMoveWindow
@@ -167,19 +167,19 @@ the origin and does not restack the window.
 Changing the size of a mapped window may lose its contents and generate
 .B Expose
 events.
-If a mapped window is made smaller, 
+If a mapped window is made smaller,
 changing its size generates
 .B Expose
 events on windows that the mapped window formerly obscured.
 .LP
-If the override-redirect flag of the window is 
+If the override-redirect flag of the window is
 .B False
 and some
-other client has selected 
+other client has selected
 .B SubstructureRedirectMask
 on the parent, the X server generates a
 .B ConfigureRequest
-event, and no further processing is performed.  
+event, and no further processing is performed.
 If either width or height is zero,
 a
 .B BadValue
@@ -194,24 +194,24 @@ errors.
 .LP
 The
 .B XMoveResizeWindow
-function changes the size and location of the specified window 
+function changes the size and location of the specified window
 without raising it.
 Moving and resizing a mapped window may generate an
 .B Expose
 event on the window.
 Depending on the new size and location parameters,
-moving and resizing a window may generate 
+moving and resizing a window may generate
 .B Expose
-events on windows that the window formerly obscured. 
+events on windows that the window formerly obscured.
 .LP
-If the override-redirect flag of the window is 
+If the override-redirect flag of the window is
 .B False
 and some
-other client has selected 
+other client has selected
 .B SubstructureRedirectMask
 on the parent, the X server generates a
 .B ConfigureRequest
-event, and no further processing is performed.  
+event, and no further processing is performed.
 Otherwise, the window size and location are changed.
 .LP
 .B XMoveResizeWindow
@@ -317,16 +317,16 @@ If you attempt to set the border-width attribute of an
 .B InputOnly
 window nonzero, a
 .B BadMatch
-error results. 
+error results.
 .LP
 The sibling member is used to set the sibling window for stacking operations.
-The stack_mode member is used to set how the window is to be restacked 
+The stack_mode member is used to set how the window is to be restacked
 and can be set to
 .BR Above ,
 .BR Below ,
 .BR TopIf ,
 .BR BottomIf ,
-or 
+or
 .BR Opposite .
 .SH DIAGNOSTICS
 .TP 1i
diff --git a/man/XCopyArea.man b/man/XCopyArea.man
index 1619b55a..369992ef 100644
--- a/man/XCopyArea.man
+++ b/man/XCopyArea.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -58,13 +58,13 @@ int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned \fIheight\fP\^, int \fIdest_x\fP\^, int
 int XCopyPlane\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fIsrc\fP\^, Drawable
 \fIdest\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, int \fIsrc_x\fP\^, int \fIsrc_y\fP\^, unsigned
 \fIwidth\fP\^, int \fIheight\fP\^, int \fIdest_x\fP\^, int \fIdest_y\fP\^,
-unsigned long \fIplane\fP\^); 
+unsigned long \fIplane\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdest_x\fP 1i
 .br
 .ns
 .IP \fIdest_y\fP 1i
-Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the origin of the destination rectangle and specify its upper-left corner. 
+Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the origin of the destination rectangle and specify its upper-left corner.
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIgc\fP 1i
@@ -76,24 +76,24 @@ You must set exactly one bit to 1.
 .br
 .ns
 .IP \fIdest\fP 1i
-Specify the source and destination rectangles to be combined. 
+Specify the source and destination rectangles to be combined.
 .IP \fIsrc_x\fP 1i
 .br
 .ns
 .IP \fIsrc_y\fP 1i
-Specify the x and y coordinates, 
+Specify the x and y coordinates,
 which are relative to the origin of the source rectangle
 and specify its upper-left corner.
 .IP \fIwidth\fP 1i
 .br
 .ns
 .IP \fIheight\fP 1i
-Specify the width and height, which are the dimensions 
+Specify the width and height, which are the dimensions
 of both the source and destination rectangles.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B XCopyArea
-function combines the specified rectangle of src with the specified rectangle 
+function combines the specified rectangle of src with the specified rectangle
 of dest.
 The drawables must have the same root and depth,
 or a
@@ -101,13 +101,13 @@ or a
 error results.
 .LP
 If regions of the source rectangle are obscured and have not been
-retained in backing store 
-or if regions outside the boundaries of the source drawable are specified, 
-those regions are not copied. 
-Instead, the 
+retained in backing store
+or if regions outside the boundaries of the source drawable are specified,
+those regions are not copied.
+Instead, the
 following occurs on all corresponding destination regions that are either
-visible or are retained in backing store.  
-If the destination is a window with a background other than 
+visible or are retained in backing store.
+If the destination is a window with a background other than
 .BR None ,
 corresponding regions
 of the destination are tiled with that background
@@ -115,12 +115,12 @@ of the destination are tiled with that background
 .B GXcopy
 function).
 Regardless of tiling or whether the destination is a window or a pixmap,
-if graphics-exposures is 
+if graphics-exposures is
 .BR True ,
 then
 .B GraphicsExpose
 events for all corresponding destination regions are generated.
-If graphics-exposures is 
+If graphics-exposures is
 .B True
 but no
 .B GraphicsExpose
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ Note that by default graphics-exposures is
 .B True
 in new GCs.
 .LP
-This function uses these GC components: function, plane-mask, 
+This function uses these GC components: function, plane-mask,
 subwindow-mode, graphics-exposures, clip-x-origin,
 clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
 .LP
@@ -156,17 +156,17 @@ is not less than %2 sup n%, where \fIn\fP is the depth of src, a
 .B BadValue
 error results.
 .LP
-Effectively, 
+Effectively,
 .B XCopyPlane
 forms a pixmap of the same depth as the rectangle of dest and with a
-size specified by the source region. 
+size specified by the source region.
 It uses the foreground/background pixels in the GC (foreground
 everywhere the bit plane in src contains a bit set to 1,
 background everywhere the bit plane in src contains a bit set to 0)
-and the equivalent of a 
+and the equivalent of a
 .B CopyArea
 protocol request is performed with all the same exposure semantics.
-This can also be thought of as using the specified region of the source 
+This can also be thought of as using the specified region of the source
 bit plane as a stipple with a fill-style of
 .B FillOpaqueStippled
 for filling a rectangular area of the destination.
diff --git a/man/XCreateColormap.man b/man/XCreateColormap.man
index 4665c3d3..1678f945 100644
--- a/man/XCreateColormap.man
+++ b/man/XCreateColormap.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -54,15 +54,15 @@ Colormap XCreateColormap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
 Visual *\fIvisual\fP\^, int \fIalloc\fP\^);
 .HP
 Colormap XCopyColormapAndFree\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap
-\fIcolormap\fP\^); 
+\fIcolormap\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XFreeColormap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap \fIcolormap\fP\^); 
+int XFreeColormap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap \fIcolormap\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIalloc\fP 1i
 Specifies the colormap entries to be allocated.
-You can pass 
+You can pass
 .B AllocNone
-or 
+or
 .BR AllocAll .
 .IP \fIcolormap\fP 1i
 Specifies the colormap that you want to create, copy, set, or destroy.
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Specifies the colormap that you want to create, copy, set, or destroy.
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIvisual\fP 1i
 Specifies a visual type supported on the screen.
-If the visual type is not one supported by the screen, 
+If the visual type is not one supported by the screen,
 a
 .B BadMatch
 error results.
@@ -79,12 +79,12 @@ Specifies the window on whose screen you want to create a colormap.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B XCreateColormap
-function creates a colormap of the specified visual type for the screen 
-on which the specified window resides and returns the colormap ID 
+function creates a colormap of the specified visual type for the screen
+on which the specified window resides and returns the colormap ID
 associated with it.
 Note that the specified window is only used to determine the screen.
 .LP
-The initial values of the colormap entries are undefined for the 
+The initial values of the colormap entries are undefined for the
 visual classes
 .BR GrayScale ,
 .BR PseudoColor ,
@@ -131,7 +131,7 @@ For
 .BR DirectColor ,
 the effect is as if an
 .B XAllocColorPlanes
-call returned a pixel value of zero and red_mask, green_mask, 
+call returned a pixel value of zero and red_mask, green_mask,
 and blue_mask values containing the same bits as the corresponding
 masks in the specified visual.
 However, in all cases,
@@ -152,13 +152,13 @@ The
 function creates a colormap of the same visual type and for the same screen
 as the specified colormap and returns the new colormap ID.
 It also moves all of the client's existing allocation from the specified
-colormap to the new colormap with their color values intact 
-and their read-only or writable characteristics intact and frees those entries 
+colormap to the new colormap with their color values intact
+and their read-only or writable characteristics intact and frees those entries
 in the specified colormap.
 Color values in other entries in the new colormap are undefined.
 If the specified colormap was created by the client with alloc set to
 .BR AllocAll ,
-the new colormap is also created with 
+the new colormap is also created with
 .BR AllocAll ,
 all color values for all entries are copied from the specified colormap,
 and then all entries in the specified colormap are freed.
@@ -182,7 +182,7 @@ errors.
 .LP
 The
 .B XFreeColormap
-function deletes the association between the colormap resource ID 
+function deletes the association between the colormap resource ID
 and the colormap and frees the colormap storage.
 However, this function has no effect on the default colormap for a screen.
 If the specified colormap is an installed map for a screen,
@@ -215,7 +215,7 @@ structure contains:
 typedef struct {
         unsigned long pixel;    /\&* pixel value */
         unsigned short red, green, blue;        /\&* rgb values */
-        char flags;     /\&* DoRed, DoGreen, DoBlue */  
+        char flags;     /\&* DoRed, DoGreen, DoBlue */
         char pad;
 } XColor;
 .EE
@@ -224,15 +224,15 @@ The red, green, and blue values are always in the range 0 to 65535
 inclusive, independent of the number of bits actually used in the
 display hardware.
 The server scales these values down to the range used by the hardware.
-Black is represented by (0,0,0), 
+Black is represented by (0,0,0),
 and white is represented by (65535,65535,65535).
 .IN "Color"
 In some functions,
-the flags member controls which of the red, green, and blue members is used 
+the flags member controls which of the red, green, and blue members is used
 and can be the inclusive OR of zero or more of
 .BR DoRed ,
 .BR DoGreen ,
-and 
+and
 .BR DoBlue .
 .SH DIAGNOSTICS
 .TP 1i
diff --git a/man/XCreateFontCursor.man b/man/XCreateFontCursor.man
index 1a9760bc..552e45be 100644
--- a/man/XCreateFontCursor.man
+++ b/man/XCreateFontCursor.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ XCreateFontCursor, XCreatePixmapCursor, XCreateGlyphCursor \- create cursors
 \&#include <X11/cursorfont.h>
 .HP
 Cursor XCreateFontCursor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, unsigned int
-\fIshape\fP\^); 
+\fIshape\fP\^);
 .HP
 Cursor XCreatePixmapCursor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Pixmap
 \fIsource\fP\^, Pixmap \fImask\fP\^, XColor *\fIforeground_color\fP\^, XColor
@@ -61,19 +61,19 @@ Cursor XCreatePixmapCursor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Pixmap
 Cursor XCreateGlyphCursor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Font
 \fIsource_font\fP\^, Font \fImask_font\fP\^, unsigned int \fIsource_char\fP\^,
 unsigned int \fImask_char\fP\^, XColor *\fIforeground_color\fP\^, XColor
-*\fIbackground_color\fP\^); 
+*\fIbackground_color\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIbackground_color\fP 1i
 Specifies the RGB values for the background of the source.
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIforeground_color\fP 1i
-Specifies the RGB values for the foreground of the source. 
+Specifies the RGB values for the foreground of the source.
 .IP \fImask\fP 1i
 Specifies the cursor's source bits to be displayed or
 .BR None .
 .IP \fImask_char\fP 1i
-Specifies the glyph character for the mask. 
+Specifies the glyph character for the mask.
 .IP \fImask_font\fP 1i
 Specifies the font for the mask glyph or
 .BR None .
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ Specifies the font for the source glyph.
 .br
 .ns
 .IP \fIy\fP 1i
-Specify the x and y coordinates, which indicate the 
+Specify the x and y coordinates, which indicate the
 hotspot relative to the source's origin.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 X provides a set of standard cursor shapes in a special font named
@@ -124,15 +124,15 @@ or
 screen.
 The foreground color is used for the pixels set to 1 in the
 source, and the background color is used for the pixels set to 0.
-Both source and mask, if specified, must have depth one (or a 
+Both source and mask, if specified, must have depth one (or a
 .B BadMatch
 error results) but can have any root.
 The mask argument defines the shape of the cursor.
 The pixels set to 1 in the mask define which source pixels are displayed,
 and the pixels set to 0 define which pixels are ignored.
-If no mask is given, 
+If no mask is given,
 all pixels of the source are displayed.
-The mask, if present, must be the same size as the pixmap defined by the 
+The mask, if present, must be the same size as the pixmap defined by the
 source argument, or a
 .B BadMatch
 error results.
@@ -160,31 +160,31 @@ The
 .B XCreateGlyphCursor
 function is similar to
 .B XCreatePixmapCursor
-except that the source and mask bitmaps are obtained from the specified 
+except that the source and mask bitmaps are obtained from the specified
 font glyphs.
-The source_char must be a defined glyph in source_font, 
+The source_char must be a defined glyph in source_font,
 or a
 .B BadValue
 error results.
-If mask_font is given, 
+If mask_font is given,
 mask_char must be a defined glyph in mask_font,
 or a
 .B BadValue
 error results.
 The mask_font and character are optional.
 The origins of the source_char and mask_char (if defined) glyphs are
-positioned coincidently and define the hotspot. 
-The source_char and mask_char need not have the same bounding box metrics, 
+positioned coincidently and define the hotspot.
+The source_char and mask_char need not have the same bounding box metrics,
 and there is no restriction on the placement of the hotspot relative to the bounding
-boxes. 
+boxes.
 If no mask_char is given, all pixels of the source are displayed.
 You can free the fonts immediately by calling
 .B XFreeFont
-if no further explicit references to them are to be made. 
+if no further explicit references to them are to be made.
 .LP
-For 2-byte matrix fonts, 
+For 2-byte matrix fonts,
 the 16-bit value should be formed with the byte1
-member in the most significant byte and the byte2 member in the 
+member in the most significant byte and the byte2 member in the
 least significant byte.
 .LP
 .B XCreateGlyphCursor
diff --git a/man/XCreateFontSet.man b/man/XCreateFontSet.man
index d0d6af58..d2111eb3 100644
--- a/man/XCreateFontSet.man
+++ b/man/XCreateFontSet.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ XFontSet XCreateFontSet\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, char
 *\fIbase_font_name_list\fP\^, char ***\fImissing_charset_list_return\fP\^, int
 *\fImissing_charset_count_return\fP\^, char **\fIdef_string_return\fP\^);
 .HP
-void XFreeFontSet\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^); 
+void XFreeFontSet\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -69,10 +69,10 @@ Returns the number of missing charsets.
 .IP \fImissing_charset_list_return\fP 1i
 Returns the missing charsets.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .B XCreateFontSet
 function creates a font set for the specified display.
-The font set is bound to the current locale when 
+The font set is bound to the current locale when
 .B XCreateFontSet
 is called.
 The font set may be used in subsequent calls to obtain font
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ The base_font_name_list argument is a list of base font names
 that Xlib uses to load the fonts needed for the locale.
 The base font names are a comma-separated list.
 The string is null-terminated
-and is assumed to be in the Host Portable Character Encoding; 
+and is assumed to be in the Host Portable Character Encoding;
 otherwise, the result is implementation-dependent.
 White space immediately on either side of a separating comma is ignored.
 .LP
@@ -103,17 +103,17 @@ If this action is successful in obtaining an XLFD name, the
 function will return this XLFD name instead of the client-supplied name.
 .LP
 Xlib uses the following algorithm to select the fonts
-that will be used to display text with the 
+that will be used to display text with the
 .BR XFontSet .
 .LP
 For each font charset required by the locale,
-the base font name list is searched for the first appearance of one 
+the base font name list is searched for the first appearance of one
 of the following cases that names a set of fonts that exist at the server:
 .IP \(bu 5
 The first XLFD-conforming base font name that specifies the required
-charset or a superset of the required charset in its 
+charset or a superset of the required charset in its
 .B CharSetRegistry
-and 
+and
 .B CharSetEncoding
 fields.
 The implementation may use a base font name whose specified charset
@@ -123,17 +123,17 @@ an ISO8859-1 font for an ASCII charset.
 The first set of one or more XLFD-conforming base font names
 that specify one or more charsets that can be remapped to support the
 required charset.
-The Xlib implementation may recognize various mappings 
+The Xlib implementation may recognize various mappings
 from a required charset to one or more other charsets
 and use the fonts for those charsets.
-For example, JIS Roman is ASCII with tilde and backslash replaced 
+For example, JIS Roman is ASCII with tilde and backslash replaced
 by yen and overbar;
 Xlib may load an ISO8859-1 font to support this character set
 if a JIS Roman font is not available.
 .IP \(bu 5
 The first XLFD-conforming font name or the first non-XLFD font name
 for which an XLFD font name can be obtained, combined with the
-required charset (replacing the 
+required charset (replacing the
 .B CharSetRegistry
 and
 .B CharSetEncoding
@@ -186,9 +186,9 @@ For example:
 "-*-*-*-R-Normal--*-180-100-100-*-*"
 .EE
 .LP
-If 
+If
 .B XCreateFontSet
-is unable to create the font set, 
+is unable to create the font set,
 either because there is insufficient memory or because the current locale
 is not supported,
 .B XCreateFontSet
@@ -213,12 +213,12 @@ may be able to remap a required charset.
 .LP
 If no font exists for any of the required charsets
 or if the locale definition in Xlib requires that a font exist
-for a particular charset and a font is not found for that charset, 
+for a particular charset and a font is not found for that charset,
 .B XCreateFontSet
 returns NULL.
-Otherwise, 
+Otherwise,
 .B XCreateFontSet
-returns a valid 
+returns a valid
 .B XFontSet
 to font_set.
 .LP
@@ -229,24 +229,24 @@ drawable.
 If def_string_return is non-NULL,
 .B XCreateFontSet
 returns a pointer to a string that represents the glyphs
-that are drawn with this 
+that are drawn with this
 .B XFontSet
 when the charsets of the available fonts do not include all font glyphs
 required to draw a codepoint.
-The string does not necessarily consist of valid characters 
+The string does not necessarily consist of valid characters
 in the current locale and is not necessarily drawn with
 the fonts loaded for the font set,
 but the client can draw and measure the default glyphs
-by including this string in a string being drawn or measured with the 
+by including this string in a string being drawn or measured with the
 .BR XFontSet .
 .LP
 If the string returned to def_string_return is the empty string ("\^"),
 no glyphs are drawn, and the escapement is zero.
 The returned string is null-terminated.
 It is owned by Xlib and should not be modified or freed by the client.
-It will be freed by a call to 
+It will be freed by a call to
 .B XFreeFontSet
-with the associated 
+with the associated
 .BR XFontSet .
 Until freed, its contents will not be modified by Xlib.
 .LP
@@ -254,23 +254,23 @@ The client is responsible for constructing an error message from the
 missing charset and default string information and may choose to continue
 operation in the case that some fonts did not exist.
 .LP
-The returned 
+The returned
 .B XFontSet
-and missing charset list should be freed with 
+and missing charset list should be freed with
 .B XFreeFontSet
 and
 .BR XFreeStringList ,
 respectively.
-The client-supplied base_font_name_list may be freed 
-by the client after calling 
+The client-supplied base_font_name_list may be freed
+by the client after calling
 .BR XCreateFontSet .
 .LP
 The
 .B XFreeFontSet
 function frees the specified font set.
-The associated base font name list, font name list, 
+The associated base font name list, font name list,
 .B XFontStruct
-list, and 
+list, and
 .BR XFontSetExtents ,
 if any, are freed.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
diff --git a/man/XCreateGC.man b/man/XCreateGC.man
index 616c6212..c9c1eacf 100644
--- a/man/XCreateGC.man
+++ b/man/XCreateGC.man
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -53,23 +53,23 @@ XCreateGC, XCopyGC, XChangeGC, XGetGCValues, XFreeGC, XGContextFromGC, XGCValues
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 GC XCreateGC\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, unsigned long
-\fIvaluemask\fP\^, XGCValues *\^\fIvalues\fP\^); 
+\fIvaluemask\fP\^, XGCValues *\^\fIvalues\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XCopyGC\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIsrc\fP\^,
-unsigned long \fIvaluemask\fP\^, GC \fIdest\fP\^); 
+unsigned long \fIvaluemask\fP\^, GC \fIdest\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XChangeGC\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, unsigned long
-\fIvaluemask\fP\^, XGCValues *\^\fIvalues\fP\^); 
+\fIvaluemask\fP\^, XGCValues *\^\fIvalues\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XGetGCValues\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, unsigned long
-\fIvaluemask\fP\^, XGCValues *\fIvalues_return\fP\^); 
+\fIvaluemask\fP\^, XGCValues *\fIvalues_return\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XFreeGC\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^); 
+int XFreeGC\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^);
 .HP
-GContext XGContextFromGC\^(\^GC \fIgc\fP\^); 
+GContext XGContextFromGC\^(\^GC \fIgc\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fId\fP 1i
-Specifies the drawable. 
+Specifies the drawable.
 .IP \fIdest\fP 1i
 Specifies the destination GC.
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Specifies the GC.
 .IP \fIsrc\fP 1i
 Specifies the components of the source GC.
 .IP \fIvaluemask\fP 1i
-Specifies which components in the GC are to be set, copied, changed, or returned. 
+Specifies which components in the GC are to be set, copied, changed, or returned.
 This argument is the bitwise inclusive OR of zero or more of the valid
 GC component mask bits.
 .IP \fIvalues\fP 1i
@@ -133,13 +133,13 @@ The
 function changes the components specified by valuemask for
 the specified GC.
 The values argument contains the values to be set.
-The values and restrictions are the same as for 
+The values and restrictions are the same as for
 .BR XCreateGC .
-Changing the clip-mask overrides any previous 
+Changing the clip-mask overrides any previous
 .B XSetClipRectangles
-request on the context. 
+request on the context.
 Changing the dash-offset or dash-list
-overrides any previous 
+overrides any previous
 .B XSetDashes
 request on the context.
 The order in which components are verified and altered is server dependent.
@@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ sets the requested components in values_return and returns a nonzero status.
 Otherwise, it returns a zero status.
 Note that the clip-mask and dash-list (represented by the
 .B GCClipMask
-and 
+and
 .B GCDashList
 bits, respectively, in the valuemask)
 cannot be requested.
@@ -365,17 +365,17 @@ typedef struct {
 .EE
 .LP
 The function attributes of a GC are used when you update a section of
-a drawable (the destination) with bits from somewhere else (the source).  
+a drawable (the destination) with bits from somewhere else (the source).
 The function in a GC defines how the new destination bits are to be
 computed from the source bits and the old destination bits.
 .B GXcopy
 is typically the most useful because it will work on a color display,
 but special applications may use other functions,
 particularly in concert with particular planes of a color display.
-The 16 GC functions, defined in 
+The 16 GC functions, defined in
 .hN X11/X.h ,
 are:
-.\" are listed in Table 5-1 along with the 
+.\" are listed in Table 5-1 along with the
 .\"the associated hexadecimal code
 .\" and operation.
 .\".CP T 1
@@ -515,16 +515,16 @@ will be the least significant bit of the word.
 As planes are added to the display hardware, they will occupy more
 significant bits in the plane mask.
 .LP
-In graphics operations, given a source and destination pixel, 
+In graphics operations, given a source and destination pixel,
 the result is computed bitwise on corresponding bits of the pixels.
-That is, a Boolean operation is performed in each bit plane.  
+That is, a Boolean operation is performed in each bit plane.
 The plane_mask restricts the operation to a subset of planes.
 A macro constant
 .B AllPlanes
 can be used to refer to all planes of the screen simultaneously.
 The result is computed by the following:
 .LP
-.EX 
+.EX
 ((src FUNC dst) AND plane-mask) OR (dst AND (NOT plane-mask))
 .EE
 .LP
@@ -554,28 +554,28 @@ If the center of the pixel is exactly on the bounding box,
 it is part of the line if and only if the interior is immediately to its right
 (x increasing direction).
 Pixels with centers on a horizontal edge are a special case and are part of
-the line if and only if the interior or the boundary is immediately below 
+the line if and only if the interior or the boundary is immediately below
 (y increasing direction) and the interior or the boundary is immediately
 to the right (x increasing direction).
 .LP
 Thin lines (zero line-width) are one-pixel-wide lines drawn using an
 unspecified, device-dependent algorithm.
-There are only two constraints on this algorithm. 
+There are only two constraints on this algorithm.
 .IP 1. 5
 If a line is drawn unclipped from [x1,y1] to [x2,y2] and
 if another line is drawn unclipped from [x1+dx,y1+dy] to [x2+dx,y2+dy],
-a point [x,y] is touched by drawing the first line 
+a point [x,y] is touched by drawing the first line
 if and only if the point [x+dx,y+dy] is touched by drawing the second line.
 .IP 2. 5
 The effective set of points comprising a line cannot be affected by clipping.
-That is, a point is touched in a clipped line if and only if the point 
+That is, a point is touched in a clipped line if and only if the point
 lies inside the clipping region and the point would be touched
 by the line when drawn unclipped.
 .LP
-A wide line drawn from [x1,y1] to [x2,y2] always draws the same pixels 
-as a wide line drawn from [x2,y2] to [x1,y1], not counting cap-style 
+A wide line drawn from [x1,y1] to [x2,y2] always draws the same pixels
+as a wide line drawn from [x2,y2] to [x1,y1], not counting cap-style
 and join-style.
-It is recommended that this property be true for thin lines, 
+It is recommended that this property be true for thin lines,
 but this is not required.
 A line-width of zero may differ from a line-width of one in which pixels are
 drawn.
@@ -583,7 +583,7 @@ This permits the use of many manufacturers' line drawing hardware,
 which may run many times faster than the more precisely specified
 wide lines.
 .LP
-In general, 
+In general,
 drawing a thin line will be faster than drawing a wide line of width one.
 However, because of their different drawing algorithms,
 thin lines may not mix well aesthetically with wide lines.
@@ -602,8 +602,8 @@ T}
 T{
 .B LineDoubleDash
 T}	T{
-The full path of the line is drawn, 
-but the even dashes are filled differently 
+The full path of the line is drawn,
+but the even dashes are filled differently
 from the odd dashes (see fill-style) with
 .B CapButt
 style used where even and odd dashes meet.
@@ -613,11 +613,11 @@ T{
 .B LineOnOffDash
 T}	T{
 Only the even dashes are drawn,
-and cap-style applies to 
+and cap-style applies to
 all internal ends of the individual dashes,
-except 
+except
 .B CapNotLast
-is treated as 
+is treated as
 .BR CapButt .
 T}
 .TE
@@ -629,7 +629,7 @@ lw(1.3i) lw(4.5i).
 T{
 .B CapNotLast
 T}	T{
-This is equivalent to 
+This is equivalent to
 .B CapButt
 except that for a line-width of zero the final endpoint is not drawn.
 T}
@@ -646,7 +646,7 @@ T{
 T}	T{
 The line has a circular arc with the diameter equal to the line-width,
 centered on the endpoint.
-(This is equivalent to 
+(This is equivalent to
 .B CapButt
 for line-width of zero).
 T}
@@ -654,9 +654,9 @@ T}
 T{
 .B CapProjecting
 T}	T{
-The line is square at the end, but the path continues beyond the endpoint 
+The line is square at the end, but the path continues beyond the endpoint
 for a distance equal to half the line-width.
-(This is equivalent to 
+(This is equivalent to
 .B CapButt
 for line-width of zero).
 T}
@@ -678,7 +678,7 @@ T}
 T{
 .B JoinRound
 T}	T{
-The corner is a circular arc with the diameter equal to the line-width, 
+The corner is a circular arc with the diameter equal to the line-width,
 centered on the joinpoint.
 T}
 .sp 6p
@@ -691,8 +691,8 @@ endpoint styles with the triangular notch filled.
 T}
 .TE
 .LP
-For a line with coincident endpoints (x1=x2, y1=y2), 
-when the cap-style is applied to both endpoints, 
+For a line with coincident endpoints (x1=x2, y1=y2),
+when the cap-style is applied to both endpoints,
 the semantics depends on the line-width and the cap-style:
 .TS
 lw(1.3i) lw(.5i) lw(4i).
@@ -701,7 +701,7 @@ T{
 T}	T{
 thin
 T}	T{
-The results are device dependent, 
+The results are device dependent,
 but the desired effect is that nothing is drawn.
 T}
 .sp 6p
@@ -710,7 +710,7 @@ T{
 T}	T{
 thin
 T}	T{
-The results are device dependent, 
+The results are device dependent,
 but the desired effect is that a single pixel is drawn.
 T}
 .sp 6p
@@ -759,8 +759,8 @@ endpoint, and with the sides equal to the line-width.
 T}
 .TE
 .LP
-For a line with coincident endpoints (x1=x2, y1=y2), 
-when the join-style is applied at one or both endpoints, 
+For a line with coincident endpoints (x1=x2, y1=y2),
+when the join-style is applied at one or both endpoints,
 the effect is as if the line was removed from the overall path.
 However, if the total path consists of or is reduced to a single point joined
 with itself, the effect is the same as when the cap-style is applied at both
@@ -780,12 +780,12 @@ or a
 .B BadMatch
 error results.
 The stipple pixmap must have depth one and must have the same root as the
-GC, or a 
+GC, or a
 .B BadMatch
-error results.  
+error results.
 For stipple operations where the fill-style is
 .B FillStippled
-but not 
+but not
 .BR FillOpaqueStippled ,
 the stipple pattern is tiled in a
 single plane and acts as an additional clip mask to be ANDed with the clip-mask.
@@ -793,7 +793,7 @@ Although some sizes may be faster to use than others,
 any size pixmap can be used for tiling or stippling.
 .LP
 The fill-style defines the contents of the source for line, text, and
-fill requests.  
+fill requests.
 For all text and fill requests (for example,
 .BR XDrawText ,
 .BR XDrawText16 ,
@@ -801,17 +801,17 @@ For all text and fill requests (for example,
 .BR XFillPolygon ,
 and
 .BR XFillArc );
-for line requests 
-with line-style 
+for line requests
+with line-style
 .B LineSolid
 (for example,
 .BR XDrawLine ,
 .BR XDrawSegments ,
 .BR XDrawRectangle ,
 .BR XDrawArc );
-and for the even dashes for line requests with line-style 
+and for the even dashes for line requests with line-style
 .B LineOnOffDash
-or 
+or
 .BR LineDoubleDash ,
 the following apply:
 .TS
@@ -882,7 +882,7 @@ a destination and as a tile or stipple,
 the results are undefined.
 .LP
 For optimum performance,
-you should draw as much as possible with the same GC 
+you should draw as much as possible with the same GC
 (without changing its components).
 The costs of changing GC components relative to using different GCs
 depend on the display hardware and the server implementation.
@@ -891,17 +891,17 @@ cached in display hardware and that such hardware can only cache a small number
 of GCs.
 .LP
 The dashes value is actually a simplified form of the
-more general patterns that can be set with 
+more general patterns that can be set with
 .BR XSetDashes .
 Specifying a
-value of N is equivalent to specifying the two-element list [N, N] in 
+value of N is equivalent to specifying the two-element list [N, N] in
 .BR XSetDashes .
 The value must be nonzero,
 or a
 .B BadValue
 error results.
 .LP
-The clip-mask restricts writes to the destination drawable.  
+The clip-mask restricts writes to the destination drawable.
 If the clip-mask is set to a pixmap,
 it must have depth one and have the same root as the GC,
 or a
@@ -915,8 +915,8 @@ The clip-mask also can be set by calling the
 or
 .B XSetRegion
 functions.
-Only pixels where the clip-mask has a bit set to 1 are drawn.  
-Pixels are not drawn outside the area covered by the clip-mask 
+Only pixels where the clip-mask has a bit set to 1 are drawn.
+Pixels are not drawn outside the area covered by the clip-mask
 or where the clip-mask has a bit set to 0.
 The clip-mask affects all graphics requests.
 The clip-mask does not clip sources.
@@ -927,27 +927,27 @@ You can set the subwindow-mode to
 .B ClipByChildren
 or
 .BR IncludeInferiors .
-For 
+For
 .BR ClipByChildren ,
 both source and destination windows are
-additionally clipped by all viewable 
+additionally clipped by all viewable
 .B InputOutput
-children.  
-For 
+children.
+For
 .BR IncludeInferiors ,
-neither source nor destination window is clipped by inferiors. 
+neither source nor destination window is clipped by inferiors.
 This will result in including subwindow contents in the source
 and drawing through subwindow boundaries of the destination.
-The use of 
+The use of
 .B IncludeInferiors
 on a window of one depth with mapped
 inferiors of differing depth is not illegal, but the semantics are
 undefined by the core protocol.
 .LP
 The fill-rule defines what pixels are inside (drawn) for
-paths given in 
+paths given in
 .B XFillPolygon
-requests and can be set to 
+requests and can be set to
 .B EvenOddRule
 or
 .BR WindingRule .
@@ -955,8 +955,8 @@ For
 .BR EvenOddRule ,
 a point is inside if
 an infinite ray with the point as origin crosses the path an odd number
-of times.  
-For 
+of times.
+For
 .BR WindingRule ,
 a point is inside if an infinite ray with the
 point as origin crosses an unequal number of clockwise and
@@ -969,22 +969,22 @@ The case where a directed line segment is coincident with the ray is
 uninteresting because you can simply choose a different ray that is not
 coincident with a segment.
 .LP
-For both 
+For both
 .B EvenOddRule
 and
 .BR WindingRule ,
-a point is infinitely small, 
-and the path is an infinitely thin line.  
+a point is infinitely small,
+and the path is an infinitely thin line.
 A pixel is inside if the center point of the pixel is inside
-and the center point is not on the boundary.  
+and the center point is not on the boundary.
 If the center point is on the boundary,
 the pixel is inside if and only if the polygon interior is immediately to
-its right (x increasing direction).  
-Pixels with centers on a horizontal edge are a special case 
-and are inside if and only if the polygon interior is immediately below 
+its right (x increasing direction).
+Pixels with centers on a horizontal edge are a special case
+and are inside if and only if the polygon interior is immediately below
 (y increasing direction).
 .LP
-The arc-mode controls filling in the 
+The arc-mode controls filling in the
 .B XFillArcs
 function and can be set to
 .B ArcPieSlice
@@ -997,12 +997,12 @@ For
 .BR ArcChord ,
 the arcs are chord filled.
 .LP
-The graphics-exposure flag controls 
+The graphics-exposure flag controls
 .B GraphicsExpose
 event generation
-for 
+for
 .B XCopyArea
-and 
+and
 .B XCopyPlane
 requests (and any similar requests defined by extensions).
 .SH DIAGNOSTICS
diff --git a/man/XCreateIC.man b/man/XCreateIC.man
index 2eb27423..bbda029d 100644
--- a/man/XCreateIC.man
+++ b/man/XCreateIC.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,9 +50,9 @@
 XCreateIC, XDestroyIC, XIMOfIC \- create, destroy, and obtain the input method of an input context
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-XIC XCreateIC\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^, ...\^); 
+XIC XCreateIC\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^, ...\^);
 .HP
-void XDestroyIC\^(\^XIC \fIic\fP\^); 
+void XDestroyIC\^(\^XIC \fIic\fP\^);
 .HP
 XIM XIMOfIC\^(\^XIC \fIic\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
diff --git a/man/XCreateOC.man b/man/XCreateOC.man
index 6aaea615..8b2644b7 100644
--- a/man/XCreateOC.man
+++ b/man/XCreateOC.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,15 +50,15 @@
 XCreateOC, XDestroyOC, XSetOCValues, XGetOCValues, XOMOfOC \- create output contexts
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-XOC XCreateOC\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^); 
+XOC XCreateOC\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^);
 .HP
-void XDestroyOC\^(\^XOC \fIoc\fP\^); 
+void XDestroyOC\^(\^XOC \fIoc\fP\^);
 .HP
-char * XSetOCValues\^(\^XOC \fIoc\fP\^, ...); 
+char * XSetOCValues\^(\^XOC \fIoc\fP\^, ...);
 .HP
-char * XGetOCValues\^(\^XOC \fIoc\fP\^, ...); 
+char * XGetOCValues\^(\^XOC \fIoc\fP\^, ...);
 .HP
-XOM XOMOfOC\^(\^XOC \fIoc\fP\^); 
+XOM XOMOfOC\^(\^XOC \fIoc\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIoc\fP 1i
 Specifies the output context.
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ function destroys the specified output context.
 .LP
 The
 .B XSetOCValues
-function returns NULL if no error occurred; 
+function returns NULL if no error occurred;
 otherwise,
 it returns the name of the first argument that could not be set.
 An argument might not be set for any of the following reasons:
diff --git a/man/XCreatePixmap.man b/man/XCreatePixmap.man
index da9e73b0..93e8d994 100644
--- a/man/XCreatePixmap.man
+++ b/man/XCreatePixmap.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -52,12 +52,12 @@ XCreatePixmap, XFreePixmap \- create or destroy pixmaps
 .HP
 Pixmap XCreatePixmap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^,
 unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^, unsigned int
-\fIdepth\fP\^); 
+\fIdepth\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XFreePixmap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Pixmap \fIpixmap\fP\^); 
+int XFreePixmap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Pixmap \fIpixmap\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fId\fP 1i
-Specifies which screen the pixmap is created on. 
+Specifies which screen the pixmap is created on.
 .IP \fIdepth\fP 1i
 Specifies the depth of the pixmap.
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
@@ -74,11 +74,11 @@ The
 .B XCreatePixmap
 function creates a pixmap of the width, height, and depth you specified
 and returns a pixmap ID that identifies it.
-It is valid to pass an 
+It is valid to pass an
 .B InputOnly
 window to the drawable argument.
 The width and height arguments must be nonzero,
-or a 
+or a
 .B BadValue
 error results.
 The depth argument must be one of the depths supported by the screen
diff --git a/man/XCreateRegion.man b/man/XCreateRegion.man
index 33ddedc6..d632a6bf 100644
--- a/man/XCreateRegion.man
+++ b/man/XCreateRegion.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,11 +50,11 @@
 XCreateRegion, XSetRegion, XDestroyRegion \- create or destroy regions
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-Region XCreateRegion\^(void\^); 
+Region XCreateRegion\^(void\^);
 .HP
 int XSetRegion\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, Region \fIr\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XDestroyRegion\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^); 
+int XDestroyRegion\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
diff --git a/man/XCreateWindow.man b/man/XCreateWindow.man
index 50489505..aa8f58e6 100644
--- a/man/XCreateWindow.man
+++ b/man/XCreateWindow.man
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -52,9 +52,9 @@
 XCreateWindow, XCreateSimpleWindow, XSetWindowAttributes \- create windows and window attributes structure
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-Window XCreateWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIparent\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^, unsigned int \fIborder_width\fP\^, int \fIdepth\fP\^, unsigned int \fIclass\fP\^, Visual *\fIvisual\fP\^, unsigned long \fIvaluemask\fP\^, XSetWindowAttributes *\fIattributes\fP\^); 
+Window XCreateWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIparent\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^, unsigned int \fIborder_width\fP\^, int \fIdepth\fP\^, unsigned int \fIclass\fP\^, Visual *\fIvisual\fP\^, unsigned long \fIvaluemask\fP\^, XSetWindowAttributes *\fIattributes\fP\^);
 .HP
-Window XCreateSimpleWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIparent\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^, unsigned int \fIborder_width\fP\^, unsigned long \fIborder\fP\^, unsigned long \fIbackground\fP\^); 
+Window XCreateSimpleWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIparent\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^, unsigned int \fIborder_width\fP\^, unsigned long \fIborder\fP\^, unsigned long \fIbackground\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIattributes\fP 1i
 Specifies the structure from which the values (as specified by the value mask)
@@ -73,15 +73,15 @@ Specifies the created window's class.
 You can pass
 .BR InputOutput ,
 .BR InputOnly ,
-or 
+or
 .BR CopyFromParent .
-A class of 
+A class of
 .B CopyFromParent
 means the class
 is taken from the parent.
 .IP \fIdepth\fP 1i
 Specifies the window's depth.
-A depth of 
+A depth of
 .B CopyFromParent
 means the depth is taken from the parent.
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
@@ -96,32 +96,32 @@ If valuemask is zero,
 the attributes are ignored and are not referenced.
 .IP \fIvisual\fP 1i
 Specifies the visual type.
-A visual of 
+A visual of
 .B CopyFromParent
-means the visual type is taken from the 
+means the visual type is taken from the
 parent.
 .IP \fIwidth\fP 1i
 .br
 .ns
 .IP \fIheight\fP 1i
-Specify the width and height, which are the created window's inside dimensions 
+Specify the width and height, which are the created window's inside dimensions
 and do not include the created window's borders.
 .IP \fIx\fP 1i
 .br
 .ns
 .IP \fIy\fP 1i
-Specify the x and y coordinates, which are the top-left outside 
-corner of the window's 
+Specify the x and y coordinates, which are the top-left outside
+corner of the window's
 borders and are relative to the inside of the parent window's borders.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B XCreateWindow
-function creates an unmapped subwindow for a specified parent window, 
-returns the window ID of the created window, 
+function creates an unmapped subwindow for a specified parent window,
+returns the window ID of the created window,
 and causes the X server to generate a
 .B CreateNotify
 event.
-The created window is placed on top in the stacking order 
+The created window is placed on top in the stacking order
 with respect to siblings.
 .LP
 The coordinate system has the X axis horizontal and the Y axis vertical
@@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ Coordinates are integral,
 in terms of pixels,
 and coincide with pixel centers.
 Each window and pixmap has its own coordinate system.
-For a window, 
+For a window,
 the origin is inside the border at the inside, upper-left corner.
 .LP
 The border_width for an
@@ -145,7 +145,7 @@ or a
 .B BadMatch
 error results.
 The depth need not be the same as the parent,
-but the parent must not be a window of class 
+but the parent must not be a window of class
 .BR InputOnly ,
 or a
 .B BadMatch
@@ -167,11 +167,11 @@ The created window is not yet displayed (mapped) on the user's display.
 To display the window, call
 .BR XMapWindow .
 The new window initially uses the same cursor as
-its parent. 
+its parent.
 A new cursor can be defined for the new window by calling
 .BR XDefineCursor .
 .IN "Cursor" "Initial State"
-.IN "XDefineCursor" 
+.IN "XDefineCursor"
 The window will not be visible on the screen unless it and all of its
 ancestors are mapped and it is not obscured by any of its ancestors.
 .LP
@@ -195,7 +195,7 @@ subwindow for a specified parent window, returns the
 window ID of the created window, and causes the X server to generate a
 .B CreateNotify
 event.
-The created window is placed on top in the stacking order with respect to 
+The created window is placed on top in the stacking order with respect to
 siblings.
 Any part of the window that extends outside its parent window is clipped.
 The border_width for an
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ window must be zero, or a
 error results.
 .B XCreateSimpleWindow
 inherits its depth, class, and visual from its parent.
-All other window attributes, except background and border, 
+All other window attributes, except background and border,
 have their default values.
 .LP
 .B XCreateSimpleWindow
@@ -389,10 +389,10 @@ alternatives can generate this error.
 A value for a Window argument does not name a defined Window.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 XChangeWindowAttributes(__libmansuffix__),
-XConfigureWindow(__libmansuffix__), 
+XConfigureWindow(__libmansuffix__),
 .EEfineCursor(__libmansuffix__),
-.EEstroyWindow(__libmansuffix__), 
-XMapWindow(__libmansuffix__), 
+.EEstroyWindow(__libmansuffix__),
+XMapWindow(__libmansuffix__),
 XRaiseWindow(__libmansuffix__),
 XUnmapWindow(__libmansuffix__)
 .br
diff --git a/man/XCreateWindowEvent.man b/man/XCreateWindowEvent.man
index 85599776..d67bf43f 100644
--- a/man/XCreateWindowEvent.man
+++ b/man/XCreateWindowEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -92,15 +92,15 @@ dispatchers.
 .LP
 The parent member is set to the created window's parent.
 The window member specifies the created window.
-The x and y members are set to the created window's coordinates relative 
-to the parent window's origin and indicate the position of the upper-left 
+The x and y members are set to the created window's coordinates relative
+to the parent window's origin and indicate the position of the upper-left
 outside corner of the created window.
-The width and height members are set to the inside size of the created window 
+The width and height members are set to the inside size of the created window
 (not including the border) and are always nonzero.
 The border_width member is set to the width of the created window's border, in pixels.
 The override_redirect member is set to the override-redirect attribute of the
 window.
-Window manager clients normally should ignore this window 
+Window manager clients normally should ignore this window
 if the override_redirect member is
 .BR True .
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
diff --git a/man/XCrossingEvent.man b/man/XCrossingEvent.man
index 77243874..286d243a 100644
--- a/man/XCrossingEvent.man
+++ b/man/XCrossingEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ typedef struct {
         int mode;       /\&* NotifyNormal, NotifyGrab, NotifyUngrab */
         int detail;
                 /\&*
-                * NotifyAncestor, NotifyVirtual, NotifyInferior, 
+                * NotifyAncestor, NotifyVirtual, NotifyInferior,
                 * NotifyNonlinear,NotifyNonlinearVirtual
                 */
         Bool same_screen;       /\&* same screen flag */
@@ -107,10 +107,10 @@ The window member is set to the window on which the
 .B EnterNotify
 or
 .B LeaveNotify
-event was generated and is referred to as the event window. 
-This is the window used by the X server to report the event, 
+event was generated and is referred to as the event window.
+This is the window used by the X server to report the event,
 and is relative to the root
-window on which the event occurred. 
+window on which the event occurred.
 The root member is set to the root window of the screen
 on which the event occurred.
 .LP
@@ -123,19 +123,19 @@ Otherwise, the X server sets the subwindow member to
 .BR None .
 For an
 .B EnterNotify
-event, if a child of the event window contains the final pointer position, 
+event, if a child of the event window contains the final pointer position,
 the subwindow component is set to that child or
 .BR None .
 .LP
 The time member is set to the time when the event was generated
 and is expressed in milliseconds.
-The x and y members are set to the coordinates of the pointer position in 
+The x and y members are set to the coordinates of the pointer position in
 the event window.
 This position is always the pointer's final position,
 not its initial position.
 If the event window is on the same
 screen as the root window, x and y are the pointer coordinates
-relative to the event window's origin. 
+relative to the event window's origin.
 Otherwise, x and y are set to zero.
 The x_root and y_root members are set to the pointer's coordinates relative to the
 root window's origin at the time of the event.
@@ -168,7 +168,7 @@ the event window is not the focus window or an inferior of the focus window.
 The state member is set to indicate the state of the pointer buttons and
 modifier keys just prior to the
 event.
-The X server can set this member to the bitwise inclusive OR of one 
+The X server can set this member to the bitwise inclusive OR of one
 or more of the button or modifier key masks:
 .BR Button1Mask ,
 .BR Button2Mask ,
@@ -184,10 +184,10 @@ or more of the button or modifier key masks:
 .BR Mod4Mask ,
 .BR Mod5Mask .
 .LP
-The mode member is set to indicate whether the events are normal events, 
+The mode member is set to indicate whether the events are normal events,
 pseudo-motion events
 when a grab activates, or pseudo-motion events when a grab deactivates.
-The X server can set this member to 
+The X server can set this member to
 .BR NotifyNormal ,
 .BR NotifyGrab ,
 or
diff --git a/man/XDefineCursor.man b/man/XDefineCursor.man
index ded73021..1195966a 100644
--- a/man/XDefineCursor.man
+++ b/man/XDefineCursor.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ XDefineCursor, XUndefineCursor \- define cursors
 int XDefineCursor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, Cursor
 \fIcursor\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XUndefineCursor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^); 
+int XUndefineCursor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIcursor\fP 1i
 Specifies the cursor that is to be displayed or
diff --git a/man/XDestroyWindow.man b/man/XDestroyWindow.man
index a61764a2..0d8c7716 100644
--- a/man/XDestroyWindow.man
+++ b/man/XDestroyWindow.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,9 +50,9 @@
 XDestroyWindow, XDestroySubwindows \- destroy windows
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-int XDestroyWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^); 
+int XDestroyWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XDestroySubwindows\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^); 
+int XDestroySubwindows\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ the window itself.
 The ordering among siblings and across subhierarchies is not otherwise
 constrained.
 If the window you specified is a root window, no windows are destroyed.
-Destroying a mapped window will generate 
+Destroying a mapped window will generate
 .B Expose
 events on other windows that were obscured by the window being destroyed.
 .LP
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ error.
 .LP
 The
 .B XDestroySubwindows
-function destroys all inferior windows of the specified window, 
+function destroys all inferior windows of the specified window,
 in bottom-to-top stacking order.
 It causes the X server to generate a
 .B DestroyNotify
@@ -96,13 +96,13 @@ event for each window.
 If any mapped
 subwindows were actually destroyed,
 .B XDestroySubwindows
-causes the X server to generate 
+causes the X server to generate
 .B Expose
 events on the specified window.
 This is much more efficient than deleting many windows
 one at a time because much of the work need be performed only once for all
 of the windows, rather than for each window.
-The subwindows should never be referenced again.  
+The subwindows should never be referenced again.
 .LP
 .B XDestroySubwindows
 can generate a
diff --git a/man/XDestroyWindowEvent.man b/man/XDestroyWindowEvent.man
index ca98e4df..c1e14932 100644
--- a/man/XDestroyWindowEvent.man
+++ b/man/XDestroyWindowEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ dispatchers.
 The event member is set either to the destroyed window or to its parent,
 depending on whether
 .B StructureNotify
-or 
+or
 .B SubstructureNotify
 was selected.
 The window member is set to the window that is destroyed.
diff --git a/man/XDrawArc.man b/man/XDrawArc.man
index 60aa1518..ec7c7520 100644
--- a/man/XDrawArc.man
+++ b/man/XDrawArc.man
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -64,10 +64,10 @@ XDrawArc, XDrawArcs, XArc \- draw arcs and arc structure
 .HP
 int XDrawArc\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^,
 int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int
-\fIheight\fP\^, int \fIangle1\fP\^, int \fIangle2\fP\^); 
+\fIheight\fP\^, int \fIangle1\fP\^, int \fIangle2\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XDrawArcs\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^,
-XArc *\fIarcs\fP\^, int \fInarcs\fP\^); 
+XArc *\fIarcs\fP\^, int \fInarcs\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIangle1\fP 1i
 Specifies the start of the arc relative to the three-o'clock position
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ arc, in units of degrees * 64.
 .IP \fIarcs\fP 1i
 Specifies an array of arcs.
 .IP \fId\fP 1i
-Specifies the drawable. 
+Specifies the drawable.
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIgc\fP 1i
@@ -94,41 +94,41 @@ Specify the width and height, which are the major and minor axes of the arc.
 .br
 .ns
 .IP \fIy\fP 1i
-Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the 
-origin of the drawable 
+Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
+origin of the drawable
 and specify the upper-left corner of the bounding rectangle.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .EQ
 delim %%
 .EN
 .B XDrawArc
-draws a single circular or elliptical arc, and 
+draws a single circular or elliptical arc, and
 .B XDrawArcs
 draws multiple circular or elliptical arcs.
-Each arc is specified by a rectangle and two angles.  
+Each arc is specified by a rectangle and two angles.
 The center of the circle or ellipse is the center of the
 rectangle, and the major and minor axes are specified by the width and height.
-Positive angles indicate counterclockwise motion, 
-and negative angles indicate clockwise motion.  
-If the magnitude of angle2 is greater than 360 degrees, 
+Positive angles indicate counterclockwise motion,
+and negative angles indicate clockwise motion.
+If the magnitude of angle2 is greater than 360 degrees,
 .B XDrawArc
-or 
+or
 .B XDrawArcs
 truncates it to 360 degrees.
 .LP
-For an arc specified as %[ ~x, ~y, ~width , ~height, ~angle1, ~angle2 ]%, 
-the origin of the major and minor axes is at 
-% [ x +^ {width over 2} , ~y +^ {height over 2}  ]%, 
-and the infinitely thin path describing the entire circle or ellipse 
-intersects the horizontal axis at % [ x, ~y +^ {height over 2}  ]% and 
+For an arc specified as %[ ~x, ~y, ~width , ~height, ~angle1, ~angle2 ]%,
+the origin of the major and minor axes is at
+% [ x +^ {width over 2} , ~y +^ {height over 2}  ]%,
+and the infinitely thin path describing the entire circle or ellipse
+intersects the horizontal axis at % [ x, ~y +^ {height over 2}  ]% and
 % [ x +^ width , ~y +^ { height over 2 }] %
-and intersects the vertical axis at % [ x +^ { width over 2 } , ~y ]% and 
+and intersects the vertical axis at % [ x +^ { width over 2 } , ~y ]% and
 % [ x +^ { width over 2 }, ~y +^ height ]%.
 These coordinates can be fractional
 and so are not truncated to discrete coordinates.
-The path should be defined by the ideal mathematical path.  
-For a wide line with line-width lw, 
-the bounding outlines for filling are given        
+The path should be defined by the ideal mathematical path.
+For a wide line with line-width lw,
+the bounding outlines for filling are given
 by the two infinitely thin paths consisting of all points whose perpendicular
 distance from the path of the circle/ellipse is equal to lw/2
 (which may be a fractional value).
@@ -160,37 +160,37 @@ l l.
 %2 pi%	for normal-angle in the range % [ {3 pi} over 2 , ~2 pi  ]%
 .TE
 .LP
-For any given arc, 
+For any given arc,
 .B XDrawArc
 and
 .B XDrawArcs
-do not draw a pixel more than once.  
-If two arcs join correctly and if the line-width is greater than zero 
-and the arcs intersect, 
+do not draw a pixel more than once.
+If two arcs join correctly and if the line-width is greater than zero
+and the arcs intersect,
 .B XDrawArc
 and
 .B XDrawArcs
 do not draw a pixel more than once.
-Otherwise, 
+Otherwise,
 the intersecting pixels of intersecting arcs are drawn multiple times.
 Specifying an arc with one endpoint and a clockwise extent draws the same pixels
 as specifying the other endpoint and an equivalent counterclockwise extent,
 except as it affects joins.
 .LP
-If the last point in one arc coincides with the first point in the following 
-arc, the two arcs will join correctly.  
-If the first point in the first arc coincides with the last point in the last 
+If the last point in one arc coincides with the first point in the following
+arc, the two arcs will join correctly.
+If the first point in the first arc coincides with the last point in the last
 arc, the two arcs will join correctly.
 By specifying one axis to be zero, a horizontal or vertical line can be
 drawn.
 Angles are computed based solely on the coordinate system and ignore the
 aspect ratio.
 .LP
-Both functions use these GC components: 
-function, plane-mask, line-width, line-style, cap-style, join-style, 
+Both functions use these GC components:
+function, plane-mask, line-width, line-style, cap-style, join-style,
 fill-style, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
-They also use these GC mode-dependent components: 
-foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin, 
+They also use these GC mode-dependent components:
+foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
 tile-stipple-y-origin, dash-offset, and dash-list.
 .LP
 .B XDrawArc
diff --git a/man/XDrawImageString.man b/man/XDrawImageString.man
index 5f934ff2..9f2cffca 100644
--- a/man/XDrawImageString.man
+++ b/man/XDrawImageString.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -52,14 +52,14 @@ XDrawImageString, XDrawImageString16 \- draw image text
 .HP
 int XDrawImageString\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
 \fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, char *\fIstring\fP\^, int
-\fIlength\fP\^); 
+\fIlength\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XDrawImageString16\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
 \fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, XChar2b *\fIstring\fP\^, int
-\fIlength\fP\^); 
+\fIlength\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fId\fP 1i
-Specifies the drawable. 
+Specifies the drawable.
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIgc\fP 1i
@@ -72,8 +72,8 @@ Specifies the character string.
 .br
 .ns
 .IP \fIy\fP 1i
-Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the 
-origin of the specified drawable 
+Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
+origin of the specified drawable
 and define the origin of the first character.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ The
 function is similar to
 .B XDrawImageString
 except that it uses 2-byte or 16-bit characters.
-Both functions also use both the foreground and background pixels 
+Both functions also use both the foreground and background pixels
 of the GC in the destination.
 .LP
 The effect is first to fill a
@@ -106,11 +106,11 @@ font-ascent + font-descent
 .EE
 .LP
 The overall-width, font-ascent, and font-descent
-are as would be returned by 
+are as would be returned by
 .B XQueryTextExtents
 using gc and string.
-The function and fill-style defined in the GC are ignored for these functions. 
-The effective function is 
+The function and fill-style defined in the GC are ignored for these functions.
+The effective function is
 .BR GXcopy ,
 and the effective fill-style is
 .BR FillSolid .
@@ -120,8 +120,8 @@ and used with
 .BR XDrawImageString ,
 each byte is used as a byte2 with a byte1 of zero.
 .LP
-Both functions use these GC components: 
-plane-mask, foreground, background, font, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, 
+Both functions use these GC components:
+plane-mask, foreground, background, font, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin,
 clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
 .LP
 .B XDrawImageString
diff --git a/man/XDrawLine.man b/man/XDrawLine.man
index 098225fd..2d985340 100644
--- a/man/XDrawLine.man
+++ b/man/XDrawLine.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,22 +51,22 @@ XDrawLine, XDrawLines, XDrawSegments, XSegment \- draw lines, polygons, and line
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XDrawLine\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^,
-int \fIx1\fP\^, int \fIy1\fP\^, int \fIx2\fP\^, int \fIy2\fP\^); 
-.HP 
+int \fIx1\fP\^, int \fIy1\fP\^, int \fIx2\fP\^, int \fIy2\fP\^);
+.HP
 int XDrawLines\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
-\fIgc\fP\^, XPoint *\fIpoints\fP\^, int \fInpoints\fP\^, int \fImode\fP\^); 
-.HP 
+\fIgc\fP\^, XPoint *\fIpoints\fP\^, int \fInpoints\fP\^, int \fImode\fP\^);
+.HP
 int XDrawSegments\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
-\fIgc\fP\^, XSegment *\fIsegments\fP\^, int \fInsegments\fP\^); 
+\fIgc\fP\^, XSegment *\fIsegments\fP\^, int \fInsegments\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fId\fP 1i
-Specifies the drawable. 
+Specifies the drawable.
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIgc\fP 1i
 Specifies the GC.
 .IP \fImode\fP 1i
-Specifies the coordinate mode. 
+Specifies the coordinate mode.
 You can pass
 .B CoordModeOrigin
 or
@@ -96,28 +96,28 @@ The
 function uses the components of the specified GC to
 draw a line between the specified set of points (x1, y1) and (x2, y2).
 It does not perform joining at coincident endpoints.
-For any given line, 
+For any given line,
 .B XDrawLine
 does not draw a pixel more than once.
-If lines intersect, the intersecting pixels are drawn multiple times.  
+If lines intersect, the intersecting pixels are drawn multiple times.
 .LP
 The
 .B XDrawLines
-function uses the components of the specified GC to draw 
-npoints\-1 lines between each pair of points (point[i], point[i+1]) 
+function uses the components of the specified GC to draw
+npoints\-1 lines between each pair of points (point[i], point[i+1])
 in the array of
 .B XPoint
 structures.
 It draws the lines in the order listed in the array.
 The lines join correctly at all intermediate points, and if the first and last
 points coincide, the first and last lines also join correctly.
-For any given line, 
+For any given line,
 .B XDrawLines
 does not draw a pixel more than once.
-If thin (zero line-width) lines intersect, 
+If thin (zero line-width) lines intersect,
 the intersecting pixels are drawn multiple times.
 If wide lines intersect, the intersecting pixels are drawn only once, as though
-the entire 
+the entire
 .B PolyLine
 protocol request were a single, filled shape.
 .B CoordModeOrigin
@@ -128,18 +128,18 @@ treats all coordinates after the first as relative to the previous point.
 .LP
 The
 .B XDrawSegments
-function draws multiple, unconnected lines. 
-For each segment, 
+function draws multiple, unconnected lines.
+For each segment,
 .B XDrawSegments
 draws a
 line between (x1, y1) and (x2, y2).
 It draws the lines in the order listed in the array of
 .B XSegment
 structures and does not perform joining at coincident endpoints.
-For any given line, 
+For any given line,
 .B XDrawSegments
-does not draw a pixel more than once.  
-If lines intersect, the intersecting pixels are drawn multiple times.  
+does not draw a pixel more than once.
+If lines intersect, the intersecting pixels are drawn multiple times.
 .LP
 All three functions use these GC components:
 function, plane-mask, line-width,
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ The
 .B XDrawLines
 function also uses the join-style GC component.
 All three functions also use these GC mode-dependent components:
-foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin, 
+foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
 tile-stipple-y-origin, dash-offset, and dash-list.
 .LP
 .BR XDrawLine ,
diff --git a/man/XDrawPoint.man b/man/XDrawPoint.man
index 6ee15430..dd75b692 100644
--- a/man/XDrawPoint.man
+++ b/man/XDrawPoint.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,19 +51,19 @@ XDrawPoint, XDrawPoints, XPoint \- draw points and points structure
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XDrawPoint\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
-\fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^); 
+\fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XDrawPoints\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
-\fIgc\fP\^, XPoint *\fIpoints\fP\^, int \fInpoints\fP\^, int \fImode\fP\^); 
+\fIgc\fP\^, XPoint *\fIpoints\fP\^, int \fInpoints\fP\^, int \fImode\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fId\fP 1i
-Specifies the drawable. 
+Specifies the drawable.
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIgc\fP 1i
 Specifies the GC.
 .IP \fImode\fP 1i
-Specifies the coordinate mode. 
+Specifies the coordinate mode.
 You can pass
 .B CoordModeOrigin
 or
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Specify the x and y coordinates where you want the point drawn.
 The
 .B XDrawPoint
 function uses the foreground pixel and function components of the
-GC to draw a single point into the specified drawable; 
+GC to draw a single point into the specified drawable;
 .B XDrawPoints
 draws multiple points this way.
 .B CoordModeOrigin
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ foreground, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
 can generate
 .BR BadDrawable ,
 .BR BadGC ,
-and 
+and
 .B BadMatch
 errors.
 .B XDrawPoints
diff --git a/man/XDrawRectangle.man b/man/XDrawRectangle.man
index 16c7a44d..eb829a21 100644
--- a/man/XDrawRectangle.man
+++ b/man/XDrawRectangle.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -52,13 +52,13 @@ XDrawRectangle, XDrawRectangles, XRectangle \- draw rectangles and rectangles st
 .HP
 int XDrawRectangle\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
 \fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned
-int \fIheight\fP\^); 
+int \fIheight\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XDrawRectangles\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
-\fIgc\fP\^, XRectangle \fIrectangles\fP\^[\^]\^, int \fInrectangles\fP\^); 
+\fIgc\fP\^, XRectangle \fIrectangles\fP\^[\^]\^, int \fInrectangles\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fId\fP 1i
-Specifies the drawable. 
+Specifies the drawable.
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIgc\fP 1i
@@ -83,25 +83,25 @@ The
 and
 .B XDrawRectangles
 functions draw the outlines of the specified rectangle or rectangles as
-if a five-point 
+if a five-point
 .B PolyLine
 protocol request were specified for each rectangle:
 .IP
 [x,y] [x+width,y] [x+width,y+height] [x,y+height] [x,y]
-.LP 
-For the specified rectangle or rectangles, 
+.LP
+For the specified rectangle or rectangles,
 these functions do not draw a pixel more than once.
 .B XDrawRectangles
 draws the rectangles in the order listed in the array.
 If rectangles intersect,
 the intersecting pixels are drawn multiple times.
 .LP
-Both functions use these GC components: 
+Both functions use these GC components:
 function, plane-mask, line-width,
-line-style, cap-style, join-style, fill-style, 
+line-style, cap-style, join-style, fill-style,
 subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
-They also use these GC mode-dependent components: 
-foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin, 
+They also use these GC mode-dependent components:
+foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
 tile-stipple-y-origin, dash-offset, and dash-list.
 .LP
 .B XDrawRectangle
diff --git a/man/XDrawString.man b/man/XDrawString.man
index a91064c0..97844ee1 100644
--- a/man/XDrawString.man
+++ b/man/XDrawString.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -52,14 +52,14 @@ XDrawString, XDrawString16 \- draw text characters
 .HP
 int XDrawString\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
 \fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, char *\fIstring\fP\^, int
-\fIlength\fP\^); 
+\fIlength\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XDrawString16\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
 \fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, XChar2b *\fIstring\fP\^, int
-\fIlength\fP\^); 
+\fIlength\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fId\fP 1i
-Specifies the drawable. 
+Specifies the drawable.
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIgc\fP 1i
@@ -72,8 +72,8 @@ Specifies the character string.
 .br
 .ns
 .IP \fIy\fP 1i
-Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the 
-origin of the specified drawable 
+Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the
+origin of the specified drawable
 and define the origin of the first character.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 Each character image, as defined by the font in the GC, is treated as an
@@ -84,11 +84,11 @@ and used with
 .BR XDrawString16 ,
 each byte is used as a byte2 with a byte1 of zero.
 .LP
-Both functions use these GC components: 
-function, plane-mask, fill-style, font, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, 
+Both functions use these GC components:
+function, plane-mask, fill-style, font, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin,
 clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
-They also use these GC mode-dependent components: 
-foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin, 
+They also use these GC mode-dependent components:
+foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
 and tile-stipple-y-origin.
 .LP
 .B XDrawString
diff --git a/man/XDrawText.man b/man/XDrawText.man
index 07fddd0d..055194d8 100644
--- a/man/XDrawText.man
+++ b/man/XDrawText.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,14 +51,14 @@ XDrawText, XDrawText16, XTextItem, XTextItem16 \- draw polytext text and text dr
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XDrawText\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^,
-int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, XTextItem *\fIitems\fP\^, int \fInitems\fP\^); 
+int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, XTextItem *\fIitems\fP\^, int \fInitems\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XDrawText16\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
 \fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, XTextItem16 *\fIitems\fP\^, int
-\fInitems\fP\^); 
+\fInitems\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fId\fP 1i
-Specifies the drawable. 
+Specifies the drawable.
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIgc\fP 1i
@@ -71,8 +71,8 @@ Specifies the number of text items in the array.
 .br
 .ns
 .IP \fIy\fP 1i
-Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the origin 
-of the specified drawable 
+Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the origin
+of the specified drawable
 and define the origin of the first character.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
@@ -83,12 +83,12 @@ except that it uses 2-byte or 16-bit characters.
 Both functions allow complex spacing and font shifts between counted strings.
 .LP
 Each text item is processed in turn.
-A font member other than 
+A font member other than
 .B None
 in an item causes the font to be stored in the GC
-and used for subsequent text.  
+and used for subsequent text.
 A text element delta specifies an additional change
-in the position along the x axis before the string is drawn. 
+in the position along the x axis before the string is drawn.
 The delta is always added to the character origin
 and is not dependent on any characteristics of the font.
 Each character image, as defined by the font in the GC, is treated as an
@@ -99,16 +99,16 @@ If a text item generates a
 error, the previous text items may have been drawn.
 .LP
 For fonts defined with linear indexing rather than 2-byte matrix indexing,
-each 
+each
 .B XChar2b
-structure is interpreted as a 16-bit number with byte1 as the 
+structure is interpreted as a 16-bit number with byte1 as the
 most significant byte.
 .LP
 Both functions use these GC components:
-function, plane-mask, fill-style, font, subwindow-mode, 
+function, plane-mask, fill-style, font, subwindow-mode,
 clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
-They also use these GC mode-dependent components: 
-foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin, 
+They also use these GC mode-dependent components:
+foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
 and tile-stipple-y-origin.
 .LP
 .B XDrawText
diff --git a/man/XEmptyRegion.man b/man/XEmptyRegion.man
index ae759f43..b0096144 100644
--- a/man/XEmptyRegion.man
+++ b/man/XEmptyRegion.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,14 +50,14 @@
 XEmptyRegion, XEqualRegion, XPointInRegion, XRectInRegion \- determine if regions are empty or equal
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-Bool XEmptyRegion\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^); 
+Bool XEmptyRegion\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^);
 .HP
-Bool XEqualRegion\^(\^Region \fIr1\fP\^, Region \fIr2\fP\^); 
+Bool XEqualRegion\^(\^Region \fIr1\fP\^, Region \fIr2\fP\^);
 .HP
-Bool XPointInRegion\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^); 
+Bool XPointInRegion\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XRectInRegion\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned
-int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^); 
+int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIr\fP 1i
 Specifies the region.
@@ -66,18 +66,18 @@ Specifies the region.
 .ns
 .IP \fIr2\fP 1i
 Specify the two regions.
-.ds Wh 
+.ds Wh
 .IP \fIwidth\fP 1i
 .br
 .ns
 .IP \fIheight\fP 1i
 Specify the width and height, which define the rectangle.
-.ds Xy 
+.ds Xy
 .IP \fIx\fP 1i
 .br
 .ns
 .IP \fIy\fP 1i
-Specify the x and y coordinates, which define the point 
+Specify the x and y coordinates, which define the point
 or the coordinates of the upper-left corner of the rectangle.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ if the two regions have the same offset, size, and shape.
 .LP
 The
 .B XPointInRegion
-function returns 
+function returns
 .B True
 if the point (x, y) is contained in the region r.
 .LP
diff --git a/man/XErrorEvent.man b/man/XErrorEvent.man
index 4c3c16f3..b5029124 100644
--- a/man/XErrorEvent.man
+++ b/man/XErrorEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@
 .SH NAME
 XErrorEvent \- X error event structure
 .SH STRUCTURES
-The 
+The
 .B XErrorEvent
 structure contains:
 .LP
@@ -68,13 +68,13 @@ typedef struct {
 When you receive this event,
 the structure members are set as follows.
 .LP
-The serial member is the number of requests, starting from one, 
-sent over the network connection since it was opened. 
-It is the number that was the value of 
+The serial member is the number of requests, starting from one,
+sent over the network connection since it was opened.
+It is the number that was the value of
 .B NextRequest
-immediately before the failing call was made.  
+immediately before the failing call was made.
 The request_code member is a protocol request
-of the procedure that failed, as defined in 
+of the procedure that failed, as defined in
 .hN X11/Xproto.h .
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 AllPlanes(__libmansuffix__),
diff --git a/man/XExposeEvent.man b/man/XExposeEvent.man
index 76210467..6d1c7ada 100644
--- a/man/XExposeEvent.man
+++ b/man/XExposeEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -98,7 +98,7 @@ events that are to follow.
 If count is zero, no more
 .B Expose
 events follow for this window.
-However, if count is nonzero, at least that number of 
+However, if count is nonzero, at least that number of
 .B Expose
 events (and possibly more) follow for this window.
 Simple applications that do not want to optimize redisplay by distinguishing
diff --git a/man/XExtentsOfFontSet.man b/man/XExtentsOfFontSet.man
index 260232f8..be59d554 100644
--- a/man/XExtentsOfFontSet.man
+++ b/man/XExtentsOfFontSet.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
 XExtentsOfFontSet \- obtain the maximum extents structure for a font set
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-XFontSetExtents *XExtentsOfFontSet\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^); 
+XFontSetExtents *XExtentsOfFontSet\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIfont_set\fP 1i
 Specifies the font set.
@@ -62,13 +62,13 @@ function returns an
 structure for the fonts used by the Xmb and Xwc layers
 for the given font set.
 .LP
-The 
+The
 .B XFontSetExtents
 structure is owned by Xlib and should not be modified
 or freed by the client.
-It will be freed by a call to 
+It will be freed by a call to
 .B XFreeFontSet
-with the associated 
+with the associated
 .BR XFontSet .
 Until freed, its contents will not be modified by Xlib.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
diff --git a/man/XFillRectangle.man b/man/XFillRectangle.man
index e62ebb61..06b91dcd 100644
--- a/man/XFillRectangle.man
+++ b/man/XFillRectangle.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -52,21 +52,21 @@ XFillRectangle, XFillRectangles, XFillPolygon, XFillArc, XFillArcs \- fill recta
 .HP
 int XFillRectangle\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
 \fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned
-int \fIheight\fP\^); 
+int \fIheight\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XFillRectangles\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
-\fIgc\fP\^, XRectangle *\fIrectangles\fP\^, int \fInrectangles\fP\^); 
+\fIgc\fP\^, XRectangle *\fIrectangles\fP\^, int \fInrectangles\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XFillPolygon\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
 \fIgc\fP\^, XPoint *\fIpoints\fP\^, int \fInpoints\fP\^, int \fIshape\fP\^,
 int \fImode\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XFillArc\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, 
+int XFillArc\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^,
 int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int
-\fIheight\fP\^, int \fIangle1\fP\^, int \fIangle2\fP\^); 
+\fIheight\fP\^, int \fIangle1\fP\^, int \fIangle2\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XFillArcs\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^,
-XArc *\fIarcs\fP\^, int \fInarcs\fP\^); 
+XArc *\fIarcs\fP\^, int \fInarcs\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIangle1\fP 1i
 Specifies the start of the arc relative to the three-o'clock position
@@ -77,13 +77,13 @@ arc, in units of degrees * 64.
 .IP \fIarcs\fP 1i
 Specifies an array of arcs.
 .IP \fId\fP 1i
-Specifies the drawable. 
+Specifies the drawable.
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIgc\fP 1i
 Specifies the GC.
 .IP \fImode\fP 1i
-Specifies the coordinate mode. 
+Specifies the coordinate mode.
 You can pass
 .B CoordModeOrigin
 or
@@ -100,17 +100,17 @@ Specifies an array of points.
 Specifies an array of rectangles.
 .IP \fIshape\fP 1i
 Specifies a shape that helps the server to improve performance.
-You can pass 
+You can pass
 .BR Complex ,
 .BR Convex ,
-or 
+or
 .BR Nonconvex .
-.ds Wh 
+.ds Wh
 .IP \fIwidth\fP 1i
 .br
 .ns
 .IP \fIheight\fP 1i
-Specify the width and height, which are the dimensions of the 
+Specify the width and height, which are the dimensions of the
 rectangle to be filled or the major and minor axes of the arc.
 .IP \fIx\fP 1i
 .br
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ The
 and
 .B XFillRectangles
 functions fill the specified rectangle or rectangles
-as if a four-point 
+as if a four-point
 .B FillPolygon
 protocol request were specified for each rectangle:
 .LP
@@ -136,20 +136,20 @@ Each function uses the x and y coordinates,
 width and height dimensions, and GC you specify.
 .LP
 .B XFillRectangles
-fills the rectangles in the order listed in the array.  
+fills the rectangles in the order listed in the array.
 For any given rectangle,
 .B XFillRectangle
 and
 .B XFillRectangles
-do not draw a pixel more than once.  
+do not draw a pixel more than once.
 If rectangles intersect, the intersecting pixels are
 drawn multiple times.
 .LP
-Both functions use these GC components: 
-function, plane-mask, fill-style, subwindow-mode, 
+Both functions use these GC components:
+function, plane-mask, fill-style, subwindow-mode,
 clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
-They also use these GC mode-dependent components: 
-foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin, 
+They also use these GC mode-dependent components:
+foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
 and tile-stipple-y-origin.
 .LP
 .B XFillRectangle
@@ -175,12 +175,12 @@ and
 .B CoordModePrevious
 treats all coordinates after the first as relative to the previous point.
 .LP
-Depending on the specified shape, the following occurs: 
+Depending on the specified shape, the following occurs:
 .IP \(bu 5
 If shape is
 .BR Complex ,
-the path may self-intersect. 
-Note that contiguous coincident points in the path are not treated 
+the path may self-intersect.
+Note that contiguous coincident points in the path are not treated
 as self-intersection.
 .IP \(bu 5
 If shape is
@@ -188,36 +188,36 @@ If shape is
 for every pair of points inside the polygon,
 the line segment connecting them does not intersect the path.
 If known by the client,
-specifying 
+specifying
 .B Convex
-can improve performance.  
+can improve performance.
 If you specify
 .B Convex
-for a path that is not convex, 
+for a path that is not convex,
 the graphics results are undefined.
 .IP \(bu 5
 If shape is
 .BR Nonconvex ,
 the path does not self-intersect, but the shape is not
-wholly convex. 
-If known by the client, 
-specifying 
+wholly convex.
+If known by the client,
+specifying
 .B Nonconvex
 instead of
 .B Complex
-may improve performance.  
+may improve performance.
 If you specify
 .B Nonconvex
 for a self-intersecting path, the graphics results are undefined.
 .LP
-The fill-rule of the GC controls the filling behavior of 
+The fill-rule of the GC controls the filling behavior of
 self-intersecting polygons.
 .LP
-This function uses these GC components: 
-function, plane-mask, fill-style, fill-rule, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, 
+This function uses these GC components:
+function, plane-mask, fill-style, fill-rule, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin,
 clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
-It also uses these GC mode-dependent components: 
-foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin, 
+It also uses these GC mode-dependent components:
+foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
 and tile-stipple-y-origin.
 .LP
 .B XFillPolygon
@@ -229,35 +229,35 @@ and
 .B BadValue
 errors.
 .LP
-For each arc, 
+For each arc,
 .B XFillArc
 or
 .B XFillArcs
 fills the region closed by the infinitely thin path
-described by the specified arc and, depending on the 
-arc-mode specified in the GC, one or two line segments. 
-For 
+described by the specified arc and, depending on the
+arc-mode specified in the GC, one or two line segments.
+For
 .BR ArcChord ,
-the single line segment joining the endpoints of the arc is used.  
-For 
+the single line segment joining the endpoints of the arc is used.
+For
 .BR ArcPieSlice ,
 the two line segments joining the endpoints of the arc with the center
-point are used.  
+point are used.
 .B XFillArcs
-fills the arcs in the order listed in the array.  
-For any given arc,  
+fills the arcs in the order listed in the array.
+For any given arc,
 .B XFillArc
 and
 .B XFillArcs
-do not draw a pixel more than once.  
-If regions intersect, 
+do not draw a pixel more than once.
+If regions intersect,
 the intersecting pixels are drawn multiple times.
 .LP
-Both functions use these GC components: 
-function, plane-mask, fill-style, arc-mode, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, 
+Both functions use these GC components:
+function, plane-mask, fill-style, arc-mode, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin,
 clip-y-origin, and clip-mask.
-They also use these GC mode-dependent components: 
-foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin, 
+They also use these GC mode-dependent components:
+foreground, background, tile, stipple, tile-stipple-x-origin,
 and tile-stipple-y-origin.
 .LP
 .B XFillArc
diff --git a/man/XFilterEvent.man b/man/XFilterEvent.man
index 0de0f96c..e08fc75c 100644
--- a/man/XFilterEvent.man
+++ b/man/XFilterEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
 XFilterEvent \- filter X events for an input method
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-Bool XFilterEvent\^(\^XEvent *\fIevent\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^); 
+Bool XFilterEvent\^(\^XEvent *\fIevent\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIevent\fP 1i
 Specifies the event to filter.
diff --git a/man/XFlush.man b/man/XFlush.man
index 3b7a0da6..5871131d 100644
--- a/man/XFlush.man
+++ b/man/XFlush.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,16 +50,16 @@
 XFlush, XSync, XEventsQueued, XPending \- handle output buffer or event queue
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-int XFlush\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+int XFlush\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XSync\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Bool \fIdiscard\fP\^); 
+int XSync\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Bool \fIdiscard\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XEventsQueued\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fImode\fP\^); 
+int XEventsQueued\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fImode\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XPending\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+int XPending\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdiscard\fP 1i
-Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether 
+Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether
 .B XSync
 discards all events on the event queue.
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
@@ -96,14 +96,14 @@ Any errors generated must be handled by the error handler.
 For each protocol error received by Xlib,
 .B XSync
 calls the client application's error handling routine (see section 11.8.2).
-Any events generated by the server are enqueued into the library's 
+Any events generated by the server are enqueued into the library's
 event queue.
 .LP
-Finally, if you passed 
+Finally, if you passed
 .BR False ,
 .B XSync
 does not discard the events in the queue.
-If you passed 
+If you passed
 .BR True ,
 .B XSync
 discards all events in the queue,
@@ -113,34 +113,34 @@ was called.
 Client applications seldom need to call
 .BR XSync .
 .LP
-If mode is 
+If mode is
 .BR QueuedAlready ,
 .B XEventsQueued
 returns the number of events
 already in the event queue (and never performs a system call).
-If mode is 
+If mode is
 .BR QueuedAfterFlush ,
 .B XEventsQueued
 returns the number of events already in the queue if the number is nonzero.
-If there are no events in the queue, 
+If there are no events in the queue,
 .B XEventsQueued
-flushes the output buffer, 
+flushes the output buffer,
 attempts to read more events out of the application's connection,
 and returns the number read.
-If mode is 
+If mode is
 .BR QueuedAfterReading ,
 .B XEventsQueued
-returns the number of events already in the queue if the number is nonzero. 
-If there are no events in the queue, 
+returns the number of events already in the queue if the number is nonzero.
+If there are no events in the queue,
 .B XEventsQueued
-attempts to read more events out of the application's connection 
+attempts to read more events out of the application's connection
 without flushing the output buffer and returns the number read.
 .LP
 .B XEventsQueued
 always returns immediately without I/O if there are events already in the
 queue.
 .B XEventsQueued
-with mode 
+with mode
 .B QueuedAfterFlush
 is identical in behavior to
 .BR XPending .
diff --git a/man/XFocusChangeEvent.man b/man/XFocusChangeEvent.man
index 7f5f09f3..68b759f4 100644
--- a/man/XFocusChangeEvent.man
+++ b/man/XFocusChangeEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -65,9 +65,9 @@ typedef struct {
         int mode;       /\&* NotifyNormal, NotifyGrab, NotifyUngrab */
         int detail;
                 /\&*
-                * NotifyAncestor, NotifyVirtual, NotifyInferior, 
+                * NotifyAncestor, NotifyVirtual, NotifyInferior,
                 * NotifyNonlinear,NotifyNonlinearVirtual, NotifyPointer,
-                * NotifyPointerRoot, NotifyDetailNone 
+                * NotifyPointerRoot, NotifyDetailNone
                 */
 } XFocusChangeEvent;
 typedef XFocusChangeEvent XFocusInEvent;
@@ -101,27 +101,27 @@ The window member is set to the window on which the
 or
 .B FocusOut
 event was generated.
-This is the window used by the X server to report the event. 
-The mode member is set to indicate whether the focus events 
-are normal focus events, 
+This is the window used by the X server to report the event.
+The mode member is set to indicate whether the focus events
+are normal focus events,
 focus events while grabbed,
 focus events
 when a grab activates, or focus events when a grab deactivates.
-The X server can set the mode member to 
+The X server can set the mode member to
 .BR NotifyNormal ,
 .BR NotifyWhileGrabbed ,
 .BR NotifyGrab ,
 or
 .BR NotifyUngrab .
 .LP
-All 
+All
 .B FocusOut
 events caused by a window unmap are generated after any
 .B UnmapNotify
-event; however, the X protocol does not constrain the ordering of 
+event; however, the X protocol does not constrain the ordering of
 .B FocusOut
 events with respect to
-generated 
+generated
 .BR EnterNotify ,
 .BR LeaveNotify ,
 .BR VisibilityNotify ,
diff --git a/man/XFontSetExtents.man b/man/XFontSetExtents.man
index 0f56ab4c..7d0b266d 100644
--- a/man/XFontSetExtents.man
+++ b/man/XFontSetExtents.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -60,33 +60,33 @@ typedef struct {
 } XFontSetExtents;
 .EE
 .LP
-The 
+The
 .B XRectangle
-structures used to return font set metrics are the usual Xlib screen-oriented 
+structures used to return font set metrics are the usual Xlib screen-oriented
 rectangles
 with x, y giving the upper left corner, and width and height always positive.
 .LP
 The max_ink_extent member gives the maximum extent, over all drawable characters, of
 the rectangles that bound the character glyph image drawn in the
 foreground color, relative to a constant origin.
-See 
+See
 .B XmbTextExtents
 and
 .B XwcTextExtents
 for detailed semantics.
 .LP
 The max_logical_extent member gives the maximum extent,
-over all drawable characters, of the rectangles 
+over all drawable characters, of the rectangles
 that specify minimum spacing to other graphical features,
 relative to a constant origin.
 Other graphical features drawn by the client, for example,
 a border surrounding the text, should not intersect this rectangle.
-The max_logical_extent member should be used to compute minimum 
+The max_logical_extent member should be used to compute minimum
 interline spacing and the minimum area that must be allowed
 in a text field to draw a given number of arbitrary characters.
 .LP
 Due to context-dependent rendering,
-appending a given character to a string may change 
+appending a given character to a string may change
 the string's extent by an amount other than that character's
 individual extent.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
diff --git a/man/XFontsOfFontSet.man b/man/XFontsOfFontSet.man
index 12d14573..a0b1a565 100644
--- a/man/XFontsOfFontSet.man
+++ b/man/XFontsOfFontSet.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,17 +51,17 @@ XFontsOfFontSet, XBaseFontNameListOfFontSet, XLocaleOfFontSet, XContextDependent
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XFontsOfFontSet\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^, XFontStruct
-***\fIfont_struct_list_return\fP\^, char ***\fIfont_name_list_return\fP\^); 
+***\fIfont_struct_list_return\fP\^, char ***\fIfont_name_list_return\fP\^);
 .HP
-char *XBaseFontNameListOfFontSet\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^); 
+char *XBaseFontNameListOfFontSet\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^);
 .HP
-char *XLocaleOfFontSet\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^); 
+char *XLocaleOfFontSet\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^);
 .HP
-Bool XContextDependentDrawing\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^); 
+Bool XContextDependentDrawing\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^);
 .HP
-Bool XContextualDrawing\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^); 
+Bool XContextualDrawing\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^);
 .HP
-Bool XDirectionalDependentDrawing\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^); 
+Bool XDirectionalDependentDrawing\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIfont_set\fP 1i
 Specifies the font set.
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Returns the list of font structs.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B XFontsOfFontSet
-function returns a list of one or more 
+function returns a list of one or more
 .B XFontStructs
 and font names for the fonts used by the Xmb and Xwc layers
 for the given font set.
@@ -88,30 +88,30 @@ structures and font names is returned as the value of the function.
 .LP
 Because it is not guaranteed that a given character will be imaged using a
 single font glyph,
-there is no provision for mapping a character or default string 
-to the font properties, font ID, or direction hint for the font 
+there is no provision for mapping a character or default string
+to the font properties, font ID, or direction hint for the font
 for the character.
-The client may access the 
+The client may access the
 .B XFontStruct
 list to obtain these values for all the fonts currently in use.
 .LP
 Xlib does not guarantee that fonts are loaded from the server
-at the creation of an 
+at the creation of an
 .BR XFontSet .
-Xlib may choose to cache font data, loading it only as needed to draw text 
+Xlib may choose to cache font data, loading it only as needed to draw text
 or compute text dimensions.
-Therefore, existence of the per_char metrics in the 
+Therefore, existence of the per_char metrics in the
 .B XFontStruct
 structures in the
 .B XFontStructSet
 is undefined.
-Also, note that all properties in the 
+Also, note that all properties in the
 .B XFontStruct
 structures are in the STRING encoding.
 .LP
-The 
+The
 .B XFontStruct
-and font name lists are owned by Xlib 
+and font name lists are owned by Xlib
 and should not be modified or freed by the client.
 They will be freed by a call to
 .B XFreeFontSet
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Until freed, their contents will not be modified by Xlib.
 The
 .B XBaseFontNameListOfFontSet
 function returns the original base font name list supplied
-by the client when the 
+by the client when the
 .B XFontSet
 was created.
 A null-terminated string containing a list of
@@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ comma-separated font names is returned
 as the value of the function.
 White space may appear immediately on either side of separating commas.
 .LP
-If 
+If
 .B XCreateFontSet
 obtained an XLFD name from the font properties for the font specified
 by a non-XLFD base name, the
@@ -139,9 +139,9 @@ function will return the XLFD name instead of the non-XLFD base name.
 .LP
 The base font name list is owned by Xlib and should not be modified or
 freed by the client.
-It will be freed by a call to 
+It will be freed by a call to
 .B XFreeFontSet
-with the associated 
+with the associated
 .BR XFontSet .
 Until freed, its contents will not be modified by Xlib.
 .LP
@@ -156,7 +156,7 @@ The returned locale name string is owned by Xlib
 and should not be modified or freed by the client.
 It may be freed by a call to
 .B XFreeFontSet
-with the associated 
+with the associated
 .BR XFontSet .
 Until freed, it will not be modified by Xlib.
 .LP
diff --git a/man/XFree.man b/man/XFree.man
index 88abaa12..02326b66 100644
--- a/man/XFree.man
+++ b/man/XFree.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -49,7 +49,7 @@
 .SH NAME
 XFree \- free client data
 .SH SYNTAX
-int XFree\^(\^void *\fIdata\fP\^); 
+int XFree\^(\^void *\fIdata\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdata\fP 1i
 Specifies the data that are to be freed.
diff --git a/man/XGetVisualInfo.man b/man/XGetVisualInfo.man
index e5b0d325..3cc20a7a 100644
--- a/man/XGetVisualInfo.man
+++ b/man/XGetVisualInfo.man
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -54,12 +54,12 @@ XGetVisualInfo, XMatchVisualInfo, XVisualIDFromVisual, XVisualInfo \- obtain vis
 .HP
 XVisualInfo *XGetVisualInfo\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, long
 \fIvinfo_mask\fP\^, XVisualInfo *\fIvinfo_template\fP\^, int
-*\fInitems_return\fP\^); 
+*\fInitems_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XMatchVisualInfo\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fIscreen\fP\^, int
-\fIdepth\fP\^, int \fIclass\fP\^, XVisualInfo *\fIvinfo_return\fP\^); 
+\fIdepth\fP\^, int \fIclass\fP\^, XVisualInfo *\fIvinfo_return\fP\^);
 .HP
-VisualID XVisualIDFromVisual\^(\^Visual *\^\fIvisual\fP\^); 
+VisualID XVisualIDFromVisual\^(\^Visual *\^\fIvisual\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIclass\fP 1i
 Specifies the class of the screen.
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ structures.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B XGetVisualInfo
-function returns a list of visual structures that have attributes 
+function returns a list of visual structures that have attributes
 equal to the attributes specified by vinfo_template.
 If no visual structures match the template using the specified vinfo_mask,
 .B XGetVisualInfo
diff --git a/man/XGetWindowAttributes.man b/man/XGetWindowAttributes.man
index 42853d1c..7b9a36bf 100644
--- a/man/XGetWindowAttributes.man
+++ b/man/XGetWindowAttributes.man
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -53,24 +53,24 @@ XGetWindowAttributes, XGetGeometry, XWindowAttributes \- get current window attr
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 Status XGetWindowAttributes\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
-XWindowAttributes *\fIwindow_attributes_return\fP\^); 
+XWindowAttributes *\fIwindow_attributes_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XGetGeometry\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, Window
 *\fIroot_return\fP\^, int *\fIx_return\fP\^, int *\fIy_return\fP\^, unsigned
 int *\fIwidth_return\fP\^, unsigned int *\fIheight_return\fP\^, unsigned int
-*\fIborder_width_return\fP\^, unsigned int *\fIdepth_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIborder_width_return\fP\^, unsigned int *\fIdepth_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIborder_width_return\fP 1i
-Returns the border width in pixels. 
+Returns the border width in pixels.
 .IP \fId\fP 1i
-Specifies the drawable, which can be a window or a pixmap. 
+Specifies the drawable, which can be a window or a pixmap.
 .IP \fIdepth_return\fP 1i
 Returns the depth of the drawable (bits per pixel for the object).
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIroot_return\fP 1i
 Returns the root window.
-.ds Wi 
+.ds Wi
 .IP \fIw\fP 1i
 Specifies the window whose current attributes you want to obtain.
 .IP \fIwidth_return\fP 1i
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ structure.
 .ns
 .IP \fIy_return\fP 1i
 Return the x and y coordinates that define the location of the drawable.
-For a window, 
+For a window,
 these coordinates specify the upper-left outer corner relative to
 its parent's origin.
 For pixmaps, these coordinates are always zero.
@@ -149,10 +149,10 @@ typedef struct {
 .LP
 The x and y members are set to the upper-left outer
 corner relative to the parent window's origin.
-The width and height members are set to the inside size of the window, 
+The width and height members are set to the inside size of the window,
 not including the border.
 The border_width member is set to the window's border width in pixels.
-The depth member is set to the depth of the window 
+The depth member is set to the depth of the window
 (that is, bits per pixel for the object).
 The visual member is a pointer to the screen's associated
 .B Visual
@@ -233,27 +233,27 @@ For additional information on gravity,
 see section 3.3.
 .LP
 The backing_store member is set to indicate how the X server should maintain
-the contents of a window 
-and can be 
+the contents of a window
+and can be
 .BR WhenMapped ,
 .BR Always ,
 or
 .BR NotUseful .
-The backing_planes member is set to indicate (with bits set to 1) which bit 
-planes of the window hold dynamic data that must be preserved in backing_stores 
+The backing_planes member is set to indicate (with bits set to 1) which bit
+planes of the window hold dynamic data that must be preserved in backing_stores
 and during save_unders.
-The backing_pixel member is set to indicate what values to use 
+The backing_pixel member is set to indicate what values to use
 for planes not set in backing_planes.
 .LP
-The save_under member is set to 
+The save_under member is set to
 .B True
 or
 .BR False .
 The colormap member is set to the colormap for the specified window and can be
-a colormap ID or 
+a colormap ID or
 .BR None .
-The map_installed member is set to indicate whether the colormap is 
-currently installed and can be 
+The map_installed member is set to indicate whether the colormap is
+currently installed and can be
 .B True
 or
 .BR False .
@@ -265,22 +265,22 @@ or
 .B IsUnviewable
 is used if the window is mapped but some ancestor is unmapped.
 .LP
-The all_event_masks member is set to the bitwise inclusive OR of all event 
+The all_event_masks member is set to the bitwise inclusive OR of all event
 masks selected on the window by all clients.
-The your_event_mask member is set to the bitwise inclusive OR of all event 
+The your_event_mask member is set to the bitwise inclusive OR of all event
 masks selected by the querying client.
-The do_not_propagate_mask member is set to the bitwise inclusive OR of the 
+The do_not_propagate_mask member is set to the bitwise inclusive OR of the
 set of events that should not propagate.
 .LP
 The override_redirect member is set to indicate whether this window overrides
-structure control facilities and can be 
+structure control facilities and can be
 .B True
 or
 .BR False .
 Window manager clients should ignore the window if this member is
 .BR True .
 .LP
-The screen member is set to a screen pointer that gives you a back pointer 
+The screen member is set to a screen pointer that gives you a back pointer
 to the correct screen.
 This makes it easier to obtain the screen information without
 having to loop over the root window fields to see which field matches.
diff --git a/man/XGetWindowProperty.man b/man/XGetWindowProperty.man
index fdfeab6b..be05d428 100644
--- a/man/XGetWindowProperty.man
+++ b/man/XGetWindowProperty.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -54,27 +54,27 @@ int XGetWindowProperty\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, Atom
 \fIproperty\fP\^, long \fIlong_offset\fP\^, long \fIlong_length\fP\^, Bool
 \fIdelete\fP\^, Atom \fIreq_type\fP\^, Atom *\fIactual_type_return\fP\^, int
 *\fIactual_format_return\fP\^, unsigned long *\fInitems_return\fP\^, unsigned
-long *\fIbytes_after_return\fP\^, unsigned char **\fIprop_return\fP\^); 
+long *\fIbytes_after_return\fP\^, unsigned char **\fIprop_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Atom *XListProperties\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, int
-*\fInum_prop_return\fP\^); 
+*\fInum_prop_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XChangeProperty\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, Atom
 \fIproperty\fP\^, Atom \fItype\fP\^, int \fIformat\fP\^, int \fImode\fP\^,
-unsigned char *\fIdata\fP\^, int \fInelements\fP\^); 
+unsigned char *\fIdata\fP\^, int \fInelements\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XRotateWindowProperties\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
-Atom \fIproperties\fP\^[]\^, int \fInum_prop\fP\^, int \fInpositions\fP\^); 
+Atom \fIproperties\fP\^[]\^, int \fInum_prop\fP\^, int \fInpositions\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XDeleteProperty\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, Atom
-\fIproperty\fP\^); 
+\fIproperty\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIactual_format_return\fP 1i
 Returns the actual format of the property.
 .IP \fIactual_type_return\fP 1i
 Returns the atom identifier  that defines the actual type of the property.
 .IP \fIbytes_after_return\fP 1i
-Returns the number of bytes remaining to be read in the property if 
+Returns the number of bytes remaining to be read in the property if
 a partial read was performed.
 .IP \fIdata\fP 1i
 Specifies the property data.
@@ -90,12 +90,12 @@ This information allows the X server to correctly perform
 byte-swap operations as necessary.
 If the format is 16-bit or 32-bit,
 you must explicitly cast your data pointer to an (unsigned char *) in the call
-to 
+to
 .BR XChangeProperty .
 .IP \fIlong_length\fP 1i
 Specifies the length in 32-bit multiples of the data to be retrieved.
 .IP \fIlong_offset\fP 1i
-Specifies the offset in the specified property (in 32-bit quantities) 
+Specifies the offset in the specified property (in 32-bit quantities)
 where the data is to be retrieved.
 .\" Changed name of this file to prop_mode.a on 1/13/87
 .IP \fImode\fP 1i
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ or
 .IP \fInelements\fP 1i
 Specifies the number of elements of the specified data format.
 .IP \fInitems_return\fP 1i
-Returns the actual number of 8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit items 
+Returns the actual number of 8-bit, 16-bit, or 32-bit items
 stored in the prop_return data.
 .IP \fInum_prop\fP 1i
 Specifies the length of the properties array.
@@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Specifies the atom identifier associated with the property type or
 .IP \fItype\fP 1i
 Specifies the type of the property.
 The X server does not interpret the type but simply
-passes it back to an application that later calls 
+passes it back to an application that later calls
 .BR XGetWindowProperty .
 .IP \fIw\fP 1i
 Specifies the window whose property you want to obtain, change, rotate or delete.
@@ -149,31 +149,31 @@ sets the return arguments as follows:
 .IP \(bu 5
 If the specified property does not exist for the specified window,
 .B XGetWindowProperty
-returns 
+returns
 .B None
-to actual_type_return and the value zero to 
+to actual_type_return and the value zero to
 actual_format_return and bytes_after_return.
 The nitems_return argument is empty.
 In this case, the delete argument is ignored.
 .IP \(bu 5
-If the specified property exists 
+If the specified property exists
 but its type does not match the specified type,
 .B XGetWindowProperty
-returns the actual property type to actual_type_return, 
-the actual property format (never zero) to actual_format_return, 
+returns the actual property type to actual_type_return,
+the actual property format (never zero) to actual_format_return,
 and the property length in bytes
-(even if the actual_format_return is 16 or 32) 
+(even if the actual_format_return is 16 or 32)
 to bytes_after_return.
 It also ignores the delete argument.
 The nitems_return argument is empty.
 .IP \(bu 5
-If the specified property exists and either you assign 
+If the specified property exists and either you assign
 .B AnyPropertyType
 to the req_type argument or the specified type matches the actual property type,
 .B XGetWindowProperty
 returns the actual property type to actual_type_return and the actual
-property format (never zero) to actual_format_return. 
-It also returns a value to bytes_after_return and nitems_return, by 
+property format (never zero) to actual_format_return.
+It also returns a value to bytes_after_return and nitems_return, by
 defining the following
 values:
 .IP
@@ -191,8 +191,8 @@ from zero), and its length in bytes is L.
 If the value for long_offset causes L to be negative,
 a
 .B BadValue
-error results. 
-The value of bytes_after_return is A, 
+error results.
+The value of bytes_after_return is A,
 giving the number of trailing unread bytes in the stored property.
 .LP
 If the returned format is 8, the returned data is represented as a
@@ -206,17 +206,17 @@ If the returned format is 32, the returned data is represented as a
 array and should be cast to that type to obtain the elements.
 .LP
 .B XGetWindowProperty
-always allocates one extra byte in prop_return 
-(even if the property is zero length) 
+always allocates one extra byte in prop_return
+(even if the property is zero length)
 and sets it to zero so that simple properties consisting of characters
 do not have to be copied into yet another string before use.
 .LP
-If delete is 
+If delete is
 .B True
-and bytes_after_return is zero, 
+and bytes_after_return is zero,
 .B XGetWindowProperty
-deletes the property 
-from the window and generates a 
+deletes the property
+from the window and generates a
 .B PropertyNotify
 event on the window.
 .LP
@@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ errors.
 .LP
 The
 .B XListProperties
-function returns a pointer to an array of atom properties that are defined for 
+function returns a pointer to an array of atom properties that are defined for
 the specified window or returns NULL if no properties were found.
 To free the memory allocated by this function, use
 .BR XFree .
@@ -272,7 +272,7 @@ The type and format must match the existing property value,
 or a
 .B BadMatch
 error results.
-If the property is undefined, 
+If the property is undefined,
 it is treated as defined with the correct type and
 format with zero-length data.
 .LP
@@ -290,7 +290,7 @@ The lifetime of a property is not tied to the storing client.
 Properties remain until explicitly deleted, until the window is destroyed,
 or until the server resets.
 For a discussion of what happens when the connection to the X server is closed,
-see section 2.6. 
+see section 2.6.
 The maximum size of a property is server dependent and can vary dynamically
 depending on the amount of memory the server has available.
 (If there is insufficient space, a
@@ -313,25 +313,25 @@ function allows you to rotate properties on a window and causes
 the X server to generate
 .B PropertyNotify
 events.
-If the property names in the properties array are viewed as being numbered 
+If the property names in the properties array are viewed as being numbered
 starting from zero and if there are num_prop property names in the list,
-then the value associated with property name I becomes the value associated 
+then the value associated with property name I becomes the value associated
 with property name (I + npositions) mod N for all I from zero to N \- 1.
 The effect is to rotate the states by npositions places around the virtual ring
-of property names (right for positive npositions, 
+of property names (right for positive npositions,
 left for negative npositions).
 If npositions mod N is nonzero,
 the X server generates a
 .B PropertyNotify
 event for each property in the order that they are listed in the array.
-If an atom occurs more than once in the list or no property with that 
+If an atom occurs more than once in the list or no property with that
 name is defined for the window,
-a 
+a
 .B BadMatch
 error results.
-If a 
+If a
 .B BadAtom
-or 
+or
 .B BadMatch
 error results,
 no properties are changed.
diff --git a/man/XGetXCBConnection.man b/man/XGetXCBConnection.man
index 7488b6ee..940030bc 100644
--- a/man/XGetXCBConnection.man
+++ b/man/XGetXCBConnection.man
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ XGetXCBConnection \- get the XCB connection for an Xlib Display
 .HP
  #include <X11/Xlib-xcb.h>
 .HP
-xcb_connection_t *XGetXCBConnection(Display *\fIdpy\fP); 
+xcb_connection_t *XGetXCBConnection(Display *\fIdpy\fP);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdpy\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
diff --git a/man/XGrabButton.man b/man/XGrabButton.man
index 3d55fc8e..65260d2e 100644
--- a/man/XGrabButton.man
+++ b/man/XGrabButton.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -49,15 +49,15 @@
 .SH NAME
 XGrabButton, XUngrabButton \- grab pointer buttons
 .SH SYNTAX
-.HP 
+.HP
 int XGrabButton\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, unsigned int \fIbutton\fP\^,
 unsigned int \fImodifiers\fP\^, Window \fIgrab_window\fP\^, Bool
 \fIowner_events\fP\^, unsigned int \fIevent_mask\fP\^, int
 \fIpointer_mode\fP\^, \fIkeyboard_mode\fP\^, Window \fIconfine_to\fP\^, Cursor
-\fIcursor\fP\^); 
+\fIcursor\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XUngrabButton\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, unsigned int \fIbutton\fP\^,
-unsigned int \fImodifiers\fP\^, Window \fIgrab_window\fP\^); 
+unsigned int \fImodifiers\fP\^, Window \fIgrab_window\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIbutton\fP 1i
 Specifies the pointer button that is to be grabbed or released or
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ The mask is the bitwise inclusive OR of the valid pointer event mask bits.
 Specifies the grab window.
 .IP \fIkeyboard_mode\fP 1i
 Specifies further processing of keyboard events.
-You can pass 
+You can pass
 .B GrabModeSync
 or
 .BR GrabModeAsync .
@@ -86,12 +86,12 @@ Specifies the set of keymasks or
 .BR AnyModifier .
 The mask is the bitwise inclusive OR of the valid keymask bits.
 .IP \fIowner_events\fP 1i
-Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the pointer 
-events are to be reported as usual or reported with respect to the grab window 
+Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the pointer
+events are to be reported as usual or reported with respect to the grab window
 if selected by the event mask.
 .IP \fIpointer_mode\fP 1i
 Specifies further processing of pointer events.
-You can pass 
+You can pass
 .B GrabModeSync
 or
 .BR GrabModeAsync .
@@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ The interpretation of the remaining arguments is as for
 The active grab is terminated automatically when the logical state of the
 pointer has all buttons released
 (independent of the state of the logical modifier keys),
-at which point a 
+at which point a
 .B ButtonRelease
 event is reported to the grabbing window.
 .LP
@@ -134,27 +134,27 @@ may lag the physical state if device event processing is frozen.
 .LP
 This request overrides all previous grabs by the same client on the same
 button/key combinations on the same window.
-A modifiers of 
+A modifiers of
 .B AnyModifier
 is equivalent to issuing the grab request for all
-possible modifier combinations (including the combination of no modifiers).  
-It is not required that all modifiers specified have currently assigned 
+possible modifier combinations (including the combination of no modifiers).
+It is not required that all modifiers specified have currently assigned
 KeyCodes.
-A button of 
+A button of
 .B AnyButton
 is equivalent to
 issuing the request for all possible buttons.
 Otherwise, it is not required that the specified button currently be assigned
 to a physical button.
 .LP
-If some other client has already issued a 
+If some other client has already issued a
 .B XGrabButton
 with the same button/key combination on the same window, a
 .B BadAccess
 error results.
-When using 
+When using
 .B AnyModifier
-or 
+or
 .BR AnyButton ,
 the request fails completely,
 and a
@@ -176,13 +176,13 @@ The
 .B XUngrabButton
 function releases the passive button/key combination on the specified window if
 it was grabbed by this client.
-A modifiers of 
+A modifiers of
 .B AnyModifier
 is
-equivalent to issuing 
-the ungrab request for all possible modifier combinations, including 
+equivalent to issuing
+the ungrab request for all possible modifier combinations, including
 the combination of no modifiers.
-A button of 
+A button of
 .B AnyButton
 is equivalent to issuing the
 request for all possible buttons.
diff --git a/man/XGrabKey.man b/man/XGrabKey.man
index 00c400e6..3ba990f9 100644
--- a/man/XGrabKey.man
+++ b/man/XGrabKey.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -52,10 +52,10 @@ XGrabKey, XUngrabKey \- grab keyboard keys
 .HP
 int XGrabKey\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fIkeycode\fP\^, unsigned int
 \fImodifiers\fP\^, Window \fIgrab_window\fP\^, Bool \fIowner_events\fP\^, int
-\fIpointer_mode\fP\^, int \fIkeyboard_mode\fP\^); 
+\fIpointer_mode\fP\^, int \fIkeyboard_mode\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XUngrabKey\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fIkeycode\fP\^, unsigned int
-\fImodifiers\fP\^, Window \fIgrab_window\fP\^); 
+\fImodifiers\fP\^, Window \fIgrab_window\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ Specifies the connection to the X server.
 Specifies the grab window.
 .IP \fIkeyboard_mode\fP 1i
 Specifies further processing of keyboard events.
-You can pass 
+You can pass
 .B GrabModeSync
 or
 .BR GrabModeAsync .
@@ -75,11 +75,11 @@ Specifies the set of keymasks or
 .BR AnyModifier .
 The mask is the bitwise inclusive OR of the valid keymask bits.
 .IP \fIowner_events\fP 1i
-Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the keyboard events 
+Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the keyboard events
 are to be reported as usual.
 .IP \fIpointer_mode\fP 1i
 Specifies further processing of pointer events.
-You can pass 
+You can pass
 .B GrabModeSync
 or
 .BR GrabModeAsync .
@@ -108,49 +108,49 @@ or the grab_window is a descendant of the focus window and contains the pointer.
 A passive grab on the same key combination does not exist
 on any ancestor of grab_window.
 .LP
-The interpretation of the remaining arguments is as for 
+The interpretation of the remaining arguments is as for
 .BR XGrabKeyboard .
 The active grab is terminated automatically when the logical state of the
 keyboard has the specified key released
 (independent of the logical state of the modifier keys),
-at which point a 
+at which point a
 .B KeyRelease
 event is reported to the grabbing window.
 .LP
 Note that the logical state of a device (as seen by client applications)
 may lag the physical state if device event processing is frozen.
 .LP
-A modifiers argument of 
+A modifiers argument of
 .B AnyModifier
 is equivalent to issuing the request for all
 possible modifier combinations (including the combination of no
-modifiers).  
+modifiers).
 It is not required that all modifiers specified have
 currently assigned KeyCodes.
-A keycode argument of 
+A keycode argument of
 .B AnyKey
 is equivalent to issuing
 the request for all possible KeyCodes.
 Otherwise, the specified keycode must be in
 the range specified by min_keycode and max_keycode in the connection
-setup, 
+setup,
 or a
 .B BadValue
 error results.
 .LP
-If some other client has issued a 
+If some other client has issued a
 .B XGrabKey
-with the same key combination on the same window, a 
+with the same key combination on the same window, a
 .B BadAccess
 error results.
 When using
 .B AnyModifier
-or 
+or
 .BR AnyKey ,
 the request fails completely,
 and a
 .B BadAccess
-error results (no grabs are established) 
+error results (no grabs are established)
 if there is a conflicting grab for any combination.
 .LP
 .B XGrabKey
diff --git a/man/XGrabKeyboard.man b/man/XGrabKeyboard.man
index c001341c..13e2f26a 100644
--- a/man/XGrabKeyboard.man
+++ b/man/XGrabKeyboard.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -52,9 +52,9 @@ XGrabKeyboard, XUngrabKeyboard \- grab the keyboard
 .HP
 int XGrabKeyboard\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIgrab_window\fP\^,
 Bool \fIowner_events\fP\^, int \fIpointer_mode\fP\^, int
-\fIkeyboard_mode\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^); 
+\fIkeyboard_mode\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XUngrabKeyboard\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^); 
+int XUngrabKeyboard\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -62,16 +62,16 @@ Specifies the connection to the X server.
 Specifies the grab window.
 .IP \fIkeyboard_mode\fP 1i
 Specifies further processing of keyboard events.
-You can pass 
+You can pass
 .B GrabModeSync
 or
 .BR GrabModeAsync .
 .IP \fIowner_events\fP 1i
-Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the keyboard events 
+Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the keyboard events
 are to be reported as usual.
 .IP \fIpointer_mode\fP 1i
 Specifies further processing of pointer events.
-You can pass 
+You can pass
 .B GrabModeSync
 or
 .BR GrabModeAsync .
@@ -91,51 +91,51 @@ Further key events are reported only to the
 grabbing client.
 .B XGrabKeyboard
 overrides any active keyboard grab by this client.
-If owner_events is 
+If owner_events is
 .BR False ,
 all generated key events are reported with
-respect to grab_window.  
-If owner_events is 
+respect to grab_window.
+If owner_events is
 .B True
 and if a generated
 key event would normally be reported to this client, it is reported
 normally; otherwise, the event is reported with respect to the
-grab_window.  
-Both 
+grab_window.
+Both
 .B KeyPress
-and 
+and
 .B KeyRelease
 events are always reported,
 independent of any event selection made by the client.
 .LP
-If the keyboard_mode argument is 
+If the keyboard_mode argument is
 .BR GrabModeAsync ,
 keyboard event processing continues
-as usual. 
-If the keyboard is currently frozen by this client, 
+as usual.
+If the keyboard is currently frozen by this client,
 then processing of keyboard events is resumed.
 If the keyboard_mode  argument is
 .BR GrabModeSync ,
 the state of the keyboard (as seen by client applications) appears to freeze,
 and the X server generates no further keyboard events until the
-grabbing client issues a releasing 
+grabbing client issues a releasing
 .B XAllowEvents
 call or until the keyboard grab is released.
-Actual keyboard changes are not lost while the keyboard is frozen; 
+Actual keyboard changes are not lost while the keyboard is frozen;
 they are simply queued in the server for later processing.
 .LP
-If pointer_mode is 
+If pointer_mode is
 .BR GrabModeAsync ,
 pointer event processing is unaffected
-by activation of the grab.  
-If pointer_mode is 
+by activation of the grab.
+If pointer_mode is
 .BR GrabModeSync ,
-the state of the pointer (as seen by client applications) appears to freeze, 
-and the X server generates no further pointer events 
-until the grabbing client issues a releasing 
+the state of the pointer (as seen by client applications) appears to freeze,
+and the X server generates no further pointer events
+until the grabbing client issues a releasing
 .B XAllowEvents
 call or until the keyboard grab is released.
-Actual pointer changes are not lost while the pointer is frozen; 
+Actual pointer changes are not lost while the pointer is frozen;
 they are simply queued in the server for later processing.
 .LP
 If the keyboard is actively grabbed by some other client,
@@ -148,12 +148,12 @@ it fails and returns
 If the keyboard is frozen by an active grab of another client,
 it fails and returns
 .BR GrabFrozen .
-If the specified time is earlier than the last-keyboard-grab time 
+If the specified time is earlier than the last-keyboard-grab time
 or later than the current X server time,
 it fails and returns
 .BR GrabInvalidTime .
 Otherwise, the last-keyboard-grab time is set to the specified time
-.Pn ( CurrentTime 
+.Pn ( CurrentTime
 is replaced by the current X server time).
 .LP
 .B XGrabKeyboard
@@ -177,10 +177,10 @@ if the specified time is earlier than
 the last-keyboard-grab time or is later than the current X server time.
 It also generates
 .B FocusIn
-and 
+and
 .B FocusOut
 events.
-The X server automatically performs an 
+The X server automatically performs an
 .B UngrabKeyboard
 request if the event window for an
 active keyboard grab becomes not viewable.
diff --git a/man/XGrabPointer.man b/man/XGrabPointer.man
index 781a143f..f72aebab 100644
--- a/man/XGrabPointer.man
+++ b/man/XGrabPointer.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -53,12 +53,12 @@ XGrabPointer, XUngrabPointer, XChangeActivePointerGrab \- grab the pointer
 int XGrabPointer\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIgrab_window\fP\^,
 Bool \fIowner_events\fP\^, unsigned int \fIevent_mask\fP\^, int
 \fIpointer_mode\fP\^, int \fIkeyboard_mode\fP\^, Window \fIconfine_to\fP\^,
-Cursor \fIcursor\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^); 
+Cursor \fIcursor\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XUngrabPointer\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^); 
+int XUngrabPointer\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XChangeActivePointerGrab\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, unsigned int
-\fIevent_mask\fP\^, Cursor \fIcursor\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^); 
+\fIevent_mask\fP\^, Cursor \fIcursor\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIconfine_to\fP 1i
 Specifies the window to confine the pointer in or
@@ -75,17 +75,17 @@ The mask is the bitwise inclusive OR of the valid pointer event mask bits.
 Specifies the grab window.
 .IP \fIkeyboard_mode\fP 1i
 Specifies further processing of keyboard events.
-You can pass 
+You can pass
 .B GrabModeSync
 or
 .BR GrabModeAsync .
 .IP \fIowner_events\fP 1i
-Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the pointer 
-events are to be reported as usual or reported with respect to the grab window 
+Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether the pointer
+events are to be reported as usual or reported with respect to the grab window
 if selected by the event mask.
 .IP \fIpointer_mode\fP 1i
 Specifies further processing of pointer events.
-You can pass 
+You can pass
 .B GrabModeSync
 or
 .BR GrabModeAsync .
@@ -102,53 +102,53 @@ if the grab was successful.
 Further pointer events are reported only to the grabbing client.
 .B XGrabPointer
 overrides any active pointer grab by this client.
-If owner_events is 
+If owner_events is
 .BR False ,
 all generated pointer events
 are reported with respect to grab_window and are reported only if
 selected by event_mask.
-If owner_events is 
+If owner_events is
 .B True
 and if a generated
-pointer event would normally be reported to this client, 
-it is reported as usual. 
+pointer event would normally be reported to this client,
+it is reported as usual.
 Otherwise, the event is reported with respect to the
 grab_window and is reported only if selected by event_mask.
 For either value of owner_events, unreported events are discarded.
 .LP
-If the pointer_mode is 
+If the pointer_mode is
 .BR GrabModeAsync ,
 pointer event processing continues as usual.
-If the pointer is currently frozen by this client, 
+If the pointer is currently frozen by this client,
 the processing of events for the pointer is resumed.
-If the pointer_mode is 
+If the pointer_mode is
 .BR GrabModeSync ,
 the state of the pointer, as seen by
 client applications,
 appears to freeze, and the X server generates no further pointer events
-until the grabbing client calls 
+until the grabbing client calls
 .B XAllowEvents
 or until the pointer grab is released.
 Actual pointer changes are not lost while the pointer is frozen;
 they are simply queued in the server for later processing.
 .LP
-If the keyboard_mode is 
+If the keyboard_mode is
 .BR GrabModeAsync ,
 keyboard event processing is unaffected by activation of the grab.
-If the keyboard_mode is 
+If the keyboard_mode is
 .BR GrabModeSync ,
 the state of the keyboard, as seen by
 client applications,
 appears to freeze, and the X server generates no further keyboard events
-until the grabbing client calls 
+until the grabbing client calls
 .B XAllowEvents
 or until the pointer grab is released.
 Actual keyboard changes are not lost while the pointer is frozen;
 they are simply queued in the server for later processing.
 .LP
 If a cursor is specified, it is displayed regardless of what
-window the pointer is in.  
-If 
+window the pointer is in.
+If
 .B None
 is specified,
 the normal cursor for that window is displayed
@@ -158,11 +158,11 @@ otherwise, the cursor for grab_window is displayed.
 If a confine_to window is specified,
 the pointer is restricted to stay contained in that window.
 The confine_to window need have no relationship to the grab_window.
-If the pointer is not initially in the confine_to window, 
-it is warped automatically to the closest edge 
-just before the grab activates and enter/leave events are generated as usual. 
-If the confine_to window is subsequently reconfigured, 
-the pointer is warped automatically, as necessary, 
+If the pointer is not initially in the confine_to window,
+it is warped automatically to the closest edge
+just before the grab activates and enter/leave events are generated as usual.
+If the confine_to window is subsequently reconfigured,
+the pointer is warped automatically, as necessary,
 to keep it contained in the window.
 .LP
 The time argument allows you to avoid certain circumstances that come up
@@ -170,10 +170,10 @@ if applications take a long time to respond or if there are long network
 delays.
 Consider a situation where you have two applications, both
 of which normally grab the pointer when clicked on.
-If both applications specify the timestamp from the event, 
+If both applications specify the timestamp from the event,
 the second application may wake up faster and successfully grab the pointer
-before the first application. 
-The first application then will get an indication that the other application 
+before the first application.
+The first application then will get an indication that the other application
 grabbed the pointer before its request was processed.
 .LP
 .B XGrabPointer
@@ -195,11 +195,11 @@ it fails and returns
 If the pointer is frozen by an active grab of another client,
 it fails and returns
 .BR GrabFrozen .
-If the specified time is earlier than the last-pointer-grab time or later 
+If the specified time is earlier than the last-pointer-grab time or later
 than the current X server time, it fails and returns
 .BR GrabInvalidTime .
 Otherwise, the last-pointer-grab time is set to the specified time
-.Pn ( CurrentTime 
+.Pn ( CurrentTime
 is replaced by the current X server time).
 .LP
 .B XGrabPointer
@@ -221,14 +221,14 @@ or from a normal button press.
 does not release the pointer if the specified
 time is earlier than the last-pointer-grab time or is later than the
 current X server time.
-It also generates 
+It also generates
 .B EnterNotify
-and 
+and
 .B LeaveNotify
 events.
-The X server performs an 
+The X server performs an
 .B UngrabPointer
-request automatically if the event window or confine_to window 
+request automatically if the event window or confine_to window
 for an active pointer grab becomes not viewable
 or if window reconfiguration causes the confine_to window to lie completely
 outside the boundaries of the root window.
diff --git a/man/XGrabServer.man b/man/XGrabServer.man
index 301a4bb3..549d83e4 100644
--- a/man/XGrabServer.man
+++ b/man/XGrabServer.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
 XGrabServer, XUngrabServer \- grab the server
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-int XGrabServer\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+int XGrabServer\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XUngrabServer\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B XGrabServer
-function disables processing of requests and close downs on all other 
+function disables processing of requests and close downs on all other
 connections than the one this request arrived on.
 You should not grab the X server any more than is absolutely necessary.
 .LP
diff --git a/man/XGraphicsExposeEvent.man b/man/XGraphicsExposeEvent.man
index b9fd1d97..6b2ef6c2 100644
--- a/man/XGraphicsExposeEvent.man
+++ b/man/XGraphicsExposeEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ The window member is set to the window that is most useful to toolkit
 dispatchers.
 .LP
 Both structures have these common members: drawable, major_code, and minor_code.
-The drawable member is set to the drawable of the destination region on 
+The drawable member is set to the drawable of the destination region on
 which the graphics request was to be performed.
 The major_code member is set to the graphics request initiated by the client
 and can be either
@@ -122,19 +122,19 @@ If it is
 a call to
 .B XCopyPlane
 initiated the request.
-These constants are defined in 
+These constants are defined in
 .hN X11/Xproto.h .
 The minor_code member,
-like the major_code member, 
+like the major_code member,
 indicates which graphics request was initiated by
-the client. 
+the client.
 However, the minor_code member is not defined by the core
-X protocol and will be zero in these cases, 
+X protocol and will be zero in these cases,
 although it may be used by an extension.
 .LP
-The 
+The
 .B XGraphicsExposeEvent
-structure has these additional members: x, y, width, height, and count. 
+structure has these additional members: x, y, width, height, and count.
 The x and y members are set to the coordinates relative to the drawable's origin
 and indicate the upper-left corner of the rectangle.
 The width and height members are set to the size (extent) of the rectangle.
diff --git a/man/XGravityEvent.man b/man/XGravityEvent.man
index d909527c..35110c90 100644
--- a/man/XGravityEvent.man
+++ b/man/XGravityEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -94,9 +94,9 @@ or
 .B SubstructureNotify
 was selected.
 The window member is set to the child window that was moved.
-The x and y members are set to the coordinates relative to the 
+The x and y members are set to the coordinates relative to the
 new parent window's origin
-and indicate the position of the upper-left outside corner of the 
+and indicate the position of the upper-left outside corner of the
 window.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 XAnyEvent(__libmansuffix__),
diff --git a/man/XIconifyWindow.man b/man/XIconifyWindow.man
index 8e717924..2a0adc44 100644
--- a/man/XIconifyWindow.man
+++ b/man/XIconifyWindow.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,14 +51,14 @@ XIconifyWindow, XWithdrawWindow, XReconfigureWMWindow \- manipulate top-level wi
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 Status XIconifyWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP, int
-\fIscreen_number\fP\^); 
+\fIscreen_number\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XWithdrawWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, int
-\fIscreen_number\fP\^); 
+\fIscreen_number\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XReconfigureWMWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
 int \fIscreen_number\fP\^, unsigned int \fIvalue_mask\fP\^, XWindowChanges
-*\fIvalues\fP); 
+*\fIvalues\fP);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -69,19 +69,19 @@ Specifies which values are to be set using information in
 the values structure.
 This mask is the bitwise inclusive OR of the valid configure window values bits.
 .IP \fIvalues\fP 1i
-Specifies the 
+Specifies the
 .B XWindowChanges
 structure.
 .IP \fIw\fP 1i
 Specifies the window.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .B XIconifyWindow
-function sends a WM_CHANGE_STATE 
+function sends a WM_CHANGE_STATE
 .B ClientMessage
-event with a format of 32 and a first data element of 
+event with a format of 32 and a first data element of
 .B IconicState
-(as described in section 4.1.4 of the 
+(as described in section 4.1.4 of the
 \fIInter-Client Communication Conventions Manual\fP)
 and a window of w
 to the root window of the specified screen
@@ -89,27 +89,27 @@ with an event mask set to
 .BR SubstructureNotifyMask |
 .BR SubstructureRedirectMask .
 Window managers may elect to receive this message and
-if the window is in its normal state, 
+if the window is in its normal state,
 may treat it as a request to change the window's state from normal to iconic.
-If the WM_CHANGE_STATE property cannot be interned, 
+If the WM_CHANGE_STATE property cannot be interned,
 .B XIconifyWindow
 does not send a message and returns a zero status.
 It returns a nonzero status if the client message is sent successfully;
 otherwise, it returns a zero status.
 .LP
-The 
+The
 .B XWithdrawWindow
-function unmaps the specified window 
-and sends a synthetic 
+function unmaps the specified window
+and sends a synthetic
 .B UnmapNotify
 event to the root window of the specified screen.
-Window managers may elect to receive this message 
+Window managers may elect to receive this message
 and may treat it as a request to change the window's state to withdrawn.
-When a window is in the withdrawn state, 
+When a window is in the withdrawn state,
 neither its normal nor its iconic representations is visible.
-It returns a nonzero status if the 
+It returns a nonzero status if the
 .B UnmapNotify
-event is successfully sent; 
+event is successfully sent;
 otherwise, it returns a zero status.
 .LP
 .B XWithdrawWindow
@@ -117,19 +117,19 @@ can generate a
 .B BadWindow
 error.
 .LP
-The 
+The
 .B XReconfigureWMWindow
-function issues a 
+function issues a
 .B ConfigureWindow
 request on the specified top-level window.
-If the stacking mode is changed and the request fails with a 
+If the stacking mode is changed and the request fails with a
 .B BadMatch
-error, 
-the error is trapped by Xlib and a synthetic 
+error,
+the error is trapped by Xlib and a synthetic
 .B ConfigureRequestEvent
-containing the same configuration parameters is sent to the root 
+containing the same configuration parameters is sent to the root
 of the specified window.
-Window managers may elect to receive this event 
+Window managers may elect to receive this event
 and treat it as a request to reconfigure the indicated window.
 It returns a nonzero status if the request or event is successfully sent;
 otherwise, it returns a zero status.
diff --git a/man/XIfEvent.man b/man/XIfEvent.man
index 9ec35a70..20a202c8 100644
--- a/man/XIfEvent.man
+++ b/man/XIfEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,13 +51,13 @@ XIfEvent, XCheckIfEvent, XPeekIfEvent \- check the event queue with a predicate
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XIfEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^, Bool
-(\^*\fIpredicate\fP\^)\^(\^)\^, XPointer \fIarg\fP\^); 
+(\^*\fIpredicate\fP\^)\^(\^)\^, XPointer \fIarg\fP\^);
 .HP
 Bool XCheckIfEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^,
-Bool (\^*\fIpredicate\fP\^)\^(\^)\^, XPointer \fIarg\fP\^); 
+Bool (\^*\fIpredicate\fP\^)\^(\^)\^, XPointer \fIarg\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XPeekIfEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^,
-Bool (\^*\fIpredicate\fP\^)\^(\^)\^, XPointer \fIarg\fP\^); 
+Bool (\^*\fIpredicate\fP\^)\^(\^)\^, XPointer \fIarg\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIarg\fP 1i
 Specifies the user-supplied argument that will be passed to the predicate procedure.
@@ -72,14 +72,14 @@ if the next event in the queue matches what you want.
 The
 .B XIfEvent
 function completes only when the specified predicate
-procedure returns 
+procedure returns
 .B True
-for an event, 
+for an event,
 which indicates an event in the queue matches.
 .B XIfEvent
 flushes the output buffer if it blocks waiting for additional events.
 .B XIfEvent
-removes the matching event from the queue 
+removes the matching event from the queue
 and copies the structure into the client-supplied
 .B XEvent
 structure.
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ When the predicate procedure finds a match,
 .B XCheckIfEvent
 copies the matched event into the client-supplied
 .B XEvent
-structure and returns 
+structure and returns
 .BR True .
 (This event is removed from the queue.)
 If the predicate procedure finds no match,
@@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ All earlier events stored in the queue are not discarded.
 The
 .B XPeekIfEvent
 function returns only when the specified predicate
-procedure returns 
+procedure returns
 .B True
 for an event.
 After the predicate procedure finds a match,
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ structure without removing the event from the queue.
 .B XPeekIfEvent
 flushes the output buffer if it blocks waiting for additional events.
 .LP
-Each of these functions requires you to pass a predicate procedure that 
+Each of these functions requires you to pass a predicate procedure that
 determines if an event matches what you want.
 Your predicate procedure must decide if the event is useful
 without calling any Xlib functions.
@@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ Specifies the
 .B XEvent
 structure.
 .IP \fIarg\fP 1i
-Specifies the argument passed in from the 
+Specifies the argument passed in from the
 .BR XIfEvent ,
 .BR XCheckIfEvent ,
 or
@@ -142,8 +142,8 @@ or
 function.
 .LP
 The predicate procedure is called once for each
-event in the queue until it finds a match. 
-After finding a match, the predicate procedure must return 
+event in the queue until it finds a match.
+After finding a match, the predicate procedure must return
 .BR True .
 If it did not find a match, it must return
 .BR False .
diff --git a/man/XInitImage.man b/man/XInitImage.man
index 922732ca..c624e26d 100644
--- a/man/XInitImage.man
+++ b/man/XInitImage.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,33 +50,33 @@
 XInitImage, XCreateImage, XGetPixel, XPutPixel, XSubImage, XAddPixel, XDestroyImage \- image utilities
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-Status XInitImage\^(\^XImage *\fIimage\fP\^); 
+Status XInitImage\^(\^XImage *\fIimage\fP\^);
 .HP
 XImage *XCreateImage\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Visual *\fIvisual\fP\^,
 unsigned int \fIdepth\fP\^, int \fIformat\fP\^, int \fIoffset\fP\^, char
 *\fIdata\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^, int
-\fIbitmap_pad\fP\^, int \fIbytes_per_line\fP\^); 
+\fIbitmap_pad\fP\^, int \fIbytes_per_line\fP\^);
 .HP
 unsigned long XGetPixel\^(\^XImage *\fIximage\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int
-\fIy\fP\^); 
+\fIy\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XPutPixel\^(\^XImage *\fIximage\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^,
-unsigned long \fIpixel\fP\^); 
+unsigned long \fIpixel\fP\^);
 .HP
 XImage *XSubImage\^(\^XImage *\fIximage\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^,
-unsigned int \fIsubimage_width\fP\^, unsigned int \fIsubimage_height\fP\^); 
+unsigned int \fIsubimage_width\fP\^, unsigned int \fIsubimage_height\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XAddPixel\^(\^XImage *\fIximage\fP\^, long \fIvalue\fP\^); 
+int XAddPixel\^(\^XImage *\fIximage\fP\^, long \fIvalue\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XDestroyImage\^(\^XImage *\^\fIximage\fP\^); 
+int XDestroyImage\^(\^XImage *\^\fIximage\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIbitmap_pad\fP 1i
 Specifies the quantum of a scanline (8, 16, or 32).
-In other words, the start of one scanline is separated in client memory from 
-the start of the next scanline by an integer multiple of this many bits.  
+In other words, the start of one scanline is separated in client memory from
+the start of the next scanline by an integer multiple of this many bits.
 .IP \fIbytes_per_line\fP 1i
 Specifies the number of bytes in the client image between
-the start of one scanline and the start of the next.  
+the start of one scanline and the start of the next.
 .IP \fIdata\fP 1i
 Specifies the image data.
 .IP \fIdepth\fP 1i
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ Specifies the format for the image.
 You can pass
 .BR XYBitmap ,
 .BR XYPixmap ,
-or 
+or
 .BR ZPixmap .
 .IP \fIheight\fP 1i
 Specifies the height of the image, in pixels.
@@ -146,15 +146,15 @@ function allocates the memory needed for an
 structure for the
 specified display but does not allocate space for the image itself.
 Rather, it initializes the structure byte-order, bit-order, and bitmap-unit
-values from the display and returns a pointer to the 
+values from the display and returns a pointer to the
 .B XImage
 structure.
 The red, green, and blue mask values are defined for Z format images only
-and are derived from the 
+and are derived from the
 .B Visual
 structure passed in.
 Other values also are passed in.
-The offset permits the rapid displaying of the image without requiring each 
+The offset permits the rapid displaying of the image without requiring each
 scanline to be shifted into position.
 If you pass a zero value in bytes_per_line,
 Xlib assumes that the scanlines are contiguous
@@ -165,9 +165,9 @@ Note that when the image is created using
 .BR XGetImage ,
 or
 .BR XSubImage ,
-the destroy procedure that the 
+the destroy procedure that the
 .B XDestroyImage
-function calls frees both the image structure 
+function calls frees both the image structure
 and the data pointed to by the image structure.
 .LP
 The basic functions used to get a pixel, set a pixel, create a subimage,
diff --git a/man/XInitThreads.man b/man/XInitThreads.man
index 7f859d3e..8c5a6de3 100644
--- a/man/XInitThreads.man
+++ b/man/XInitThreads.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -52,9 +52,9 @@ XInitThreads, XLockDisplay, XUnlockDisplay \- multi-threading support
 .HP
 Status XInitThreads\^(void);
 .HP
-void XLockDisplay\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+void XLockDisplay\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .HP
-void XUnlockDisplay\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+void XUnlockDisplay\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
diff --git a/man/XInstallColormap.man b/man/XInstallColormap.man
index fe3e70a2..6f46f024 100644
--- a/man/XInstallColormap.man
+++ b/man/XInstallColormap.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -53,10 +53,10 @@ XInstallColormap, XUninstallColormap, XListInstalledColormaps \- control colorma
 int XInstallColormap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap \fIcolormap\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XUninstallColormap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap
-\fIcolormap\fP\^); 
+\fIcolormap\fP\^);
 .HP
 Colormap *XListInstalledColormaps\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window
-\fIw\fP\^, int *\fInum_return\fP\^); 
+\fIw\fP\^, int *\fInum_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIcolormap\fP 1i
 Specifies the colormap.
@@ -79,11 +79,11 @@ You associated the windows with this colormap when you created them by calling
 or
 .BR XSetWindowColormap .
 .LP
-If the specified colormap is not already an installed colormap, 
+If the specified colormap is not already an installed colormap,
 the X server generates a
 .B ColormapNotify
 event on each window that has that colormap.
-In addition, for every other colormap that is installed as 
+In addition, for every other colormap that is installed as
 a result of a call to
 .BR XInstallColormap ,
 the X server generates a
@@ -100,17 +100,17 @@ The
 function removes the specified colormap from the required
 list for its screen.
 As a result,
-the specified colormap might be uninstalled, 
+the specified colormap might be uninstalled,
 and the X server might implicitly install or uninstall additional colormaps.
 Which colormaps get installed or uninstalled is server dependent
 except that the required list must remain installed.
 .LP
-If the specified colormap becomes uninstalled, 
+If the specified colormap becomes uninstalled,
 the X server generates a
 .B ColormapNotify
 event on each window that has that colormap.
-In addition, for every other colormap that is installed or uninstalled as a 
-result of a call to 
+In addition, for every other colormap that is installed or uninstalled as a
+result of a call to
 .BR XUninstallColormap ,
 the X server generates a
 .B ColormapNotify
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ error.
 .LP
 The
 .B XListInstalledColormaps
-function returns a list of the currently installed colormaps for the screen 
+function returns a list of the currently installed colormaps for the screen
 of the specified window.
 The order of the colormaps in the list is not significant
 and is no explicit indication of the required list.
diff --git a/man/XInternAtom.man b/man/XInternAtom.man
index cdbbc470..1340a390 100644
--- a/man/XInternAtom.man
+++ b/man/XInternAtom.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,15 +51,15 @@ XInternAtom, XInternAtoms, XGetAtomName, XGetAtomNames \- create or return atom
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 Atom XInternAtom\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, char *\fIatom_name\fP\^, Bool
-\fIonly_if_exists\fP\^); 
+\fIonly_if_exists\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XInternAtoms\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, char **\fInames\fP\^, int
-\fIcount\fP\^, Bool \fIonly_if_exists\fP\^, Atom *\fIatoms_return\fP\^); 
+\fIcount\fP\^, Bool \fIonly_if_exists\fP\^, Atom *\fIatoms_return\fP\^);
 .HP
-char *XGetAtomName\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Atom \fIatom\fP\^); 
+char *XGetAtomName\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Atom \fIatom\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XGetAtomNames\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Atom *\fIatoms\fP\^, int
-\fIcount\fP\^, char **\fInames_return\fP\^); 
+\fIcount\fP\^, char **\fInames_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIatom\fP 1i
 Specifies the atom for the property name you want returned.
@@ -84,18 +84,18 @@ The
 .B XInternAtom
 function returns the atom identifier associated with the specified atom_name
 string.
-If only_if_exists is 
+If only_if_exists is
 .BR False ,
 the atom is created if it does not exist.
 Therefore,
 .B XInternAtom
 can return
 .BR None .
-If the atom name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding, 
+If the atom name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding,
 the result is implementation-dependent.
 Uppercase and lowercase matter;
-the strings \*(lqthing\*(rq, \*(lqThing\*(rq, and \*(lqthinG\*(rq 
-all designate different atoms.  
+the strings \*(lqthing\*(rq, \*(lqThing\*(rq, and \*(lqthinG\*(rq
+all designate different atoms.
 The atom will remain defined even after the client's connection closes.
 It will become undefined only when the last connection to
 the X server closes.
diff --git a/man/XIntersectRegion.man b/man/XIntersectRegion.man
index e0da7345..54cff356 100644
--- a/man/XIntersectRegion.man
+++ b/man/XIntersectRegion.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,23 +51,23 @@ XIntersectRegion, XUnionRegion, XUnionRectWithRegion, XSubtractRegion, XXorRegio
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XIntersectRegion\^(\^Region \fIsra\fP\^, Region \fIsrb\fP\^, Region
-\fIdr_return\fP\^); 
+\fIdr_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XUnionRegion\^(\^Region \fIsra\fP\^, Region \fIsrb\fP\^, Region
-\fIdr_return\fP\^); 
+\fIdr_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XUnionRectWithRegion\^(\^XRectangle *\fIrectangle\fP\^, Region
-\fIsrc_region\fP\^, Region \fIdest_region_return\fP\^); 
+\fIsrc_region\fP\^, Region \fIdest_region_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XSubtractRegion\^(\^Region \fIsra\fP\^, Region \fIsrb\fP\^, Region
-\fIdr_return\fP\^); 
+\fIdr_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XXorRegion\^(\^Region \fIsra\fP\^, Region \fIsrb\fP\^, Region
-\fIdr_return\fP\^); 
+\fIdr_return\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XOffsetRegion\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^, int \fIdx\fP\^, int \fIdy\fP\^); 
+int XOffsetRegion\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^, int \fIdx\fP\^, int \fIdy\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XShrinkRegion\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^, int \fIdx\fP\^, int \fIdy\fP\^); 
+int XShrinkRegion\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^, int \fIdx\fP\^, int \fIdy\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdest_region_return\fP 1i
 Returns the destination region.
diff --git a/man/XKeymapEvent.man b/man/XKeymapEvent.man
index f00aa673..001ba623 100644
--- a/man/XKeymapEvent.man
+++ b/man/XKeymapEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ typedef struct {
         Display *display;       /\&* Display the event was read from */
         Window window;
         char key_vector[32];
-} XKeymapEvent; 
+} XKeymapEvent;
 .EE
 .LP
 When you receive this event,
@@ -89,10 +89,10 @@ dispatchers.
 .LP
 The window member is not used but is present to aid some toolkits.
 The key_vector member is set to the bit vector of the keyboard.
-Each bit set to 1 indicates that the corresponding key 
+Each bit set to 1 indicates that the corresponding key
 is currently pressed.
 The vector is represented as 32 bytes.
-Byte N (from 0) contains the bits for keys 8N to 8N + 7 
+Byte N (from 0) contains the bits for keys 8N to 8N + 7
 with the least significant bit in the byte representing key 8N.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 XAnyEvent(__libmansuffix__),
diff --git a/man/XListFonts.man b/man/XListFonts.man
index 7ddf1eee..6c99f31a 100644
--- a/man/XListFonts.man
+++ b/man/XListFonts.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,16 +51,16 @@ XListFonts, XFreeFontNames, XListFontsWithInfo, XFreeFontInfo \- obtain or free
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 char **XListFonts\^(\^Display *\^\fIdisplay\fP\^, char *\^\fIpattern\fP\^, int
-\fImaxnames\fP\^, int *\^\fIactual_count_return\fP\^); 
+\fImaxnames\fP\^, int *\^\fIactual_count_return\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XFreeFontNames\^(\^char *\fIlist\fP\^[\^]\^); 
+int XFreeFontNames\^(\^char *\fIlist\fP\^[\^]\^);
 .HP
 char **XListFontsWithInfo\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, char *\fIpattern\fP\^,
 int \fImaxnames\fP\^, int *\fIcount_return\fP\^, XFontStruct
-**\fIinfo_return\fP\^); 
+**\fIinfo_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XFreeFontInfo(\^char **\fInames\fP\^, XFontStruct *\fIfree_info\fP, int
-\fIactual_count\fP\^); 
+\fIactual_count\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIactual_count\fP 1i
 Specifies the actual number of font names.
@@ -84,12 +84,12 @@ Specifies the maximum number of names to be returned.
 Specifies the list of font names.
 
 .IP \fIpattern\fP 1i
-Specifies the null-terminated pattern string that can contain wildcard 
+Specifies the null-terminated pattern string that can contain wildcard
 characters.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B XListFonts
-function returns an array of available font names 
+function returns an array of available font names
 (as controlled by the font search path; see
 .BR XSetFontPath )
 that match the string you passed to the pattern argument.
diff --git a/man/XLoadFont.man b/man/XLoadFont.man
index 51cd7e36..b4c023ef 100644
--- a/man/XLoadFont.man
+++ b/man/XLoadFont.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -60,19 +60,19 @@
 XLoadFont, XQueryFont, XLoadQueryFont, XFreeFont, XGetFontProperty, XUnloadFont, XCharStruct, XFontProp, XChar2b, XFontStruct \- load or unload fonts and font metric structures
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-Font XLoadFont\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, char *\fIname\fP\^); 
+Font XLoadFont\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, char *\fIname\fP\^);
 .HP
-XFontStruct *XQueryFont\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XID \fIfont_ID\fP\^); 
+XFontStruct *XQueryFont\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XID \fIfont_ID\fP\^);
 .HP
 XFontStruct *XLoadQueryFont\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, char
-*\fIname\fP\^); 
+*\fIname\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XFreeFont\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XFontStruct *\fIfont_struct\fP\^);
 .HP
 Bool XGetFontProperty\^(\^XFontStruct *\fIfont_struct\fP\^, Atom \fIatom\fP\^,
-unsigned long *\fIvalue_return\fP\^); 
+unsigned long *\fIvalue_return\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XUnloadFont\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Font \fIfont\fP\^); 
+int XUnloadFont\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Font \fIfont\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIatom\fP 1i
 Specifies the atom for the property name you want returned.
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIfont\fP 1i
 Specifies the font.
 .IP \fIfont_ID\fP 1i
-Specifies the font ID or the 
+Specifies the font ID or the
 .B GContext
 ID.
 .IP \fIfont_struct\fP 1i
@@ -102,21 +102,21 @@ the result is implementation-dependent.
 Use of uppercase or lowercase does not matter.
 When the characters \*(lq?\*(rq and \*(lq\*(rq are used in a font name, a
 pattern match is performed and any matching font is used.
-In the pattern, 
-the \*(lq?\*(rq character will match any single character, 
+In the pattern,
+the \*(lq?\*(rq character will match any single character,
 and the \*(lq*\*(rq character will match any number of characters.
-A structured format for font names is specified in the X Consortium standard 
+A structured format for font names is specified in the X Consortium standard
 \fIX Logical Font Description Conventions\fP.
-If 
+If
 .B XLoadFont
-was unsuccessful at loading the specified font, 
-a 
+was unsuccessful at loading the specified font,
+a
 .B BadName
 error results.
-Fonts are not associated with a particular screen 
+Fonts are not associated with a particular screen
 and can be stored as a component
 of any GC.
-When the font is no longer needed, call 
+When the font is no longer needed, call
 .BR XUnloadFont .
 .LP
 .B XLoadFont
@@ -132,9 +132,9 @@ function returns a pointer to the
 .B XFontStruct
 structure, which contains information associated with the font.
 You can query a font or the font stored in a GC.
-The font ID stored in the 
+The font ID stored in the
 .B XFontStruct
-structure will be the 
+structure will be the
 .B GContext
 ID, and you need to be careful when using this ID in other functions
 (see
@@ -166,7 +166,7 @@ returns NULL.
 .LP
 The
 .B XFreeFont
-function deletes the association between the font resource ID and the specified 
+function deletes the association between the font resource ID and the specified
 font and frees the
 .B XFontStruct
 structure.
@@ -181,11 +181,11 @@ error.
 Given the atom for that property,
 the
 .B XGetFontProperty
-function returns the value of the specified font property. 
+function returns the value of the specified font property.
 .B XGetFontProperty
-also returns 
+also returns
 .B False
-if the property was not defined or 
+if the property was not defined or
 .B True
 if it was defined.
 A set of predefined atoms exists for font properties,
@@ -283,7 +283,7 @@ byte2 defines the range of defined columns of the font.
 Single byte/character fonts have one row defined, and the byte2 range
 specified in the structure defines a range of characters.
 .LP
-The bounding box of a character is defined by the 
+The bounding box of a character is defined by the
 .B XCharStruct
 of that character.
 When characters are absent from a font,
@@ -293,22 +293,22 @@ only the information in the
 .B XFontStruct
 min and max bounds are used.
 .LP
-The members of the 
+The members of the
 .B XFontStruct
 have the following semantics:
 .IP \(bu 5
-The direction member can be either 
+The direction member can be either
 .B FontLeftToRight
-or 
+or
 .BR FontRightToLeft .
-It is just a hint as to whether most 
+It is just a hint as to whether most
 .B XCharStruct
-elements 
-have a positive 
-.Pn ( FontLeftToRight ) 
-or a negative 
+elements
+have a positive
+.Pn ( FontLeftToRight )
+or a negative
 .Pn ( FontRightToLeft )
-character width 
+character width
 metric.
 The core protocol defines no support for vertical text.
 .IP \(bu 5
@@ -318,7 +318,7 @@ of the per_char array, and max_char_or_byte2 specifies the linear character
 index of the last element.
 .IP
 If either min_byte1 or max_byte1 are nonzero, both
-min_char_or_byte2 and max_char_or_byte2 are less than 256, 
+min_char_or_byte2 and max_char_or_byte2 are less than 256,
 and the 2-byte character index values corresponding to the
 per_char array element N (counting from 0) are:
 .IP
@@ -333,26 +333,26 @@ where:
         \e\e = integer modulus
 .EE
 .IP \(bu 5
-If the per_char pointer is NULL, 
+If the per_char pointer is NULL,
 all glyphs between the first and last character indexes
 inclusive have the same information,
 as given by both min_bounds and max_bounds.
 .IP \(bu 5
-If all_chars_exist is 
+If all_chars_exist is
 .BR True ,
 all characters in the per_char array have nonzero bounding boxes.
 .IP \(bu 5
 The default_char member specifies the character that will be used when an
-undefined or nonexistent character is printed.  
+undefined or nonexistent character is printed.
 The default_char is a 16-bit character (not a 2-byte character).
-For a font using 2-byte matrix format, 
+For a font using 2-byte matrix format,
 the default_char has byte1 in the most-significant byte
 and byte2 in the least significant byte.
-If the default_char itself specifies an undefined or nonexistent character, 
+If the default_char itself specifies an undefined or nonexistent character,
 no printing is performed for an undefined or nonexistent character.
 .IP \(bu 5
 The min_bounds and max_bounds members contain the most extreme values of
-each individual 
+each individual
 .B XCharStruct
 component over all elements of this array
 (and ignore nonexistent characters).
@@ -383,16 +383,16 @@ baseline that is used for determining line spacing.
 Specific characters may extend beyond this.
 .IP \(bu 5
 If the baseline is at Y-coordinate y,
-the logical extent of the font is inclusive between the Y-coordinate 
+the logical extent of the font is inclusive between the Y-coordinate
 values (y \- font.ascent) and (y + font.descent \- 1).
 Typically,
 the minimum interline spacing between rows of text is given
 by ascent + descent.
 .LP
 For a character origin at [x,y],
-the bounding box of a character (that is, 
+the bounding box of a character (that is,
 the smallest rectangle that encloses the character's shape)
-described in terms of 
+described in terms of
 .B XCharStruct
 components is a rectangle with its upper-left corner at:
 .LP
diff --git a/man/XLookupKeysym.man b/man/XLookupKeysym.man
index c0890796..2f54a49e 100644
--- a/man/XLookupKeysym.man
+++ b/man/XLookupKeysym.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,17 +50,17 @@
 XLookupKeysym, XRefreshKeyboardMapping, XLookupString, XRebindKeysym \- handle keyboard input events in Latin-1
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-KeySym XLookupKeysym(\^XKeyEvent *\fIkey_event\fP\^, int \fIindex\fP\^); 
+KeySym XLookupKeysym(\^XKeyEvent *\fIkey_event\fP\^, int \fIindex\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XRefreshKeyboardMapping(\^XMappingEvent *\fIevent_map\fP\^); 
+int XRefreshKeyboardMapping(\^XMappingEvent *\fIevent_map\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XLookupString(\^XKeyEvent *\fIevent_struct\fP\^, char
 *\fIbuffer_return\fP\^, int \fIbytes_buffer\fP\^, KeySym
-*\fIkeysym_return\fP\^, XComposeStatus *\fIstatus_in_out\fP\^); 
+*\fIkeysym_return\fP\^, XComposeStatus *\fIstatus_in_out\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XRebindKeysym(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, KeySym \fIkeysym\fP\^, KeySym
 \fIlist\fP\^[\^]\^, int \fImod_count\fP\^, unsigned char *\fIstring\fP\^, int
-\fInum_bytes\fP\^); 
+\fInum_bytes\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIbuffer_return\fP 1i
 Returns the translated characters.
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ or
 .IP \fIindex\fP 1i
 Specifies the index into the KeySyms list for the event's KeyCode.
 .IP \fIkey_event\fP 1i
-Specifies the 
+Specifies the
 .B KeyPress
 or
 .B KeyRelease
@@ -96,11 +96,11 @@ Specifies the KeySyms to be used as modifiers.
 .IP \fImod_count\fP 1i
 Specifies the number of modifiers in the modifier list.
 .IP \fIstatus_in_out\fP 1i
-Specifies or returns the 
+Specifies or returns the
 .B XComposeStatus
 structure or NULL.
 .IP \fIstring\fP 1i
-Specifies the string that is copied and will be returned by 
+Specifies the string that is copied and will be returned by
 .BR XLookupString .
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
diff --git a/man/XMapEvent.man b/man/XMapEvent.man
index 4c49e5ae..34e5669d 100644
--- a/man/XMapEvent.man
+++ b/man/XMapEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ was selected.
 The window member is set to the window that was mapped.
 The override_redirect member is set to the override-redirect attribute
 of the window.
-Window manager clients normally should ignore this window 
+Window manager clients normally should ignore this window
 if the override-redirect attribute is
 .BR True ,
 because these events usually are generated from pop-ups,
@@ -155,12 +155,12 @@ If it is
 the keyboard mapping was changed.
 If it is
 .BR MappingPointer ,
-the pointer button mapping was changed. 
-The first_keycode and count members are set only 
+the pointer button mapping was changed.
+The first_keycode and count members are set only
 if the request member was set to
 .BR MappingKeyboard .
-The number in first_keycode represents the first number in the range 
-of the altered mapping, 
+The number in first_keycode represents the first number in the range
+of the altered mapping,
 and count represents the number of keycodes altered.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 XAnyEvent(__libmansuffix__),
diff --git a/man/XMapRequestEvent.man b/man/XMapRequestEvent.man
index 33e909d5..36ca2c8e 100644
--- a/man/XMapRequestEvent.man
+++ b/man/XMapRequestEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
diff --git a/man/XMapWindow.man b/man/XMapWindow.man
index 895f63af..07913f53 100644
--- a/man/XMapWindow.man
+++ b/man/XMapWindow.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,11 +50,11 @@
 XMapWindow, XMapRaised, XMapSubwindows \- map windows
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-int XMapWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^); 
+int XMapWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XMapRaised\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^); 
+int XMapRaised\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XMapSubwindows\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^); 
+int XMapSubwindows\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -92,14 +92,14 @@ If the window becomes viewable and no earlier contents for it are remembered,
 the X server tiles the window with its background.
 If the window's background is undefined,
 the existing screen contents are not
-altered, and the X server generates zero or more 
+altered, and the X server generates zero or more
 .B Expose
 events.
-If backing-store was maintained while the window was unmapped, no 
+If backing-store was maintained while the window was unmapped, no
 .B Expose
 events
 are generated.
-If backing-store will now be maintained, 
+If backing-store will now be maintained,
 a full-window exposure is always generated.
 Otherwise, only visible regions may be reported.
 Similar tiling and exposure take place for any newly viewable inferiors.
@@ -109,25 +109,25 @@ If the window is an
 .B InputOutput
 window,
 .B XMapWindow
-generates 
+generates
 .B Expose
-events on each 
+events on each
 .B InputOutput
 window that it causes to be displayed.
-If the client maps and paints the window 
-and if the client begins processing events, 
+If the client maps and paints the window
+and if the client begins processing events,
 the window is painted twice.
 To avoid this,
-first ask for 
+first ask for
 .B Expose
 events and then map the window,
 so the client processes input events as usual.
-The event list will include 
+The event list will include
 .B Expose
 for each
-window that has appeared on the screen. 
+window that has appeared on the screen.
 The client's normal response to
-an 
+an
 .B Expose
 event should be to repaint the window.
 This method usually leads to simpler programs and to proper interaction
@@ -155,7 +155,7 @@ error.
 The
 .B XMapSubwindows
 .IN "XMapSubwindows"
-function maps all subwindows for a specified window in top-to-bottom stacking 
+function maps all subwindows for a specified window in top-to-bottom stacking
 order.
 The X server generates
 .B Expose
diff --git a/man/XNextEvent.man b/man/XNextEvent.man
index 2582a8eb..f1bfac93 100644
--- a/man/XNextEvent.man
+++ b/man/XNextEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,27 +50,27 @@
 XNextEvent, XPeekEvent, XWindowEvent, XCheckWindowEvent, XMaskEvent, XCheckMaskEvent, XCheckTypedEvent, XCheckTypedWindowEvent \- select events by type
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-int XNextEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^); 
+int XNextEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XPeekEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^); 
+int XPeekEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XWindowEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, long
-\fIevent_mask\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^); 
+\fIevent_mask\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Bool XCheckWindowEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, long
-\fIevent_mask\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^); 
+\fIevent_mask\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XMaskEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, long \fIevent_mask\fP\^, XEvent
-*\fIevent_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIevent_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Bool XCheckMaskEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, long \fIevent_mask\fP\^,
-XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^); 
+XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Bool XCheckTypedEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fIevent_type\fP\^,
-XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^); 
+XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Bool XCheckTypedWindowEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
-int \fIevent_type\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^); 
+int \fIevent_type\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ flushes the output buffer and blocks until one is received.
 .LP
 The
 .B XCheckWindowEvent
-function searches the event queue and then the events available 
+function searches the event queue and then the events available
 on the server connection for the first event that matches the specified window
 and event mask.
 If it finds a match,
@@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ and the output buffer will have been flushed.
 .LP
 The
 .B XMaskEvent
-function searches the event queue for the events associated with the 
+function searches the event queue for the events associated with the
 specified mask.
 When it finds a match,
 .B XMaskEvent
@@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ and the output buffer will have been flushed.
 .LP
 The
 .B XCheckTypedEvent
-function searches the event queue and then any events available  
+function searches the event queue and then any events available
 on the server connection for the first event that matches the specified type.
 If it finds a match,
 .B XCheckTypedEvent
@@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ and the output buffer will have been flushed.
 .LP
 The
 .B XCheckTypedWindowEvent
-function searches the event queue and then any events available  
+function searches the event queue and then any events available
 on the server connection for the first event that matches the specified
 type and window.
 If it finds a match,
diff --git a/man/XNoOp.man b/man/XNoOp.man
index b6f6df59..2062cc3a 100644
--- a/man/XNoOp.man
+++ b/man/XNoOp.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -49,14 +49,14 @@
 .SH NAME
 XNoOp \- No Operation
 .SH SYNTAX
-int XNoOp\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+int XNoOp\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B XNoOp
-function sends a 
+function sends a
 .B NoOperation
 protocol request to the X server,
 thereby exercising the connection.
diff --git a/man/XOpenDisplay.man b/man/XOpenDisplay.man
index dec75610..68faefbe 100644
--- a/man/XOpenDisplay.man
+++ b/man/XOpenDisplay.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,28 +50,28 @@
 XOpenDisplay, XCloseDisplay \- connect or disconnect to X server
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-Display *XOpenDisplay\^(\^char *\fIdisplay_name\fP\^); 
+Display *XOpenDisplay\^(\^char *\fIdisplay_name\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XCloseDisplay\^(Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+int XCloseDisplay\^(Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIdisplay_name\fP 1i
 Specifies the hardware display name, which determines the display
 and communications domain to be used.
-On a POSIX-conformant system, if the display_name is NULL, 
-it defaults to the value of the DISPLAY environment variable. 
+On a POSIX-conformant system, if the display_name is NULL,
+it defaults to the value of the DISPLAY environment variable.
 .IN "Environment" "DISPLAY"
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B XOpenDisplay
-function returns a 
+function returns a
 .B Display
 structure that serves as the
 connection to the X server and that contains all the information
 about that X server.
 .B XOpenDisplay
-connects your application to the X server through TCP 
+connects your application to the X server through TCP
 or DECnet communications protocols,
 or through some local inter-process communication protocol.
 .IN "Protocol" "TCP"
@@ -92,21 +92,21 @@ A particular Xlib implementation can support many more of these transport
 mechanisms.
 .LP
 .IN "Display"
-If successful, 
+If successful,
 .B XOpenDisplay
-returns a pointer to a 
+returns a pointer to a
 .B Display
 structure,
-which is defined in 
+which is defined in
 .hN X11/Xlib.h .
-If 
+If
 .B XOpenDisplay
 does not succeed, it returns NULL.
 After a successful call to
 .BR XOpenDisplay ,
 all of the screens in the display can be used by the client.
-The screen number specified in the display_name argument is returned 
-by the 
+The screen number specified in the display_name argument is returned
+by the
 .B DefaultScreen
 macro (or the
 .B XDefaultScreen
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ You can access elements of the
 and
 .B Screen
 structures only by using the information macros or functions.
-For information about using macros and functions to obtain information from 
+For information about using macros and functions to obtain information from
 the
 .B Display
 structure,
@@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ or other resources that the client has created
 on this display, unless the close-down mode of the resource has been changed
 (see
 .BR XSetCloseDownMode ).
-Therefore, these windows, resource IDs, and other resources should never be 
+Therefore, these windows, resource IDs, and other resources should never be
 referenced again or an error will be generated.
 Before exiting, you should call
 .B XCloseDisplay
diff --git a/man/XOpenIM.man b/man/XOpenIM.man
index 2e241c0a..cfc97881 100644
--- a/man/XOpenIM.man
+++ b/man/XOpenIM.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,25 +51,25 @@ XOpenIM, XCloseIM, XSetIMValues, XGetIMValues, XDisplayOfIM, XLocaleOfIM, XRegis
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 XIM XOpenIM\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XrmDatabase \fIdb\fP\^, char
-*\fIres_name\fP\^, char *\fIres_class\fP\^); 
+*\fIres_name\fP\^, char *\fIres_class\fP\^);
 .HP
-Status XCloseIM\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^); 
+Status XCloseIM\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^);
 .HP
-char *XSetIMValues\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^, ...); 
+char *XSetIMValues\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^, ...);
 .HP
-char *XGetIMValues\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^, ...); 
+char *XGetIMValues\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^, ...);
 .HP
-Display *XDisplayOfIM\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^); 
+Display *XDisplayOfIM\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^);
 .HP
-char *XLocaleOfIM\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^); 
+char *XLocaleOfIM\^(\^XIM \fIim\fP\^);
 .HP
 Bool XRegisterIMInstantiateCallback\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XrmDatabase
 \fIdb\fP\^, char *\fIres_name\fP\^, char *\fIres_class\fP\^, XIDProc
-\fIcallback\fP\^, XPointer \fIclient_data\fP\^); 
+\fIcallback\fP\^, XPointer \fIclient_data\fP\^);
 .HP
 Bool XUnregisterIMInstantiateCallback\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^,
 XrmDatabase \fIdb\fP\^, char *\fIres_name\fP\^, char *\fIres_class\fP\^,
-XIDProc \fIcallback\fP\^, XPointer \fIclient_data\fP\^); 
+XIDProc \fIcallback\fP\^, XPointer \fIclient_data\fP\^);
 .LP
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIcallback\fP 1i
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Specifies the variable length argument list to set or get XIM values.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B XOpenIM
-function opens an input method, 
+function opens an input method,
 matching the current locale and modifiers specification.
 Current locale and modifiers are bound to the input method at opening time.
 The locale associated with an input method cannot be changed dynamically.
@@ -103,11 +103,11 @@ for any input context affiliated with a given input method
 will be encoded in the locale current at the time the input method is opened.
 .LP
 The specific input method to which this call will be routed
-is identified on the basis of the current locale. 
+is identified on the basis of the current locale.
 .B XOpenIM
 will identify a default input method corresponding to the
 current locale.
-That default can be modified using 
+That default can be modified using
 .B XSetLocaleModifiers
 for the input method modifier.
 .LP
@@ -118,8 +118,8 @@ up values that can be set as IC values in an input context.
 If db is NULL,
 no database is passed to the input method.
 .LP
-The res_name and res_class arguments specify the resource name 
-and class of the application. 
+The res_name and res_class arguments specify the resource name
+and class of the application.
 They are intended to be used as prefixes by the input method
 when looking up resources that are common to all input contexts
 that may be created for this input method.
@@ -187,9 +187,9 @@ function registers a callback to be invoked whenever a new input method
 becomes available for the specified display that matches the current
 locale and modifiers.
 .LP
-The function returns 
+The function returns
 .B True
-if it succeeds; otherwise, it returns 
+if it succeeds; otherwise, it returns
 .BR False .
 .LP
 The
@@ -198,7 +198,7 @@ function removes an input method instantiation callback previously
 registered.
 The function returns
 .B True
-if it succeeds; otherwise, it returns 
+if it succeeds; otherwise, it returns
 .BR False .
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 XCreateIC(__libmansuffix__),
diff --git a/man/XOpenOM.man b/man/XOpenOM.man
index fccf3f00..275589c9 100644
--- a/man/XOpenOM.man
+++ b/man/XOpenOM.man
@@ -52,17 +52,17 @@ XOpenOM, XCloseOM, XSetOMValues, XGetOMValues, XDisplayOfOM, XLocaleOfOM \- open
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 XOM XOpenOM\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XrmDatabase \fIdb\fP\^, char
-*\fIres_name\fP\^, char *\fIres_class\fP\^); 
+*\fIres_name\fP\^, char *\fIres_class\fP\^);
 .HP
-Status XCloseOM\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^); 
+Status XCloseOM\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^);
 .HP
-char *XSetOMValues\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^); 
+char *XSetOMValues\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^);
 .HP
-char *XGetOMValues\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^); 
+char *XGetOMValues\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^);
 .HP
-Display *XDisplayOfOM\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^); 
+Display *XDisplayOfOM\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^);
 .HP
-char *XLocaleOfOM\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^); 
+char *XLocaleOfOM\^(\^XOM \fIom\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ is identified on the basis of the current locale and modifiers.
 .B XOpenOM
 will identify a default output method corresponding to the
 current locale.
-That default can be modified using 
+That default can be modified using
 .B XSetLocaleModifiers
 to set the output method modifier.
 .LP
@@ -103,8 +103,8 @@ up values that can be set as OC values in an output context.
 If db is NULL,
 no database is passed to the output method.
 .LP
-The res_name and res_class arguments specify the resource name 
-and class of the application. 
+The res_name and res_class arguments specify the resource name
+and class of the application.
 They are intended to be used as prefixes by the output method
 when looking up resources that are common to all output contexts
 that may be created for this output method.
diff --git a/man/XParseGeometry.man b/man/XParseGeometry.man
index 23b1f9a5..ed4a9070 100644
--- a/man/XParseGeometry.man
+++ b/man/XParseGeometry.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -52,13 +52,13 @@ XParseGeometry, XWMGeometry \- parse window geometry
 .HP
 int XParseGeometry\^(\^char *\fIparsestring\fP\^, int *\fIx_return\fP\^, int
 *\fIy_return\fP\^, unsigned int *\fIwidth_return\fP\^, unsigned int
-*\fIheight_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIheight_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XWMGeometry\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fIscreen\fP\^, char
 *\fIuser_geom\fP\^, char *\fIdef_geom\fP\^, unsigned int \fIbwidth\fP\^,
 XSizeHints *\fIhints\fP\^, int *\fIx_return\fP, int *\fIy_return\fP\^, int
 *\fIwidth_return\fP\^, int *\fIheight_return\fP\^, int
-*\fIgravity_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIgravity_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIposition\fP 1i
 .br
@@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ Specifically, this function lets you parse strings of the form:
 .LP
 .\" Start marker code here
 .EX
-[=][<\fIwidth\fP>{xX}<\fIheight\fP>][{+-}<\fIxoffset\fP>{+-}<\fIyoffset\fP>] 
+[=][<\fIwidth\fP>{xX}<\fIheight\fP>][{+-}<\fIxoffset\fP>{+-}<\fIyoffset\fP>]
 .EE
 .\" End marker code here
 .LP
@@ -125,8 +125,8 @@ the result is implementation-dependent.
 The
 .B XParseGeometry
 function returns a bitmask that indicates which of the four values (width,
-height, xoffset, and yoffset) were actually found in the string 
-and whether the x and y values are negative. 
+height, xoffset, and yoffset) were actually found in the string
+and whether the x and y values are negative.
 By convention, \-0 is not equal to +0, because the user needs to
 be able to say \*(lqposition the window relative to the right or bottom edge.\*(rq
 For each value found, the corresponding argument is updated.
@@ -139,49 +139,49 @@ The bits are represented by
 .BR XNegative ,
 or
 .B YNegative
-and are defined in 
+and are defined in
 .hN X11/Xutil.h .
-They will be set whenever one of the values is defined 
+They will be set whenever one of the values is defined
 or one of the signs is set.
 .LP
-If the function returns either the 
+If the function returns either the
 .B XValue
-or 
+or
 .B YValue
 flag,
 you should place the window at the requested position.
 .LP
-The 
+The
 .B XWMGeometry
-function combines any geometry information (given in the format used by 
+function combines any geometry information (given in the format used by
 .BR XParseGeometry )
-specified by the user and by the calling program with size hints 
-(usually the ones to be stored in WM_NORMAL_HINTS) and returns the position, 
+specified by the user and by the calling program with size hints
+(usually the ones to be stored in WM_NORMAL_HINTS) and returns the position,
 size, and gravity
-.Pn ( NorthWestGravity , 
+.Pn ( NorthWestGravity ,
 .BR NorthEastGravity ,
 .BR SouthEastGravity ,
 or
 .BR SouthWestGravity )
 that describe the window.
-If the base size is not set in the 
+If the base size is not set in the
 .B XSizeHints
-structure, 
+structure,
 the minimum size is used if set.
 Otherwise, a base size of zero is assumed.
-If no minimum size is set in the hints structure, 
+If no minimum size is set in the hints structure,
 the base size is used.
-A mask (in the form returned by 
+A mask (in the form returned by
 .BR XParseGeometry )
-that describes which values came from the user specification 
+that describes which values came from the user specification
 and whether or not the position coordinates are relative
 to the right and bottom edges is returned.
-Note that these coordinates will have already been accounted for 
+Note that these coordinates will have already been accounted for
 in the x_return and y_return values.
 .LP
-Note that invalid geometry specifications can cause a width or height 
+Note that invalid geometry specifications can cause a width or height
 of zero to be returned.
-The caller may pass the address of the hints win_gravity field 
+The caller may pass the address of the hints win_gravity field
 as gravity_return to update the hints directly.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 XSetWMProperties(__libmansuffix__)
diff --git a/man/XPolygonRegion.man b/man/XPolygonRegion.man
index 64a647d6..6434adc8 100644
--- a/man/XPolygonRegion.man
+++ b/man/XPolygonRegion.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,18 +51,18 @@ XPolygonRegion, XClipBox \- generate regions
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 Region XPolygonRegion\^(\^XPoint \fIpoints\fP[]\^, int \fIn\fP\^, int
-\fIfill_rule\fP\^); 
+\fIfill_rule\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XClipBox\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^, XRectangle *\fIrect_return\fP\^); 
+int XClipBox\^(\^Region \fIr\fP\^, XRectangle *\fIrect_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIfill_rule\fP 1i
 Specifies the fill-rule you want to set for the specified GC.
-You can pass 
+You can pass
 .B EvenOddRule
 or
 .BR WindingRule .
 .IP \fIn\fP 1i
-Specifies the number of points in the polygon. 
+Specifies the number of points in the polygon.
 .IP \fIpoints\fP 1i
 Specifies an array of points.
 .IP \fIr\fP 1i
diff --git a/man/XPropertyEvent.man b/man/XPropertyEvent.man
index f6ba0f36..ddad35dc 100644
--- a/man/XPropertyEvent.man
+++ b/man/XPropertyEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -88,12 +88,12 @@ but expanded from the 16-bit least-significant bits to a full 32-bit value.
 The window member is set to the window that is most useful to toolkit
 dispatchers.
 .LP
-The window member is set to the window whose associated 
+The window member is set to the window whose associated
 property was changed.
 The atom member is set to the property's atom and indicates which
 property was changed or desired.
 The time member is set to the server time when the property was changed.
-The state member is set to indicate whether the property was changed 
+The state member is set to indicate whether the property was changed
 to a new value or deleted and can be
 .B PropertyNewValue
 or
@@ -108,13 +108,13 @@ or
 .BR XChangeProperty )
 and when replacing all or part of a property with identical data using
 .B XChangeProperty
-or 
+or
 .BR XRotateWindowProperties .
 The state member is set to
 .B PropertyDelete
 when a property of the window is deleted using
 .B XDeleteProperty
-or, if the delete argument is 
+or, if the delete argument is
 .BR True ,
 .BR XGetWindowProperty .
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
diff --git a/man/XPutBackEvent.man b/man/XPutBackEvent.man
index cc08f35e..fe7bd802 100644
--- a/man/XPutBackEvent.man
+++ b/man/XPutBackEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
 XPutBackEvent \- put events back on the queue
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-XPutBackEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent\fP\^); 
+XPutBackEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
diff --git a/man/XPutImage.man b/man/XPutImage.man
index bf32bf74..08def67c 100644
--- a/man/XPutImage.man
+++ b/man/XPutImage.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -53,30 +53,30 @@ XPutImage, XGetImage, XGetSubImage \- transfer images
 int XPutImage\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^,
 XImage *\fIimage\fP\^, int \fIsrc_x\fP\^, int \fIsrc_y\fP\^, int
 \fIdest_x\fP\^, int \fIdest_y\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int
-\fIheight\fP\^); 
+\fIheight\fP\^);
 .HP
 XImage *XGetImage\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, int
 \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int
-\fIheight\fP\^, unsigned long \fIplane_mask\fP\^, int \fIformat\fP\^); 
+\fIheight\fP\^, unsigned long \fIplane_mask\fP\^, int \fIformat\fP\^);
 .HP
 XImage *XGetSubImage\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, int
 \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int
 \fIheight\fP\^, unsigned long \fIplane_mask\fP\^, int \fIformat\fP\^, XImage
-*\fIdest_image\fP\^, int \fIdest_x\fP\^, \fIdest_y\fP\^); 
+*\fIdest_image\fP\^, int \fIdest_x\fP\^, \fIdest_y\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fId\fP 1i
-Specifies the drawable. 
+Specifies the drawable.
 .IP \fIdest_image\fP 1i
 Specifies the destination image.
-.ds Dx 
+.ds Dx
 .IP \fIdest_x\fP 1i
 .br
 .ns
 .IP \fIdest_y\fP 1i
-Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the origin of the drawable 
-and are the coordinates of the subimage 
-or which are relative to the origin of the destination rectangle, 
-specify its upper-left corner, and determine where the subimage 
+Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the origin of the drawable
+and are the coordinates of the subimage
+or which are relative to the origin of the destination rectangle,
+specify its upper-left corner, and determine where the subimage
 is placed in the destination image.
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -84,45 +84,45 @@ Specifies the connection to the X server.
 Specifies the format for the image.
 You can pass
 .B XYPixmap
-or 
+or
 .BR ZPixmap .
 .IP \fIgc\fP 1i
 Specifies the GC.
 .IP \fIimage\fP 1i
-Specifies the image you want combined with the rectangle. 
+Specifies the image you want combined with the rectangle.
 .IP \fIplane_mask\fP 1i
 Specifies the plane mask.
 .\" *** JIM: NEED MORE INFO FOR THIS. ***
 .IP \fIsrc_x\fP 1i
 Specifies the offset in X from the left edge of the image defined
-by the 
+by the
 .B XImage
 structure.
 .IP \fIsrc_y\fP 1i
 Specifies the offset in Y from the top edge of the image defined
-by the 
+by the
 .B XImage
 structure.
 .IP \fIwidth\fP 1i
 .br
 .ns
 .IP \fIheight\fP 1i
-Specify the width and height of the subimage, which define 
+Specify the width and height of the subimage, which define
 the dimensions of the rectangle.
 .IP \fIx\fP 1i
 .br
 .ns
 .IP \fIy\fP 1i
-Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the origin of the drawable 
+Specify the x and y coordinates, which are relative to the origin of the drawable
 and define the upper-left corner of the rectangle.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B XPutImage
 function
 combines an image with a rectangle of the specified drawable.
-The section of the image defined by the src_x, src_y, width, and height 
+The section of the image defined by the src_x, src_y, width, and height
 arguments is drawn on the specified part of the drawable.
-If 
+If
 .B XYBitmap
 format is used, the depth of the image must be one,
 or a
@@ -130,9 +130,9 @@ or a
 error results.
 The foreground pixel in the GC defines the source for the one bits in the image,
 and the background pixel defines the source for the zero bits.
-For 
+For
 .B XYPixmap
-and 
+and
 .BR ZPixmap ,
 the depth of the image must match the depth of the drawable,
 or a
@@ -145,8 +145,8 @@ differ from what the server requires,
 automatically makes the appropriate
 conversions.
 .LP
-This function uses these GC components: 
-function, plane-mask, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin, 
+This function uses these GC components:
+function, plane-mask, subwindow-mode, clip-x-origin, clip-y-origin,
 and clip-mask.
 It also uses these GC mode-dependent components:
 foreground and background.
@@ -167,16 +167,16 @@ function returns a pointer to an
 structure.
 This structure provides you with the contents of the specified rectangle of
 the drawable in the format you specify.
-If the format argument is 
+If the format argument is
 .BR XYPixmap ,
 the image contains only the bit planes you passed to the plane_mask argument.
 If the plane_mask argument only requests a subset of the planes of the
 display, the depth of the returned image will be the number of planes
 requested.
-If the format argument is 
+If the format argument is
 .BR ZPixmap ,
 .B XGetImage
-returns as zero the bits in all planes not 
+returns as zero the bits in all planes not
 specified in the plane_mask argument.
 The function performs no range checking on the values in plane_mask and ignores
 extraneous bits.
@@ -186,17 +186,17 @@ returns the depth of the image to the depth member of the
 .B XImage
 structure.
 The depth of the image is as specified when the drawable was created,
-except when getting a subset of the planes in 
+except when getting a subset of the planes in
 .B XYPixmap
 format, when the depth is given by the number of bits set to 1 in plane_mask.
 .LP
-If the drawable is a pixmap, 
-the given rectangle must be wholly contained within the pixmap, 
+If the drawable is a pixmap,
+the given rectangle must be wholly contained within the pixmap,
 or a
 .B BadMatch
 error results.
-If the drawable is a window, 
-the window must be viewable, 
+If the drawable is a window,
+the window must be viewable,
 and it must be the case that if there were no inferiors or overlapping windows,
 the specified rectangle of the window would be fully visible on the screen
 and wholly contained within the outside edges of the window,
@@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ Note that the borders of the window can be included and read with
 this request.
 If the window has backing-store, the backing-store contents are
 returned for regions of the window that are obscured by noninferior
-windows. 
+windows.
 If the window does not have backing-store,
 the returned contents of such obscured regions are undefined.
 The returned contents of visible regions of inferiors
@@ -225,17 +225,17 @@ and
 .B BadValue
 errors.
 .LP
-The 
+The
 .B XGetSubImage
-function updates dest_image with the specified subimage in the same manner as 
+function updates dest_image with the specified subimage in the same manner as
 .BR XGetImage .
-If the format argument is 
+If the format argument is
 .BR XYPixmap ,
 the image contains only the bit planes you passed to the plane_mask argument.
-If the format argument is 
+If the format argument is
 .BR ZPixmap ,
 .B XGetSubImage
-returns as zero the bits in all planes not 
+returns as zero the bits in all planes not
 specified in the plane_mask argument.
 The function performs no range checking on the values in plane_mask and ignores
 extraneous bits.
@@ -255,18 +255,18 @@ the given rectangle must be wholly contained within the pixmap,
 or a
 .B BadMatch
 error results.
-If the drawable is a window, 
-the window must be viewable, 
+If the drawable is a window,
+the window must be viewable,
 and it must be the case that if there were no inferiors or overlapping windows,
 the specified rectangle of the window would be fully visible on the screen
 and wholly contained within the outside edges of the window,
 or a
 .B BadMatch
 error results.
-If the window has backing-store, 
-then the backing-store contents are returned for regions of the window 
-that are obscured by noninferior windows. 
-If the window does not have backing-store, 
+If the window has backing-store,
+then the backing-store contents are returned for regions of the window
+that are obscured by noninferior windows.
+If the window does not have backing-store,
 the returned contents of such obscured regions are undefined.
 The returned contents of visible regions of inferiors
 of a different depth than the specified window's depth are also undefined.
diff --git a/man/XQueryBestSize.man b/man/XQueryBestSize.man
index 203c01b1..fecf27a1 100644
--- a/man/XQueryBestSize.man
+++ b/man/XQueryBestSize.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ XQueryBestSize, XQueryBestTile, XQueryBestStipple \- determine efficient sizes
 Status XQueryBestSize\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fIclass\fP\^,
 Drawable \fIwhich_screen\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP, unsigned int
 \fIheight\fP\^, unsigned int *\fIwidth_return\fP, unsigned int
-*\fIheight_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIheight_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XQueryBestTile\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable
 \fIwhich_screen\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^,
@@ -61,14 +61,14 @@ unsigned int *\fIwidth_return\fP, unsigned int *\fIheight_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XQueryBestStipple\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable
 \fIwhich_screen\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^,
-unsigned int *\fIwidth_return\fP, unsigned int *\fIheight_return\fP\^); 
+unsigned int *\fIwidth_return\fP, unsigned int *\fIheight_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIclass\fP 1i
 Specifies the class that you are interested in.
-You can pass 
+You can pass
 .BR TileShape ,
 .BR CursorShape ,
-or 
+or
 .BR StippleShape .
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -83,35 +83,35 @@ Specifies any drawable on the screen.
 .br
 .ns
 .IP \fIheight_return\fP 1i
-Return the width and height of the object best supported 
+Return the width and height of the object best supported
 by the display hardware.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B XQueryBestSize
 function returns the best or closest size to the specified size.
-For 
+For
 .BR CursorShape ,
 this is the largest size that can be fully displayed on the screen specified by
 which_screen.
-For 
+For
 .BR TileShape ,
 this is the size that can be tiled fastest.
-For 
+For
 .BR StippleShape ,
 this is the size that can be stippled fastest.
-For 
+For
 .BR CursorShape ,
 the drawable indicates the desired screen.
-For 
+For
 .B TileShape
-and 
+and
 .BR StippleShape ,
 the drawable indicates the screen and possibly the window class and depth.
-An 
+An
 .B InputOnly
-window cannot be used as the drawable for 
+window cannot be used as the drawable for
 .B TileShape
-or 
+or
 .BR StippleShape ,
 or a
 .B BadMatch
@@ -130,9 +130,9 @@ The
 function returns the best or closest size, that is, the size that can be
 tiled fastest on the screen specified by which_screen.
 The drawable indicates the screen and possibly the window class and depth.
-If an 
+If an
 .B InputOnly
-window is used as the drawable, a 
+window is used as the drawable, a
 .B BadMatch
 error results.
 .LP
diff --git a/man/XQueryColor.man b/man/XQueryColor.man
index c39dda97..9fbb8189 100644
--- a/man/XQueryColor.man
+++ b/man/XQueryColor.man
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -52,22 +52,22 @@ XQueryColor, XQueryColors, XLookupColor, XParseColor \- obtain color values
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XQueryColor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap \fIcolormap\fP\^, XColor
-*\fIdef_in_out\fP\^); 
+*\fIdef_in_out\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XQueryColors\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap \fIcolormap\fP\^,
-XColor \fIdefs_in_out\fP[\^]\^, int \fIncolors\fP\^); 
+XColor \fIdefs_in_out\fP[\^]\^, int \fIncolors\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XLookupColor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap \fIcolormap\fP\^,
 char *\fIcolor_name\fP\^, XColor *\fIexact_def_return\fP\^, XColor
-*\fIscreen_def_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIscreen_def_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XParseColor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap \fIcolormap\fP\^,
-char *\fIspec\fP\^, XColor *\fIexact_def_return\fP\^); 
+char *\fIspec\fP\^, XColor *\fIexact_def_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIcolormap\fP 1i
 Specifies the colormap.
 .IP \fIcolor_name\fP 1i
-Specifies the color name string (for example, red) whose color 
+Specifies the color name string (for example, red) whose color
 definition structure you want returned.
 .IP \fIdef_in_out\fP 1i
 Specifies and returns the RGB values for the pixel specified in the structure.
@@ -79,8 +79,8 @@ Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIexact_def_return\fP 1i
 Returns the exact RGB values.
 .IP \fIncolors\fP 1i
-.\"Specifies the number of color definition structures. 
-Specifies the number of 
+.\"Specifies the number of color definition structures.
+Specifies the number of
 .B XColor
 structures in the color definition array.
 .IP \fIscreen_def_return\fP 1i
@@ -132,9 +132,9 @@ The
 function looks up the string name of a color with respect to the screen
 associated with the specified colormap.
 It returns both the exact color values and
-the closest values provided by the screen 
+the closest values provided by the screen
 with respect to the visual type of the specified colormap.
-If the color name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding, 
+If the color name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding,
 the result is implementation-dependent.
 Use of uppercase or lowercase does not matter.
 .B XLookupColor
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ The
 function looks up the string name of a color with respect to the screen
 associated with the specified colormap.
 It returns the exact color value.
-If the color name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding, 
+If the color name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding,
 the result is implementation-dependent.
 Use of uppercase or lowercase does not matter.
 .B XParseColor
@@ -172,7 +172,7 @@ rgb:\fI<red>/<green>/<blue>\fP
 .EE
 .\" End marker code here
 .LP
-Note that \fIh\fP indicates the value scaled in 4 bits, 
+Note that \fIh\fP indicates the value scaled in 4 bits,
 \fIhh\fP the value scaled in 8 bits,
 \fIhhh\fP the value scaled in 12 bits,
 and \fIhhhh\fP the value scaled in 16 bits, respectively.
@@ -191,7 +191,7 @@ l l.
 .TE
 .LP
 The R, G, and B represent single hexadecimal digits.
-When fewer than 16 bits each are specified, 
+When fewer than 16 bits each are specified,
 they represent the most significant bits of the value
 (unlike the \*(lqrgb:\*(rq syntax, in which values are scaled).
 For example, the string \*(lq#3a7\*(rq is the same as \*(lq#3000a0007000\*(rq.
@@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ Note that red, green, and blue are floating-point values
 between 0.0 and 1.0, inclusive.
 The input format for these values is an optional sign,
 a string of numbers possibly containing a decimal point,
-and an optional exponent field containing an E or e 
+and an optional exponent field containing an E or e
 followed by a possibly signed integer string.
 .LP
 The standard device-independent string specifications have
diff --git a/man/XQueryExtension.man b/man/XQueryExtension.man
index 21bdf174..e23075f5 100644
--- a/man/XQueryExtension.man
+++ b/man/XQueryExtension.man
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 .\"
 .\" Rewritten for X.org by Chris Lee <clee@freedesktop.org>
 .\"
-.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this documentation 
+.\" Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this documentation
 .\" for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
 .\" copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
 .\" Chris Lee makes no representations about the suitability for any purpose
diff --git a/man/XQueryPointer.man b/man/XQueryPointer.man
index 954ff3c9..460295c5 100644
--- a/man/XQueryPointer.man
+++ b/man/XQueryPointer.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ XQueryPointer \- get pointer coordinates
 Bool XQueryPointer\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, Window
 *\fIroot_return\fP\^, Window *\fIchild_return\fP\^, int
 *\fIroot_x_return\fP\^, int *\fIroot_y_return\fP\^, int *\fIwin_x_return\fP\^,
-int *\fIwin_y_return\fP\^, unsigned int *\fImask_return\fP\^); 
+int *\fIwin_y_return\fP\^, unsigned int *\fImask_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIchild_return\fP 1i
 Returns the child window that the pointer is located in, if any.
@@ -82,20 +82,20 @@ function returns the root window the pointer is logically on and the pointer
 coordinates relative to the root window's origin.
 If
 .B XQueryPointer
-returns 
+returns
 .BR False ,
 the pointer is not on the same screen as the specified window, and
 .B XQueryPointer
-returns 
+returns
 .B None
 to child_return and zero to win_x_return and win_y_return.
-If 
+If
 .B XQueryPointer
-returns 
+returns
 .BR True ,
 the pointer coordinates returned to win_x_return and win_y_return
 are relative to the origin of the specified window.
-In this case, 
+In this case,
 .B XQueryPointer
 returns the child that contains the pointer, if any,
 or else
@@ -103,10 +103,10 @@ or else
 to child_return.
 .LP
 .B XQueryPointer
-returns the current logical state of the keyboard buttons 
+returns the current logical state of the keyboard buttons
 and the modifier keys in mask_return.
 It sets mask_return to the bitwise inclusive OR of one or more
-of the button or modifier key bitmasks to match 
+of the button or modifier key bitmasks to match
 the current state of the mouse buttons and the modifier keys.
 .LP
 .B XQueryPointer
diff --git a/man/XQueryTree.man b/man/XQueryTree.man
index 210b33c0..63a05516 100644
--- a/man/XQueryTree.man
+++ b/man/XQueryTree.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ XQueryTree \- query window tree information
 .HP
 Status XQueryTree\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, Window
 *\fIroot_return\fP\^, Window *\fIparent_return\fP\^, Window
-**\fIchildren_return\fP\^, unsigned int *\fInchildren_return\fP\^); 
+**\fIchildren_return\fP\^, unsigned int *\fInchildren_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIchildren_return\fP 1i
 Returns the list of children.
@@ -65,20 +65,20 @@ Returns the parent window.
 .IP \fIroot_return\fP 1i
 Returns the root window.
 .IP \fIw\fP 1i
-Specifies the window whose list of children, root, parent, and number of children 
+Specifies the window whose list of children, root, parent, and number of children
 you want to obtain.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B XQueryTree
-function returns the root ID, the parent window ID, 
+function returns the root ID, the parent window ID,
 a pointer to the list of children windows
-(NULL when there are no children), 
+(NULL when there are no children),
 and the number of children in the list for the specified window.
-The children are listed in current stacking order, from bottom-most 
+The children are listed in current stacking order, from bottom-most
 (first) to top-most (last).
 .B XQueryTree
 returns zero if it fails and nonzero if it succeeds.
-To free a non-NULL children list when it is no longer needed, use 
+To free a non-NULL children list when it is no longer needed, use
 .BR XFree .
 .LP
 .B XQueryTree
diff --git a/man/XRaiseWindow.man b/man/XRaiseWindow.man
index acd543cd..9991b5bc 100644
--- a/man/XRaiseWindow.man
+++ b/man/XRaiseWindow.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,24 +50,24 @@
 XRaiseWindow, XLowerWindow, XCirculateSubwindows, XCirculateSubwindowsUp, XCirculateSubwindowsDown, XRestackWindows \- change window stacking order
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-int XRaiseWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^); 
+int XRaiseWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XLowerWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^); 
+int XLowerWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XCirculateSubwindows\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, int
-\fIdirection\fP\^); 
+\fIdirection\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XCirculateSubwindowsUp\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^); 
+int XCirculateSubwindowsUp\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XCirculateSubwindowsDown\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^); 
+int XCirculateSubwindowsDown\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XRestackWindows\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIwindows\fP\^[], int
-\fInwindows\fP\^); 
+\fInwindows\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdirection\fP 1i
 Specifies the direction (up or down) that you want to circulate
-the window. 
-You can pass 
+the window.
+You can pass
 .B RaiseLowest
 or
 .BR LowerHighest .
@@ -85,18 +85,18 @@ The
 function
 raises the specified window to the top of the stack so that no sibling window
 obscures it.
-If the windows are regarded as overlapping sheets of paper stacked 
+If the windows are regarded as overlapping sheets of paper stacked
 on a desk,
 then raising a window is analogous to moving the sheet to the top of
 the stack but leaving its x and y location on the desk constant.
-Raising a mapped window may generate 
+Raising a mapped window may generate
 .B Expose
-events for the window and any mapped subwindows that were formerly obscured.  
+events for the window and any mapped subwindows that were formerly obscured.
 .LP
-If the override-redirect attribute of the window is 
+If the override-redirect attribute of the window is
 .B False
 and some
-other client has selected 
+other client has selected
 .B SubstructureRedirectMask
 on the parent, the X server generates a
 .B ConfigureRequest
@@ -117,18 +117,18 @@ If the windows are regarded as overlapping sheets of paper
 stacked on a desk, then lowering a window is analogous to moving the
 sheet to the bottom of the stack but leaving its x and y location on
 the desk constant.
-Lowering a mapped window will generate 
+Lowering a mapped window will generate
 .B Expose
 events on any windows it formerly obscured.
 .LP
-If the override-redirect attribute of the window is 
+If the override-redirect attribute of the window is
 .B False
 and some
-other client has selected 
+other client has selected
 .B SubstructureRedirectMask
 on the parent, the X server generates a
 .B ConfigureRequest
-event, and no processing is performed.  
+event, and no processing is performed.
 Otherwise, the window is lowered to the bottom of the
 stack.
 .LP
@@ -139,12 +139,12 @@ error.
 .LP
 The
 .B XCirculateSubwindows
-function circulates children of the specified window in the specified 
+function circulates children of the specified window in the specified
 direction.
 If you specify
 .BR RaiseLowest ,
 .B XCirculateSubwindows
-raises the lowest mapped child (if any) that is occluded 
+raises the lowest mapped child (if any) that is occluded
 by another child to the top of the stack.
 If you specify
 .BR LowerHighest ,
@@ -152,15 +152,15 @@ If you specify
 lowers the highest mapped child (if any) that occludes another child
 to the bottom of the stack.
 Exposure processing is then performed on formerly obscured windows.
-If some other client has selected 
+If some other client has selected
 .B SubstructureRedirectMask
-on the window, the X server generates a 
+on the window, the X server generates a
 .B CirculateRequest
 event, and no further processing is performed.
 If a child is actually restacked,
 the X server generates a
 .B CirculateNotify
-event. 
+event.
 .LP
 .B XCirculateSubwindows
 can generate
@@ -216,14 +216,14 @@ a
 .B BadMatch
 error results.
 .LP
-If the override-redirect attribute of a window is 
+If the override-redirect attribute of a window is
 .B False
 and some
-other client has selected 
+other client has selected
 .B SubstructureRedirectMask
-on the parent, the X server generates 
+on the parent, the X server generates
 .B ConfigureRequest
-events for each window whose override-redirect flag is not set, 
+events for each window whose override-redirect flag is not set,
 and no further processing is performed.
 Otherwise, the windows will be restacked in top-to-bottom order.
 .LP
diff --git a/man/XReadBitmapFile.man b/man/XReadBitmapFile.man
index d5a5e7e1..4d43ef4f 100644
--- a/man/XReadBitmapFile.man
+++ b/man/XReadBitmapFile.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -53,30 +53,30 @@ XReadBitmapFile, XReadBitmapFileData, XWriteBitmapFile, XCreatePixmapFromBitmapD
 int XReadBitmapFile(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, char
 *\fIfilename\fP\^, unsigned int *\fIwidth_return\fP, unsigned int
 *\fIheight_return\fP\^, Pixmap *\fIbitmap_return\fP\^, int
-*\fIx_hot_return\fP, int *\fIy_hot_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIx_hot_return\fP, int *\fIy_hot_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XReadBitmapFileData(\^char *\fIfilename\fP\^, unsigned int
 *\fIwidth_return\fP, unsigned int *\fIheight_return\fP\^, unsigned char
-*\fIdata_return\fP\^, int *\fIx_hot_return\fP, int *\fIy_hot_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIdata_return\fP\^, int *\fIx_hot_return\fP, int *\fIy_hot_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XWriteBitmapFile(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, char *\fIfilename\fP\^,
 Pixmap \fIbitmap\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^,
-int \fIx_hot\fP, int \fIy_hot\fP\^); 
+int \fIx_hot\fP, int \fIy_hot\fP\^);
 .HP
 Pixmap XCreatePixmapFromBitmapData\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable
 \fId\fP\^, char *\fIdata\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP, unsigned int
 \fIheight\fP\^, unsigned long \fIfg\fP, unsigned long \fIbg\fP\^, unsigned int
-\fIdepth\fP\^); 
+\fIdepth\fP\^);
 .HP
 Pixmap XCreateBitmapFromData(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^,
-char *\fIdata\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^); 
+char *\fIdata\fP\^, unsigned int \fIwidth\fP, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIbitmap\fP 1i
 Specifies the bitmap.
 .IP \fIbitmap_return\fP 1i
 Returns the bitmap that is created.
 .IP \fId\fP 1i
-Specifies the drawable that indicates the screen. 
+Specifies the drawable that indicates the screen.
 .IP \fIdata\fP 1i
 Specifies the data in bitmap format.
 .IP \fIdata\fP 1i
@@ -121,29 +121,29 @@ The
 .B XReadBitmapFile
 function reads in a file containing a bitmap.
 The file is parsed in the encoding of the current locale.
-The ability to read other than the standard format 
+The ability to read other than the standard format
 is implementation-dependent.
-If the file cannot be opened, 
+If the file cannot be opened,
 .B XReadBitmapFile
-returns 
+returns
 .BR BitmapOpenFailed .
-If the file can be opened but does not contain valid bitmap data, 
-it returns 
+If the file can be opened but does not contain valid bitmap data,
+it returns
 .BR BitmapFileInvalid .
 If insufficient working storage is allocated,
 it returns
 .BR BitmapNoMemory .
 If the file is readable and valid,
-it returns 
+it returns
 .BR BitmapSuccess .
 .LP
 .B XReadBitmapFile
 returns the bitmap's height and width, as read
 from the file, to width_return and height_return.
-It then creates a pixmap of the appropriate size, 
+It then creates a pixmap of the appropriate size,
 reads the bitmap data from the file into the pixmap,
-and assigns the pixmap to the caller's variable bitmap.  
-The caller must free the bitmap using 
+and assigns the pixmap to the caller's variable bitmap.
+The caller must free the bitmap using
 .B XFreePixmap
 when finished.
 If \fIname\fP_x_hot and \fIname\fP_y_hot exist,
@@ -175,8 +175,8 @@ function writes a bitmap out to a file in the X Version 11 format.
 The name used in the output file is derived from the file name
 by deleting the directory prefix.
 The file is written in the encoding of the current locale.
-If the file cannot be opened for writing, 
-it returns 
+If the file cannot be opened for writing,
+it returns
 .BR BitmapOpenFailed .
 If insufficient memory is allocated,
 .B XWriteBitmapFile
@@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ returns
 otherwise, on no error,
 it returns
 .BR BitmapSuccess .
-If x_hot and y_hot are not \-1, \-1, 
+If x_hot and y_hot are not \-1, \-1,
 .B XWriteBitmapFile
 writes them out as the hotspot coordinates for the bitmap.
 .LP
diff --git a/man/XRecolorCursor.man b/man/XRecolorCursor.man
index 1404489a..670e26f0 100644
--- a/man/XRecolorCursor.man
+++ b/man/XRecolorCursor.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,24 +51,24 @@ XRecolorCursor, XFreeCursor, XQueryBestCursor \- manipulate cursors
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XRecolorCursor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Cursor \fIcursor\fP\^, XColor
-*\fIforeground_color\fP\^, XColor *\fIbackground_color\fP\^); 
+*\fIforeground_color\fP\^, XColor *\fIbackground_color\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XFreeCursor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Cursor \fIcursor\fP\^); 
+int XFreeCursor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Cursor \fIcursor\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XQueryBestCursor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^,
 unsigned int \fIwidth\fP\^, unsigned int \fIheight\fP\^, unsigned int
-*\fIwidth_return\fP\^, unsigned int *\fIheight_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIwidth_return\fP\^, unsigned int *\fIheight_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIbackground_color\fP 1i
 Specifies the RGB values for the background of the source.
 .IP \fIcursor\fP 1i
-Specifies the cursor. 
+Specifies the cursor.
 .IP \fId\fP 1i
-Specifies the drawable, which indicates the screen. 
+Specifies the drawable, which indicates the screen.
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIforeground_color\fP 1i
-Specifies the RGB values for the foreground of the source. 
+Specifies the RGB values for the foreground of the source.
 .IP \fIwidth\fP 1i
 .br
 .ns
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Specify the width and height of the cursor that you want the size information fo
 .br
 .ns
 .IP \fIheight_return\fP 1i
-Return the best width and height that is closest to the specified width 
+Return the best width and height that is closest to the specified width
 and height.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ error.
 .LP
 The
 .B XFreeCursor
-function deletes the association between the cursor resource ID 
+function deletes the association between the cursor resource ID
 and the specified cursor.
 The cursor storage is freed when no other resource references it.
 The specified cursor ID should not be referred to again.
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ The
 .B XQueryBestCursor
 function provides a way to find out what size cursors are actually
 possible on the display.
-.IN "Cursor" "limitations" 
+.IN "Cursor" "limitations"
 It returns the largest size that can be displayed.
 Applications should be prepared to use smaller cursors on displays that
 cannot support large ones.
diff --git a/man/XReparentEvent.man b/man/XReparentEvent.man
index 8eda8472..08e432b5 100644
--- a/man/XReparentEvent.man
+++ b/man/XReparentEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -94,15 +94,15 @@ or to the old or the new parent, depending on whether
 .B StructureNotify
 or
 .B SubstructureNotify
-was selected. 
+was selected.
 The window member is set to the window that was reparented.
 The parent member is set to the new parent window.
-The x and y members are set to the reparented window's coordinates relative 
+The x and y members are set to the reparented window's coordinates relative
 to the new parent window's
 origin and define the upper-left outer corner of the reparented window.
 The override_redirect member is set to the override-redirect attribute of the
 window specified by the window member.
-Window manager clients normally should ignore this window 
+Window manager clients normally should ignore this window
 if the override_redirect member is
 .BR True .
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
diff --git a/man/XReparentWindow.man b/man/XReparentWindow.man
index 5b34f21b..a25225ea 100644
--- a/man/XReparentWindow.man
+++ b/man/XReparentWindow.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ XReparentWindow \- reparent windows
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XReparentWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, Window
-\fIparent\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^); 
+\fIparent\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ request on it.
 .LP
 The X server performs normal exposure processing on formerly obscured
 windows.
-The X server might not generate 
+The X server might not generate
 .B Expose
 events for regions from the initial
 .B UnmapWindow
diff --git a/man/XResizeRequestEvent.man b/man/XResizeRequestEvent.man
index 40fbf479..8e1c3f03 100644
--- a/man/XResizeRequestEvent.man
+++ b/man/XResizeRequestEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -86,9 +86,9 @@ but expanded from the 16-bit least-significant bits to a full 32-bit value.
 The window member is set to the window that is most useful to toolkit
 dispatchers.
 .LP
-The window member is set to the window whose size another 
+The window member is set to the window whose size another
 client attempted to change.
-The width and height members are set to the inside size of the window, 
+The width and height members are set to the inside size of the window,
 excluding the border.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 XAnyEvent(__libmansuffix__),
diff --git a/man/XResourceManagerString.man b/man/XResourceManagerString.man
index b8701857..e4d83d38 100644
--- a/man/XResourceManagerString.man
+++ b/man/XResourceManagerString.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,9 +50,9 @@
 XResourceManagerString, XScreenResourceString \- obtain server resource properties
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-char *XResourceManagerString\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+char *XResourceManagerString\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .HP
-char *XScreenResourceString\^(\^Screen *\fIscreen\fP\^); 
+char *XScreenResourceString\^(\^Screen *\fIscreen\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ function returns the RESOURCE_MANAGER property from the server's root
 window of screen zero, which was returned when the connection was opened using
 .BR XOpenDisplay .
 The property is converted from type STRING to the current locale.
-The conversion is identical to that produced by 
+The conversion is identical to that produced by
 .B XmbTextPropertyToTextList
 for a single element STRING property.
 The returned string is owned by Xlib and should not be freed by the client.
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ The
 function returns the SCREEN_RESOURCES property from the root window of the
 specified screen.
 The property is converted from type STRING to the current locale.
-The conversion is identical to that produced by 
+The conversion is identical to that produced by
 .B XmbTextPropertyToTextList
 for a single element STRING property.
 The property value must be in a format that is acceptable to
diff --git a/man/XSaveContext.man b/man/XSaveContext.man
index 7507a0d3..58782811 100644
--- a/man/XSaveContext.man
+++ b/man/XSaveContext.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,18 +51,18 @@ XSaveContext, XFindContext, XDeleteContext, XUniqueContext \- associative look-u
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XSaveContext(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XID \fIrid\fP\^, XContext
-\fIcontext\fP\^, XPointer \fIdata\fP\^); 
+\fIcontext\fP\^, XPointer \fIdata\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XFindContext(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XID \fIrid\fP\^, XContext
-\fIcontext\fP\^, XPointer *\fIdata_return\fP\^); 
+\fIcontext\fP\^, XPointer *\fIdata_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XDeleteContext(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XID \fIrid\fP, XContext
-\fIcontext\fP); 
+\fIcontext\fP);
 .LP
-XContext XUniqueContext(void); 
+XContext XUniqueContext(void);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIcontext\fP 1i
-Specifies the context type to which the data belongs. 
+Specifies the context type to which the data belongs.
 .IP \fIdata\fP 1i
 Specifies the data to be associated with the window and type.
 .IP \fIdata_return\fP 1i
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Possible errors are
 .LP
 The
 .B XDeleteContext
-function deletes the entry for the given resource ID 
+function deletes the entry for the given resource ID
 and type from the data structure.
 This function returns the same error codes that
 .B XFindContext
diff --git a/man/XSelectInput.man b/man/XSelectInput.man
index 9e3f5f8c..1fcb1692 100644
--- a/man/XSelectInput.man
+++ b/man/XSelectInput.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ XSelectInput \- select input events
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XSelectInput\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, long
-\fIevent_mask\fP\^); 
+\fIevent_mask\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ Specifies the window whose events you are interested in.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B XSelectInput
-function requests that the X server report the events associated with the 
+function requests that the X server report the events associated with the
 specified event mask.
 Initially, X will not report any of these events.
 Events are reported relative to a window.
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ event, which is associated with
 the event mask
 .BR ResizeRedirectMask .
 .IP \(bu 5
-Only one client at a time can select a 
+Only one client at a time can select a
 .B ButtonPress
 event, which is associated with
 the event mask
diff --git a/man/XSelectionClearEvent.man b/man/XSelectionClearEvent.man
index ba0905fa..50d97b3c 100644
--- a/man/XSelectionClearEvent.man
+++ b/man/XSelectionClearEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ The window member is set to the window that is most useful to toolkit
 dispatchers.
 .LP
 The selection member is set to the selection atom.
-The time member is set to the last change time recorded for the 
+The time member is set to the last change time recorded for the
 selection.
 The window member is the window that was specified by the current owner
 (the owner losing the selection) in its
diff --git a/man/XSelectionEvent.man b/man/XSelectionEvent.man
index 7f867696..4f68b810 100644
--- a/man/XSelectionEvent.man
+++ b/man/XSelectionEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -97,7 +97,7 @@ The target member is set to the atom that indicates the converted type.
 For example, PIXMAP is used for a pixmap.
 The property member is set to the atom that indicates which
 property the result was stored on.
-If the conversion failed, 
+If the conversion failed,
 the property member is set to
 .BR None .
 The time member is set to the time the conversion took place and
diff --git a/man/XSelectionRequestEvent.man b/man/XSelectionRequestEvent.man
index 27f1d89d..e27a3705 100644
--- a/man/XSelectionRequestEvent.man
+++ b/man/XSelectionRequestEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -99,9 +99,9 @@ The selection member is set to the atom that names the selection.
 For example, PRIMARY is used to indicate the primary selection.
 The target member is set to the atom that indicates the type
 the selection is desired in.
-The property member can be a property name or 
+The property member can be a property name or
 .BR None .
-The time member is set to the timestamp or 
+The time member is set to the timestamp or
 .B CurrentTime
 value from the
 .B ConvertSelection
diff --git a/man/XSendEvent.man b/man/XSendEvent.man
index 136395bd..d72a90c4 100644
--- a/man/XSendEvent.man
+++ b/man/XSendEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,12 +51,12 @@ XSendEvent, XDisplayMotionBufferSize, XGetMotionEvents, XTimeCoord \- send event
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 Status XSendEvent\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, Bool
-\fIpropagate\fP\^, long \fIevent_mask\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_send\fP\^); 
+\fIpropagate\fP\^, long \fIevent_mask\fP\^, XEvent *\fIevent_send\fP\^);
 .HP
-unsigned long XDisplayMotionBufferSize\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+unsigned long XDisplayMotionBufferSize\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .HP
 XTimeCoord *XGetMotionEvents\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
-Time \fIstart\fP\^, Time \fIstop\fP\^, int *\fInevents_return\fP\^); 
+Time \fIstart\fP\^, Time \fIstop\fP\^, int *\fInevents_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -84,8 +84,8 @@ Specifies the window the window the event is to be sent to.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B XSendEvent
-function identifies the destination window, 
-determines which clients should receive the specified events, 
+function identifies the destination window,
+determines which clients should receive the specified events,
 and ignores any active grabs.
 This function requires you to pass an event mask.
 For a discussion of the valid event mask names,
@@ -98,8 +98,8 @@ the destination window is the window that contains the pointer.
 .IP \(bu 5
 If w is
 .B InputFocus
-and if the focus window contains the pointer, 
-the destination window is the window that contains the pointer; 
+and if the focus window contains the pointer,
+the destination window is the window that contains the pointer;
 otherwise, the destination window is the focus window.
 .LP
 To determine which clients should receive the specified events,
@@ -111,20 +111,20 @@ the event is sent to the client that created the destination window.
 If that client no longer exists,
 no event is sent.
 .IP \(bu 5
-If propagate is 
+If propagate is
 .BR False ,
 the event is sent to every client selecting on destination any of the event
 types in the event_mask argument.
 .IP \(bu 5
-If propagate is 
+If propagate is
 .B True
 and no clients have selected on destination any of
 the event types in event-mask, the destination is replaced with the
 closest ancestor of destination for which some client has selected a
 type in event-mask and for which no intervening window has that type in its
-do-not-propagate-mask. 
+do-not-propagate-mask.
 If no such window exists or if the window is
-an ancestor of the focus window and 
+an ancestor of the focus window and
 .B InputFocus
 was originally specified
 as the destination, the event is not sent to any clients.
@@ -134,10 +134,10 @@ destination any of the types specified in event_mask.
 The event in the
 .B XEvent
 structure must be one of the core events or one of the events
-defined by an extension (or a 
+defined by an extension (or a
 .B BadValue
-error results) so that the X server can correctly byte-swap 
-the contents as necessary.  
+error results) so that the X server can correctly byte-swap
+the contents as necessary.
 The contents of the event are
 otherwise unaltered and unchecked by the X server except to force send_event to
 .B True
@@ -170,9 +170,9 @@ function returns all events in the motion history buffer that fall between the
 specified start and stop times, inclusive, and that have coordinates
 that lie within the specified window (including its borders) at its present
 placement.
-If the server does not support motion history, 
+If the server does not support motion history,
 if the start time is later than the stop time,
-or if the start time is in the future, 
+or if the start time is in the future,
 no events are returned;
 .B XGetMotionEvents
 returns NULL.
@@ -194,7 +194,7 @@ typedef struct {
 } XTimeCoord;
 .EE
 .LP
-The time member is set to the time, in milliseconds. 
+The time member is set to the time, in milliseconds.
 The x and y members are set to the coordinates of the pointer and
 are reported relative to the origin
 of the specified window.
diff --git a/man/XSetArcMode.man b/man/XSetArcMode.man
index 97593805..65c59e86 100644
--- a/man/XSetArcMode.man
+++ b/man/XSetArcMode.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,13 +51,13 @@ XSetArcMode, XSetSubwindowMode, XSetGraphicsExposure \- GC convenience routines
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XSetArcMode\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, int
-\fIarc_mode\fP\^); 
+\fIarc_mode\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XSetSubwindowMode\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, int
-\fIsubwindow_mode\fP\^); 
+\fIsubwindow_mode\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XSetGraphicsExposures\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, Bool
-\fIgraphics_exposures\fP\^); 
+\fIgraphics_exposures\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIarc_mode\fP 1i
 Specifies the arc mode.
diff --git a/man/XSetClipOrigin.man b/man/XSetClipOrigin.man
index c0232670..6e35c744 100644
--- a/man/XSetClipOrigin.man
+++ b/man/XSetClipOrigin.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,14 +51,14 @@ XSetClipOrigin, XSetClipMask, XSetClipRectangles \- GC convenience routines
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XSetClipOrigin\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, int
-\fIclip_x_origin\fP\^, int \fIclip_y_origin\fP\^); 
+\fIclip_x_origin\fP\^, int \fIclip_y_origin\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XSetClipMask\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, Pixmap
-\fIpixmap\fP\^); 
+\fIpixmap\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XSetClipRectangles\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, int
 \fIclip_x_origin\fP\^, int \fIclip_y_origin\fP\^, XRectangle
-\fIrectangles\fP[]\^, int \fIn\fP\^, int \fIordering\fP\^); 
+\fIrectangles\fP[]\^, int \fIn\fP\^, int \fIordering\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ Specify the x and y coordinates of the clip-mask origin.
 .IP \fIgc\fP 1i
 Specifies the GC.
 .IP \fIn\fP 1i
-Specifies the number of rectangles. 
+Specifies the number of rectangles.
 .IP \fIordering\fP 1i
 Specifies the ordering relations on the rectangles.
 You can pass
@@ -116,16 +116,16 @@ errors.
 .LP
 The
 .B XSetClipRectangles
-function changes the clip-mask in the specified GC 
+function changes the clip-mask in the specified GC
 to the specified list of rectangles and sets the clip origin.
 The output is clipped to remain contained within the
 rectangles.
 The clip-origin is interpreted relative to the origin of
-whatever destination drawable is specified in a graphics request.  
-The rectangle coordinates are interpreted relative to the clip-origin.  
+whatever destination drawable is specified in a graphics request.
+The rectangle coordinates are interpreted relative to the clip-origin.
 The rectangles should be nonintersecting, or the graphics results will be
 undefined.
-Note that the list of rectangles can be empty, 
+Note that the list of rectangles can be empty,
 which effectively disables output.
 This is the opposite of passing
 .B None
@@ -136,9 +136,9 @@ and
 .BR XSetClipMask .
 .LP
 If known by the client, ordering relations on the rectangles can be
-specified with the ordering argument. 
+specified with the ordering argument.
 This may provide faster operation
-by the server. 
+by the server.
 If an incorrect ordering is specified, the X server may generate a
 .B BadMatch
 error, but it is not required to do so.
@@ -149,13 +149,13 @@ means the rectangles are in arbitrary order.
 .B YSorted
 means that the rectangles are nondecreasing in their Y origin.
 .B YXSorted
-additionally constrains 
+additionally constrains
 .B YSorted
 order in that all
 rectangles with an equal Y origin are nondecreasing in their X
-origin.  
+origin.
 .B YXBanded
-additionally constrains 
+additionally constrains
 .B YXSorted
 by requiring that,
 for every possible Y scanline, all rectangles that include that
diff --git a/man/XSetCloseDownMode.man b/man/XSetCloseDownMode.man
index 8f621ba5..18d34bc2 100644
--- a/man/XSetCloseDownMode.man
+++ b/man/XSetCloseDownMode.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,13 +50,13 @@
 XSetCloseDownMode, XKillClient \- control clients
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-int XSetCloseDownMode\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fIclose_mode\fP\^); 
+int XSetCloseDownMode\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fIclose_mode\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XKillClient\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XID \fIresource\fP\^); 
+int XKillClient\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XID \fIresource\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIclose_mode\fP 1i
 Specifies the client close-down mode.
-You can pass 
+You can pass
 .BR DestroyAll ,
 .BR RetainPermanent ,
 or
@@ -92,13 +92,13 @@ forces a close down of the client
 that created the resource
 if a valid resource is specified.
 If the client has already terminated in
-either 
+either
 .B RetainPermanent
-or 
+or
 .B RetainTemporary
 mode, all of the client's
 resources are destroyed.
-If 
+If
 .B AllTemporary
 is specified, the resources of all clients that have terminated in
 .B RetainTemporary
@@ -107,8 +107,8 @@ This permits implementation of window manager facilities that aid debugging.
 A client can set its close-down mode to
 .BR RetainTemporary .
 If the client then crashes,
-its windows would not be destroyed. 
-The programmer can then inspect the application's window tree 
+its windows would not be destroyed.
+The programmer can then inspect the application's window tree
 and use the window manager to destroy the zombie windows.
 .LP
 .B XKillClient
diff --git a/man/XSetCommand.man b/man/XSetCommand.man
index d0861efc..321aee40 100644
--- a/man/XSetCommand.man
+++ b/man/XSetCommand.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,10 +51,10 @@ XSetCommand, XGetCommand \- set or read a window's WM_COMMAND property
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XSetCommand\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, char
-**\fIargv\fP\^, int \fIargc\fP\^); 
+**\fIargv\fP\^, int \fIargc\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XGetCommand\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, char
-***\fIargv_return\fP\^, int *\fIargc_return\fP\^); 
+***\fIargv_return\fP\^, int *\fIargc_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIargc\fP 1i
 Specifies the number of arguments.
@@ -84,13 +84,13 @@ and
 .B BadWindow
 errors.
 .LP
-The 
+The
 .B XGetCommand
-function reads the WM_COMMAND property from the specified window 
+function reads the WM_COMMAND property from the specified window
 and returns a string list.
-If the WM_COMMAND property exists, 
+If the WM_COMMAND property exists,
 it is of type STRING and format 8.
-If sufficient memory can be allocated to contain the string list, 
+If sufficient memory can be allocated to contain the string list,
 .B XGetCommand
 fills in the argv_return and argc_return arguments
 and returns a nonzero status.
diff --git a/man/XSetErrorHandler.man b/man/XSetErrorHandler.man
index f35860b4..f04b3b49 100644
--- a/man/XSetErrorHandler.man
+++ b/man/XSetErrorHandler.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,19 +51,19 @@ XSetErrorHandler, XGetErrorText, XDisplayName, XSetIOErrorHandler, XGetErrorData
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int (*XSetErrorHandler\^(\^int (\^*\^\fIhandler\fP\^)\^(Display *, XErrorEvent
-*)\^)\^)\^(\^); 
+*)\^)\^)\^(\^);
 .HP
 int XGetErrorText\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fIcode\fP\^, char
-*\fIbuffer_return\fP\^, int \fIlength\fP\^); 
+*\fIbuffer_return\fP\^, int \fIlength\fP\^);
 .HP
-char *XDisplayName\^(\^char *\fIstring\fP\^); 
+char *XDisplayName\^(\^char *\fIstring\fP\^);
 .HP
 int (*XSetIOErrorHandler\^(\^int (\^*\^\fIhandler\fP\^)(Display
-*)\^)\^)\^(\^); 
+*)\^)\^)\^(\^);
 .HP
 int XGetErrorDatabaseText\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, char *\fIname\fP, char
 *\fImessage\fP\^, char *\fIdefault_string\fP\^, char *\fIbuffer_return\fP\^,
-int \fIlength\fP\^); 
+int \fIlength\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIbuffer_return\fP 1i
 Returns the error description.
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ errors from a
 protocol request.
 These errors generally are reflected back to the program through the
 procedural interface.
-Because this condition is not assumed to be fatal, 
+Because this condition is not assumed to be fatal,
 it is acceptable for your error handler to return;
 the returned value is ignored.
 However, the error handler should not
@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ and error strings.
 .LP
 The
 .B XDisplayName
-function returns the name of the display that 
+function returns the name of the display that
 .B XOpenDisplay
 would attempt to use.
 If a NULL string is specified,
@@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ the major request protocol number is used for the message argument.
 For an extension request,
 the extension name (as given by
 .BR InitExtension )
-followed by a period (\.) and the minor request protocol number 
+followed by a period (\.) and the minor request protocol number
 is used for the message argument.
 If no string is found in the error database,
 the default_string is returned to the buffer argument.
diff --git a/man/XSetEventQueueOwner.man b/man/XSetEventQueueOwner.man
index f49ac714..4ae2fd73 100644
--- a/man/XSetEventQueueOwner.man
+++ b/man/XSetEventQueueOwner.man
@@ -26,7 +26,7 @@ XSetEventQueueOwner \- set event queue owner on a shared Xlib/XCB connection
 .HP
  #include <X11/Xlib-xcb.h>
 .HP
-void XSetEventQueueOwner(Display *\fIdpy\fP, enum XEventQueueOwner \fIowner\fP); 
+void XSetEventQueueOwner(Display *\fIdpy\fP, enum XEventQueueOwner \fIowner\fP);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdpy\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
diff --git a/man/XSetFillStyle.man b/man/XSetFillStyle.man
index 1e5a17f4..0ad0ff8d 100644
--- a/man/XSetFillStyle.man
+++ b/man/XSetFillStyle.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,16 +51,16 @@ XSetFillStyle, XSetFillRule \- GC convenience routines
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XSetFillStyle\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, int
-\fIfill_style\fP\^); 
+\fIfill_style\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XSetFillRule\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, int
-\fIfill_rule\fP\^); 
+\fIfill_rule\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIfill_rule\fP 1i
 Specifies the fill-rule you want to set for the specified GC.
-You can pass 
+You can pass
 .B EvenOddRule
 or
 .BR WindingRule .
diff --git a/man/XSetFont.man b/man/XSetFont.man
index 8ff30472..5b89db47 100644
--- a/man/XSetFont.man
+++ b/man/XSetFont.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@
 XSetFont \- GC convenience routines
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-int XSetFont\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, Font \fIfont\fP\^); 
+int XSetFont\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, Font \fIfont\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
diff --git a/man/XSetFontPath.man b/man/XSetFontPath.man
index f3594302..0515d6e3 100644
--- a/man/XSetFontPath.man
+++ b/man/XSetFontPath.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,11 +50,11 @@
 XSetFontPath, XGetFontPath, XFreeFontPath \- set, get, or free the font search path
 .SH SYNTAX
 int XSetFontPath\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, char **\fIdirectories\fP\^, int
-\fIndirs\fP\^); 
+\fIndirs\fP\^);
 .HP
 char **XGetFontPath\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int *\fInpaths_return\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XFreeFontPath\^(\^char **\fIlist\fP\^); 
+int XFreeFontPath\^(\^char **\fIlist\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdirectories\fP 1i
 Specifies the directory path used to look for a font.
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ The
 function defines the directory search path for font lookup.
 There is only one search path per X server, not one per client.
 The encoding and interpretation of the strings are implementation-dependent,
-but typically they specify directories or font servers to be searched 
+but typically they specify directories or font servers to be searched
 in the order listed.
 An X server is permitted to cache font information internally;
 for example, it might cache an entire font from a file and not
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ check on subsequent opens of that font to see if the underlying
 font file has changed.
 However,
 when the font path is changed,
-the X server is guaranteed to flush all cached information about fonts 
+the X server is guaranteed to flush all cached information about fonts
 for which there currently are no explicit resource IDs allocated.
 The meaning of an error from this request is implementation-dependent.
 .LP
diff --git a/man/XSetICFocus.man b/man/XSetICFocus.man
index c5d10a6b..01f6a768 100644
--- a/man/XSetICFocus.man
+++ b/man/XSetICFocus.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,9 +50,9 @@
 XSetICFocus, XUnsetICFocus \- set and unset input context focus
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-void XSetICFocus\^(\^XIC \fIic\fP\^); 
+void XSetICFocus\^(\^XIC \fIic\fP\^);
 .HP
-void XUnsetICFocus\^(\^XIC \fIic\fP\^); 
+void XUnsetICFocus\^(\^XIC \fIic\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIic\fP 1i
 Specifies the input context.
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Complete feedback specification is a matter of user interface policy.
 Calling
 .B XUnsetICFocus
 does not affect the focus window value;
-the client may still receive 
+the client may still receive
 events from the input method that are directed to the focus window.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 XCreateIC(__libmansuffix__),
diff --git a/man/XSetICValues.man b/man/XSetICValues.man
index 2227785d..966d47b0 100644
--- a/man/XSetICValues.man
+++ b/man/XSetICValues.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,9 +50,9 @@
 XSetICValues, XGetICValues \- set and obtain XIC values
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-char * XSetICValues\^(\^XIC \fIic\fP, ...\^); 
+char * XSetICValues\^(\^XIC \fIic\fP, ...\^);
 .HP
-char * XGetICValues\^(\^XIC \fIic\fP, ...\^); 
+char * XGetICValues\^(\^XIC \fIic\fP, ...\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIic\fP 1i
 Specifies the input context.
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Specifies the variable length argument list to set or get XIC values.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B XSetICValues
-function returns NULL if no error occurred; 
+function returns NULL if no error occurred;
 otherwise,
 it returns the name of the first argument that could not be set.
 An argument might not be set for any of the following reasons:
diff --git a/man/XSetInputFocus.man b/man/XSetInputFocus.man
index f7e5ade3..258c8a9a 100644
--- a/man/XSetInputFocus.man
+++ b/man/XSetInputFocus.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,10 +51,10 @@ XSetInputFocus, XGetInputFocus \- control input focus
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XSetInputFocus\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIfocus\fP\^, int
-\fIrevert_to\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^); 
+\fIrevert_to\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XGetInputFocus\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window *\fIfocus_return\fP\^,
-int *\fIrevert_to_return\fP\^); 
+int *\fIrevert_to_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -66,21 +66,21 @@ or
 .IP \fIfocus_return\fP 1i
 Returns the focus window,
 .BR PointerRoot ,
-or 
+or
 .BR None .
 .IP \fIrevert_to\fP 1i
 Specifies where the input focus reverts to if the window becomes not
 viewable.
-You can pass 
+You can pass
 .BR RevertToParent ,
 .BR RevertToPointerRoot ,
-or 
+or
 .BR RevertToNone .
 .IP \fIrevert_to_return\fP 1i
 Returns the current focus state
-.Pn ( RevertToParent , 
+.Pn ( RevertToParent ,
 .BR RevertToPointerRoot ,
-or 
+or
 .BR RevertToNone ).
 .IP \fItime\fP 1i
 Specifies the time.
@@ -93,54 +93,54 @@ function changes the input focus and the last-focus-change time.
 It has no effect if the specified time is earlier than the current
 last-focus-change time or is later than the current X server time.
 Otherwise, the last-focus-change time is set to the specified time
-.Pn ( CurrentTime 
+.Pn ( CurrentTime
 is replaced by the current X server time).
 .B XSetInputFocus
 causes the X server to generate
 .B FocusIn
-and 
+and
 .B FocusOut
 events.
 .LP
 Depending on the focus argument,
-the following occurs: 
+the following occurs:
 .IP \(bu 5
 If focus is
 .BR None ,
 all keyboard events are discarded until a new focus window is set,
 and the revert_to argument is ignored.
 .IP \(bu 5
-If focus is a window, 
+If focus is a window,
 it becomes the keyboard's focus window.
 If a generated keyboard event would normally be reported to this window
-or one of its inferiors, the event is reported as usual. 
+or one of its inferiors, the event is reported as usual.
 Otherwise, the event is reported relative to the focus window.
 .IP \(bu 5
 If focus is
 .BR PointerRoot ,
-the focus window is dynamically taken to be the root window of whatever screen 
-the pointer is on at each keyboard event.  
+the focus window is dynamically taken to be the root window of whatever screen
+the pointer is on at each keyboard event.
 In this case, the revert_to argument is ignored.
 .LP
-The specified focus window must be viewable at the time 
+The specified focus window must be viewable at the time
 .B XSetInputFocus
 is called,
 or a
 .B BadMatch
 error results.
-If the focus window later becomes not viewable, 
+If the focus window later becomes not viewable,
 the X server
-evaluates the revert_to argument to determine the new focus window as follows: 
+evaluates the revert_to argument to determine the new focus window as follows:
 .IP \(bu 5
 If revert_to is
 .BR RevertToParent ,
-the focus reverts to the parent (or the closest viewable ancestor), 
+the focus reverts to the parent (or the closest viewable ancestor),
 and the new revert_to value is taken to be
 .BR RevertToNone .
 .IP \(bu 5
 If revert_to is
 .B RevertToPointerRoot
-or 
+or
 .BR RevertToNone ,
 the focus reverts to
 .B PointerRoot
diff --git a/man/XSetLineAttributes.man b/man/XSetLineAttributes.man
index 1a42b98d..aa7245b5 100644
--- a/man/XSetLineAttributes.man
+++ b/man/XSetLineAttributes.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -52,10 +52,10 @@ XSetLineAttributes, XSetDashes \- GC convenience routines
 .HP
 int XSetLineAttributes\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, unsigned
 int \fIline_width\fP\^, int \fIline_style\fP\^, int \fIcap_style\fP\^, int
-\fIjoin_style\fP\^); 
+\fIjoin_style\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XSetDashes\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, int
-\fIdash_offset\fP\^, char \fIdash_list\fP[]\^, int \fIn\fP\^); 
+\fIdash_offset\fP\^, char \fIdash_list\fP[]\^, int \fIn\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIcap_style\fP 1i
 Specifies the line-style and cap-style you want to set for the specified GC.
@@ -67,10 +67,10 @@ or
 .BR CapProjecting .
 .IP \fIdash_list\fP 1i
 Specifies the dash-list for the dashed line-style
-you want to set for the specified GC. 
+you want to set for the specified GC.
 .IP \fIdash_offset\fP 1i
 Specifies the phase of the pattern for the dashed line-style you want to set
-for the specified GC. 
+for the specified GC.
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIgc\fP 1i
@@ -92,7 +92,7 @@ or
 .IP \fIline_width\fP 1i
 Specifies the line-width you want to set for the specified GC.
 .IP \fIn\fP 1i
-Specifies the number of elements in dash_list. 
+Specifies the number of elements in dash_list.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B XSetLineAttributes
@@ -113,8 +113,8 @@ in the specified GC.
 There must be at least one element in the specified dash_list,
 or a
 .B BadValue
-error results. 
-The initial and alternating elements (second, fourth, and so on) 
+error results.
+The initial and alternating elements (second, fourth, and so on)
 of the dash_list are the even dashes, and
 the others are the odd dashes.
 Each element specifies a dash length in pixels.
diff --git a/man/XSetPointerMapping.man b/man/XSetPointerMapping.man
index 9043e284..de1b23ab 100644
--- a/man/XSetPointerMapping.man
+++ b/man/XSetPointerMapping.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,10 +51,10 @@ XSetPointerMapping, XGetPointerMapping \- manipulate pointer settings
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XSetPointerMapping\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, unsigned char
-\fImap\fP\^[]\^, int \fInmap\fP\^); 
+\fImap\fP\^[]\^, int \fInmap\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XGetPointerMapping\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, unsigned char
-\fImap_return\fP\^[]\^, int \fInmap\fP\^); 
+\fImap_return\fP\^[]\^, int \fInmap\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Pointer buttons are numbered starting from one.
 returns the number of physical buttons actually on the pointer.
 The nominal mapping for a pointer is map[i]=i+1.
 The nmap argument specifies the length of the array where the pointer
-mapping is returned, and only the first nmap elements are returned 
+mapping is returned, and only the first nmap elements are returned
 in map_return.
 .SH DIAGNOSTICS
 .TP 1i
diff --git a/man/XSetScreenSaver.man b/man/XSetScreenSaver.man
index d07791d2..2d047986 100644
--- a/man/XSetScreenSaver.man
+++ b/man/XSetScreenSaver.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -52,17 +52,17 @@ XSetScreenSaver, XForceScreenSaver, XActivateScreenSaver, XResetScreenSaver, XGe
 .HP
 int XSetScreenSaver\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fItimeout\fP\^,
 int \fIinterval\fP\^, int \fIprefer_blanking\fP\^, int
-\fIallow_exposures\fP\^); 
+\fIallow_exposures\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XForceScreenSaver\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fImode\fP\^); 
+int XForceScreenSaver\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fImode\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XActivateScreenSaver\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+int XActivateScreenSaver\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XResetScreenSaver\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+int XResetScreenSaver\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XGetScreenSaver\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int *\fItimeout_return\fP\^,
 int *\fIinterval_return\fP\^, int *\fIprefer_blanking_return\fP\^, int
-*\fIallow_exposures_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIallow_exposures_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIallow_exposures\fP 1i
 Specifies the screen save control values.
@@ -107,12 +107,12 @@ Specifies the timeout, in seconds, until the screen saver turns on.
 .IP \fItimeout_return\fP 1i
 Returns the timeout, in seconds, until the screen saver turns on.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-Timeout and interval are specified in seconds. 
-A timeout of 0 disables the screen saver 
+Timeout and interval are specified in seconds.
+A timeout of 0 disables the screen saver
 (but an activated screen saver is not deactivated),
 and a timeout of \-1 restores the default.
 Other negative values generate a
 .B BadValue
 error.
-If the timeout value is nonzero, 
+If the timeout value is nonzero,
 .B XSetScreenSaver
diff --git a/man/XSetSelectionOwner.man b/man/XSetSelectionOwner.man
index 024f816b..d1d90db1 100644
--- a/man/XSetSelectionOwner.man
+++ b/man/XSetSelectionOwner.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,14 +51,14 @@ XSetSelectionOwner, XGetSelectionOwner, XConvertSelection \- manipulate window s
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XSetSelectionOwner\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Atom \fIselection\fP\^,
-Window \fIowner\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^); 
+Window \fIowner\fP\^, Time \fItime\fP\^);
 .HP
 Window XGetSelectionOwner\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Atom
-\fIselection\fP\^); 
+\fIselection\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XConvertSelection\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Atom \fIselection\fP\^,
 Atom \fItarget\fP\^, Atom \fIproperty\fP\^, Window \fIrequestor\fP\^, Time
-\fItime\fP\^); 
+\fItime\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ The
 .B XSetSelectionOwner
 function changes the owner and last-change time for the specified selection
 and has no effect if the specified time is earlier than the current
-last-change time of the specified selection 
+last-change time of the specified selection
 or is later than the current X server time.
 Otherwise, the last-change time is set to the specified time,
 with
@@ -93,19 +93,19 @@ with
 replaced by the current server time.
 If the owner window is specified as
 .BR None ,
-then the owner of the selection becomes 
+then the owner of the selection becomes
 .B None
 (that is, no owner).
 Otherwise, the owner of the selection becomes the client executing
 the request.
-.LP 
+.LP
 If the new owner (whether a client or
 .BR None )
 is not
 the same as the current owner of the selection and the current
 owner is not
 .BR None ,
-the current owner is sent a 
+the current owner is sent a
 .B SelectionClear
 event.
 If the client that is the owner of a selection is later
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ reverts to
 but the last-change time is not affected.
 The selection atom is uninterpreted by the X server.
 .B XGetSelectionOwner
-returns the owner window, which is reported in 
+returns the owner window, which is reported in
 .B SelectionRequest
 and
 .B SelectionClear
diff --git a/man/XSetState.man b/man/XSetState.man
index 8c4a59ab..3cfda708 100644
--- a/man/XSetState.man
+++ b/man/XSetState.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -52,19 +52,19 @@ XSetState, XSetFunction, XSetPlaneMask, XSetForeground, XSetBackground \- GC con
 .HP
 int XSetState\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, unsigned long
 \fIforeground\fP\^, unsigned int \fIbackground\fP\^, int \fIfunction\fP\^,
-unsigned long \fIplane_mask\fP\^); 
+unsigned long \fIplane_mask\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XSetFunction\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, int
-\fIfunction\fP\^); 
+\fIfunction\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XSetPlaneMask\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, unsigned long
-\fIplane_mask\fP\^); 
+\fIplane_mask\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XSetForeground\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, unsigned long
-\fIforeground\fP\^); 
+\fIforeground\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XSetBackground\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, unsigned long
-\fIbackground\fP\^); 
+\fIbackground\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIbackground\fP 1i
 Specifies the background you want to set for the specified GC.
diff --git a/man/XSetTextProperty.man b/man/XSetTextProperty.man
index db4700a8..6d2eddda 100644
--- a/man/XSetTextProperty.man
+++ b/man/XSetTextProperty.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,10 +51,10 @@ XSetTextProperty, XGetTextProperty \- set and read text properties
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 void XSetTextProperty\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
-XTextProperty *\fItext_prop\fP\^, Atom \fIproperty\fP\^); 
+XTextProperty *\fItext_prop\fP\^, Atom \fIproperty\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XGetTextProperty\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
-XTextProperty *\fItext_prop_return\fP\^, Atom \fIproperty\fP\^); 
+XTextProperty *\fItext_prop_return\fP\^, Atom \fIproperty\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -71,9 +71,9 @@ structure.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B XSetTextProperty
-function replaces the existing specified property for the named window 
-with the data, type, format, and number of items determined 
-by the value field, the encoding field, the format field, 
+function replaces the existing specified property for the named window
+with the data, type, format, and number of items determined
+by the value field, the encoding field, the format field,
 and the nitems field, respectively, of the specified
 .B XTextProperty
 structure.
@@ -98,25 +98,25 @@ and stores the data in the returned
 structure.
 It stores the data in the value field,
 the type of the data in the encoding field,
-the format of the data in the format field, 
+the format of the data in the format field,
 and the number of items of data in the nitems field.
-An extra byte containing null (which is not included in the nitems member) 
+An extra byte containing null (which is not included in the nitems member)
 is stored at the end of the value field of text_prop_return.
-The particular interpretation of the property's encoding 
+The particular interpretation of the property's encoding
 and data as text is left to the calling application.
 If the specified property does not exist on the window,
 .B XGetTextProperty
-sets the value field to NULL, 
+sets the value field to NULL,
 the encoding field to
 .BR None ,
-the format field to zero, 
+the format field to zero,
 and the nitems field to zero.
 .LP
 If it was able to read and store the data in the
 .B XTextProperty
 structure,
 .B XGetTextProperty
-returns a nonzero status; 
+returns a nonzero status;
 otherwise, it returns a zero status.
 .LP
 .B XGetTextProperty
diff --git a/man/XSetTile.man b/man/XSetTile.man
index a57fc452..6138622a 100644
--- a/man/XSetTile.man
+++ b/man/XSetTile.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,13 +51,13 @@ XSetTile, XSetStipple, XSetTSOrigin \- GC convenience routines
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XSetTile\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, Pixmap
-\fItile\fP\^); 
+\fItile\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XSetStipple\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, Pixmap
-\fIstipple\fP\^); 
+\fIstipple\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XSetTSOrigin\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, int
-\fIts_x_origin\fP\^, int \fIts_y_origin\fP\^); 
+\fIts_x_origin\fP\^, int \fIts_y_origin\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Specifies the GC.
 .IP \fIstipple\fP 1i
 Specifies the stipple you want to set for the specified GC.
 .IP \fItile\fP 1i
-Specifies the fill tile you want to set for the specified GC. 
+Specifies the fill tile you want to set for the specified GC.
 .IP \fIts_x_origin\fP 1i
 .br
 .ns
diff --git a/man/XSetTransientForHint.man b/man/XSetTransientForHint.man
index e58f717b..26be3f03 100644
--- a/man/XSetTransientForHint.man
+++ b/man/XSetTransientForHint.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,10 +51,10 @@ XSetTransientForHint, XGetTransientForHint \- set or read a window's WM_TRANSIEN
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XSetTransientForHint\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
-Window \fIprop_window\fP\^); 
+Window \fIprop_window\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XGetTransientForHint\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
-Window *\fIprop_window_return\fP\^); 
+Window *\fIprop_window_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Returns the WM_TRANSIENT_FOR property of the specified window.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B XSetTransientForHint
-function sets the WM_TRANSIENT_FOR property of the specified window to the 
+function sets the WM_TRANSIENT_FOR property of the specified window to the
 specified prop_window.
 .LP
 .B XSetTransientForHint
diff --git a/man/XSetWMClientMachine.man b/man/XSetWMClientMachine.man
index 94117441..988dd472 100644
--- a/man/XSetWMClientMachine.man
+++ b/man/XSetWMClientMachine.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,10 +51,10 @@ XSetWMClientMachine, XGetWMClientMachine \- set or read a window's WM_CLIENT_MAC
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 void XSetWMClientMachine\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
-XTextProperty *\fItext_prop\fP\^); 
+XTextProperty *\fItext_prop\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XGetWMClientMachine\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
-XTextProperty *\fItext_prop_return\fP\^); 
+XTextProperty *\fItext_prop_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ to set the WM_CLIENT_MACHINE property.
 .LP
 The
 .B XGetWMClientMachine
-convenience function performs an 
+convenience function performs an
 .B XGetTextProperty
 on the WM_CLIENT_MACHINE property.
 It returns a nonzero status on success;
diff --git a/man/XSetWMColormapWindows.man b/man/XSetWMColormapWindows.man
index 62cb56b2..5b57c3d4 100644
--- a/man/XSetWMColormapWindows.man
+++ b/man/XSetWMColormapWindows.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,10 +51,10 @@ XSetWMColormapWindows, XGetWMColormapWindows \- set or read a window's WM_COLORM
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 Status XSetWMColormapWindows\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
-Window *\fIcolormap_windows\fP\^, int \fIcount\fP\^); 
+Window *\fIcolormap_windows\fP\^, int \fIcount\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XGetWMColormapWindows\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
-Window **\fIcolormap_windows_return\fP\^, int *\fIcount_return\fP\^); 
+Window **\fIcolormap_windows_return\fP\^, int *\fIcount_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Returns the number of windows in the list.
 .IP \fIw\fP 1i
 Specifies the window.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .B XSetWMColormapWindows
 function replaces the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property on the specified
 window with the list of windows specified by the colormap_windows argument.
@@ -90,17 +90,17 @@ and
 .B BadWindow
 errors.
 .LP
-The 
+The
 .B XGetWMColormapWindows
-function returns the list of window identifiers stored 
+function returns the list of window identifiers stored
 in the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property on the specified window.
 These identifiers indicate the colormaps that the window manager
 may need to install for this window.
-If the property exists, is of type WINDOW, is of format 32, 
-and the atom WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS can be interned, 
+If the property exists, is of type WINDOW, is of format 32,
+and the atom WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS can be interned,
 .B XGetWMColormapWindows
-sets the windows_return argument to a list of window identifiers, 
-sets the count_return argument to the number of elements in the list, 
+sets the windows_return argument to a list of window identifiers,
+sets the count_return argument to the number of elements in the list,
 and returns a nonzero status.
 Otherwise, it sets neither of the return arguments
 and returns a zero status.
diff --git a/man/XSetWMIconName.man b/man/XSetWMIconName.man
index a8fafb50..382b3d1d 100644
--- a/man/XSetWMIconName.man
+++ b/man/XSetWMIconName.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,16 +51,16 @@ XSetWMIconName, XGetWMIconName, XSetIconName, XGetIconName \- set or read a wind
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 void XSetWMIconName\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
-XTextProperty *\fItext_prop\fP\^); 
+XTextProperty *\fItext_prop\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XGetWMIconName\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
-XTextProperty *\fItext_prop_return\fP\^); 
+XTextProperty *\fItext_prop_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XSetIconName\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, char
-*\fIicon_name\fP\^); 
+*\fIicon_name\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XGetIconName\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, char
-**\fIicon_name_return\fP\^); 
+**\fIicon_name_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ convenience function calls
 .B XSetTextProperty
 to set the WM_ICON_NAME property.
 .LP
-The 
+The
 .B XGetWMIconName
 convenience function calls
 .B XGetTextProperty
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ errors.
 The
 .B XGetIconName
 function returns the name to be displayed in the specified window's icon.
-If it succeeds, it returns a nonzero status; otherwise, 
+If it succeeds, it returns a nonzero status; otherwise,
 if no icon name has been set for the window,
 it returns zero.
 If you never assigned a name to the window,
diff --git a/man/XSetWMName.man b/man/XSetWMName.man
index 5028c677..064fe159 100644
--- a/man/XSetWMName.man
+++ b/man/XSetWMName.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,16 +51,16 @@ XSetWMName, XGetWMName, XStoreName, XFetchName \- set or read a window's WM_NAME
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 void XSetWMName\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, XTextProperty
-*\fItext_prop\fP\^); 
+*\fItext_prop\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XGetWMName\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
-XTextProperty *\fItext_prop_return\fP\^); 
+XTextProperty *\fItext_prop_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XStoreName\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, char
-*\fIwindow_name\fP\^); 
+*\fIwindow_name\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XFetchName\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, char
-**\fIwindow_name_return\fP\^); 
+**\fIwindow_name_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ The
 .B XFetchName
 function returns the name of the specified window.
 If it succeeds,
-it returns a nonzero status; 
+it returns a nonzero status;
 otherwise, no name has been set for the window,
 and it returns zero.
 If the WM_NAME property has not been set for this window,
diff --git a/man/XSetWMProperties.man b/man/XSetWMProperties.man
index 199f9f2f..400b0d4a 100644
--- a/man/XSetWMProperties.man
+++ b/man/XSetWMProperties.man
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
 .\"
-.\" 
+.\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
 .ds xL Xlib \- C Language X Interface
@@ -54,17 +54,17 @@ XSetWMProperties, XmbSetWMProperties, Xutf8SetWMProperties \- set standard windo
 void XSetWMProperties\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^,
 XTextProperty *\fIwindow_name\fP\^, XTextProperty *\fIicon_name\fP\^, char
 **\fIargv\fP\^, int \fIargc\fP\^, XSizeHints *\fInormal_hints\fP\^, XWMHints
-*\fIwm_hints\fP\^, XClassHint *\fIclass_hints\fP\^); 
+*\fIwm_hints\fP\^, XClassHint *\fIclass_hints\fP\^);
 .HP
 void XmbSetWMProperties\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, char
 *\fIwindow_name\fP\^, char *\fIicon_name\fP\^, char *\fIargv\fP\^[], int
 \fIargc\fP\^, XSizeHints *\fInormal_hints\fP\^, XWMHints *\fIwm_hints\fP\^,
-XClassHint *\fIclass_hints\fP\^); 
+XClassHint *\fIclass_hints\fP\^);
 .HP
 void Xutf8SetWMProperties\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, char
 *\fIwindow_name\fP\^, char *\fIicon_name\fP\^, char *\fIargv\fP\^[], int
 \fIargc\fP\^, XSizeHints *\fInormal_hints\fP\^, XWMHints *\fIwm_hints\fP\^,
-XClassHint *\fIclass_hints\fP\^); 
+XClassHint *\fIclass_hints\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIargc\fP 1i
 Specifies the number of arguments.
@@ -91,14 +91,14 @@ Specifies the
 .B XWMHints
 structure to be used.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .B XSetWMProperties
-convenience function provides a single programming interface 
-for setting those essential window properties that are used 
+convenience function provides a single programming interface
+for setting those essential window properties that are used
 for communicating with other clients (particularly window and session
 managers).
 .LP
-If the window_name argument is non-NULL, 
+If the window_name argument is non-NULL,
 .B XSetWMProperties
 calls
 .BR XSetWMName ,
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ If the icon_name argument is non-NULL,
 calls
 .BR XSetWMIconName ,
 which sets the WM_ICON_NAME property (see section 14.1.5).
-If the argv argument is non-NULL, 
+If the argv argument is non-NULL,
 .B XSetWMProperties
 calls
 .BR XSetCommand ,
@@ -118,30 +118,30 @@ Note also that the hostname of this machine is stored using
 .B XSetWMClientMachine
 (see section 14.2.2).
 .LP
-If the normal_hints argument is non-NULL, 
+If the normal_hints argument is non-NULL,
 .B XSetWMProperties
 calls
 .BR XSetWMNormalHints ,
 which sets the WM_NORMAL_HINTS property (see section 14.1.7).
-If the wm_hints argument is non-NULL, 
+If the wm_hints argument is non-NULL,
 .B XSetWMProperties
 calls
 .BR XSetWMHints ,
 which sets the WM_HINTS property (see section 14.1.6).
 .LP
-If the class_hints argument is non-NULL, 
+If the class_hints argument is non-NULL,
 .B XSetWMProperties
 calls
 .BR XSetClassHint ,
 which sets the WM_CLASS property (see section 14.1.8).
 If the res_name member in the
 .B XClassHint
-structure is set to the NULL pointer and the RESOURCE_NAME environment 
-variable is set, 
+structure is set to the NULL pointer and the RESOURCE_NAME environment
+variable is set,
 then the value of the environment variable is substituted for res_name.
-If the res_name member is NULL, 
-the environment variable is not set, 
-and argv and argv[0] are set, 
+If the res_name member is NULL,
+the environment variable is not set,
+and argv and argv[0] are set,
 then the value of argv[0], stripped of
 any directory prefixes, is substituted for res_name.
 .LP
@@ -149,8 +149,8 @@ The
 .B XmbSetWMProperties
 and
 .B Xutf8SetWMProperties
-convenience functions provide a simple programming interface 
-for setting those essential window properties that are used 
+convenience functions provide a simple programming interface
+for setting those essential window properties that are used
 for communicating with other clients
 (particularly window and session managers).
 .LP
@@ -164,8 +164,8 @@ in the encoding of the current locale, for
 .B Xutf8SetWMProperties
 in UTF-8 encoding.
 If the arguments can be fully converted to the STRING encoding,
-the properties are created with type \*(lqSTRING\*(rq; 
-otherwise, the arguments are converted to Compound Text, 
+the properties are created with type \*(lqSTRING\*(rq;
+otherwise, the arguments are converted to Compound Text,
 and the properties are created with type \*(lqCOMPOUND_TEXT\*(rq.
 .LP
 If the normal_hints argument is non-NULL,
@@ -175,7 +175,7 @@ and
 call
 .BR XSetWMNormalHints ,
 which sets the WM_NORMAL_HINTS property (see section 14.1.7).
-If the wm_hints argument is non-NULL, 
+If the wm_hints argument is non-NULL,
 .B XmbSetWMProperties
 and
 .B Xutf8SetWMProperties
@@ -190,7 +190,7 @@ and
 set the WM_COMMAND property from argv and argc.
 An argc of zero indicates a zero-length command.
 .LP
-The hostname of the machine is stored using 
+The hostname of the machine is stored using
 .B XSetWMClientMachine
 (see section 14.2.2).
 .LP
@@ -199,7 +199,7 @@ If the class_hints argument is non-NULL,
 and
 .B Xutf8SetWMProperties
 set the WM_CLASS property.
-If the res_name member in the 
+If the res_name member in the
 .B XClassHint
 structure is set to the NULL pointer and the RESOURCE_NAME
 environment variable is set,
@@ -256,7 +256,7 @@ application.
 .TP 1i
 \s-1WM_HINTS\s+1
 Additional hints set by the client for use by the window manager.
-The C type of this property is 
+The C type of this property is
 .BR XWMHints .
 .TP 1i
 \s-1WM_ICON_NAME\s+1
diff --git a/man/XSetWMProtocols.man b/man/XSetWMProtocols.man
index 1a3b549e..d684dccd 100644
--- a/man/XSetWMProtocols.man
+++ b/man/XSetWMProtocols.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,10 +51,10 @@ XSetWMProtocols, XGetWMProtocols \- set or read a window's WM_PROTOCOLS property
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 Status XSetWMProtocols\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, Atom
-*\fIprotocols\fP\^, int \fIcount\fP\^); 
+*\fIprotocols\fP\^, int \fIcount\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XGetWMProtocols\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^, Atom
-**\fIprotocols_return\fP\^, int *\fIcount_return\fP\^); 
+**\fIprotocols_return\fP\^, int *\fIcount_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -67,16 +67,16 @@ Specifies the list of protocols.
 .IP \fIprotocols_return\fP 1i
 Returns the list of protocols.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .B XSetWMProtocols
-function replaces the WM_PROTOCOLS property on the specified window 
+function replaces the WM_PROTOCOLS property on the specified window
 with the list of atoms specified by the protocols argument.
 If the property does not already exist,
 .B XSetWMProtocols
 sets the WM_PROTOCOLS property on the specified window
 to the list of atoms specified by the protocols argument.
 The property is stored with a type of ATOM and a format of 32.
-If it cannot intern the WM_PROTOCOLS atom, 
+If it cannot intern the WM_PROTOCOLS atom,
 .B XSetWMProtocols
 returns a zero status.
 Otherwise, it returns a nonzero status.
@@ -88,17 +88,17 @@ and
 .B BadWindow
 errors.
 .LP
-The 
+The
 .B XGetWMProtocols
-function returns the list of atoms stored in the WM_PROTOCOLS property 
+function returns the list of atoms stored in the WM_PROTOCOLS property
 on the specified window.
-These atoms describe window manager protocols in which the owner 
+These atoms describe window manager protocols in which the owner
 of this window is willing to participate.
-If the property exists, is of type ATOM, is of format 32, 
-and the atom WM_PROTOCOLS can be interned, 
+If the property exists, is of type ATOM, is of format 32,
+and the atom WM_PROTOCOLS can be interned,
 .B XGetWMProtocols
-sets the protocols_return argument to a list of atoms, 
-sets the count_return argument to the number of elements in the list, 
+sets the protocols_return argument to a list of atoms,
+sets the count_return argument to the number of elements in the list,
 and returns a nonzero status.
 Otherwise, it sets neither of the return arguments
 and returns a zero status.
diff --git a/man/XStoreBytes.man b/man/XStoreBytes.man
index d36f2060..d842e5ea 100644
--- a/man/XStoreBytes.man
+++ b/man/XStoreBytes.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,20 +51,20 @@ XStoreBytes, XStoreBuffer, XFetchBytes, XFetchBuffer, XRotateBuffers \- manipula
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XStoreBytes\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, char *\fIbytes\fP\^, int
-\^\fInbytes\fP\^); 
+\^\fInbytes\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XStoreBuffer\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, char *\fIbytes\fP\^, int
-\^\fInbytes\fP\^, int \fIbuffer\fP\^); 
+\^\fInbytes\fP\^, int \fIbuffer\fP\^);
 .HP
-char *XFetchBytes\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int *\fInbytes_return\fP\^); 
+char *XFetchBytes\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int *\fInbytes_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 char *XFetchBuffer\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int *\fInbytes_return\fP\^,
-int \fIbuffer\fP\^); 
+int \fIbuffer\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XRotateBuffers\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fIrotate\fP\^); 
+int XRotateBuffers\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fIrotate\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIbuffer\fP 1i
-Specifies the buffer in which you want to store the bytes 
+Specifies the buffer in which you want to store the bytes
 or from which you want the stored data returned.
 .IP \fIbytes\fP 1i
 Specifies the bytes, which are not necessarily ASCII or null-terminated.
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ The client must free this storage when finished with it by calling
 .LP
 The
 .B XFetchBuffer
-function returns zero to the nbytes_return argument 
+function returns zero to the nbytes_return argument
 if there is no data in the buffer or if an invalid
 buffer is specified.
 .LP
@@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ error.
 The
 .B XRotateBuffers
 function rotates the cut
-buffers, such that buffer 0 becomes buffer n, 
+buffers, such that buffer 0 becomes buffer n,
 buffer 1 becomes n + 1 mod 8, and so on.
 This cut buffer numbering is global to the display.
 Note that
diff --git a/man/XStoreColors.man b/man/XStoreColors.man
index 0ca644d2..45e124e0 100644
--- a/man/XStoreColors.man
+++ b/man/XStoreColors.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,10 +51,10 @@ XStoreColors, XStoreColor, XStoreNamedColor \- set colors
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XStoreColors\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap \fIcolormap\fP\^,
-XColor \fIcolor\fP\^[\^]\^, int \fIncolors\fP\^); 
+XColor \fIcolor\fP\^[\^]\^, int \fIncolors\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XStoreColor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap \fIcolormap\fP\^,
-XColor *\fIcolor\fP\^); 
+XColor *\fIcolor\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XStoreNamedColor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap \fIcolormap\fP\^,
 char *\^\fIcolor\fP\^, unsigned long \fIpixel\fP\^, int \fIflags\fP\^);
@@ -70,12 +70,12 @@ Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIflags\fP 1i
 Specifies which red, green, and blue components are set.
 .IP \fIncolors\fP 1i
-.\"Specifies the number of color definition structures. 
-Specifies the number of 
+.\"Specifies the number of color definition structures.
+Specifies the number of
 .B XColor
 structures in the color definition array.
 .IP \fIpixel\fP 1i
-Specifies the entry in the colormap. 
+Specifies the entry in the colormap.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B XStoreColors
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ function changes the colormap entries of the pixel values
 specified in the pixel members of the
 .B XColor
 structures.
-You specify which color components are to be changed by setting 
+You specify which color components are to be changed by setting
 .BR DoRed ,
 .BR DoGreen ,
 and/or
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ structures.
 If the colormap is an installed map for its screen, the
 changes are visible immediately.
 .B XStoreColors
-changes the specified pixels if they are allocated writable in the colormap 
+changes the specified pixels if they are allocated writable in the colormap
 by any client, even if one or more pixels generates an error.
 If a specified pixel is not a valid index into the colormap, a
 .B BadValue
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ error results.
 If a specified pixel either is unallocated or is allocated read-only, a
 .B BadAccess
 error results.
-If more than one pixel is in error, 
+If more than one pixel is in error,
 the one that gets reported is arbitrary.
 .LP
 .B XStoreColors
@@ -138,14 +138,14 @@ and/or
 in the flags member of the
 .B XColor
 structure.
-If the colormap is an installed map for its screen, 
+If the colormap is an installed map for its screen,
 the changes are visible immediately.
 .LP
 .B XStoreColor
 can generate
 .BR BadAccess ,
 .BR BadColor ,
-and 
+and
 .B BadValue
 errors.
 .LP
@@ -154,15 +154,15 @@ The
 function looks up the named color with respect to the screen associated with
 the colormap and stores the result in the specified colormap.
 The pixel argument determines the entry in the colormap.
-The flags argument determines which of the red, green, and blue components 
-are set. 
+The flags argument determines which of the red, green, and blue components
+are set.
 You can set this member to the
-bitwise inclusive OR of the bits 
+bitwise inclusive OR of the bits
 .BR DoRed ,
 .BR DoGreen ,
-and 
+and
 .BR DoBlue .
-If the color name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding, 
+If the color name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding,
 the result is implementation-dependent.
 Use of uppercase or lowercase does not matter.
 If the specified pixel is not a valid index into the colormap, a
diff --git a/man/XStringListToTextProperty.man b/man/XStringListToTextProperty.man
index 5365720d..fdc62a4e 100644
--- a/man/XStringListToTextProperty.man
+++ b/man/XStringListToTextProperty.man
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
 .\"
-.\" 
+.\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
 .ds xL Xlib \- C Language X Interface
@@ -52,12 +52,12 @@ XStringListToTextProperty, XTextPropertyToStringList, XFreeStringList, XTextProp
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 Status XStringListToTextProperty\^(\^char **\fIlist\fP\^, int \fIcount\fP\^,
-XTextProperty *\fItext_prop_return\fP\^); 
+XTextProperty *\fItext_prop_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XTextPropertyToStringList\^(\^XTextProperty *\fItext_prop\fP\^, char
-***\fIlist_return\fP\^, int *\fIcount_return\fP\^); 
+***\fIlist_return\fP\^, int *\fIcount_return\fP\^);
 .HP
-void XFreeStringList\^(\^char **\fIlist\fP\^); 
+void XFreeStringList\^(\^char **\fIlist\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIcount\fP 1i
 Specifies the number of strings.
@@ -78,50 +78,50 @@ Returns the
 .B XTextProperty
 structure.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .B XStringListToTextProperty
-function sets the specified 
+function sets the specified
 .B XTextProperty
 to be of type STRING (format 8) with a value representing the
 concatenation of the specified list of null-separated character strings.
-An extra null byte (which is not included in the nitems member) 
+An extra null byte (which is not included in the nitems member)
 is stored at the end of the value field of text_prop_return.
 The strings are assumed (without verification) to be in the STRING encoding.
-If insufficient memory is available for the new value string, 
+If insufficient memory is available for the new value string,
 .B XStringListToTextProperty
 does not set any fields in the
 .B XTextProperty
 structure and returns a zero status.
 Otherwise, it returns a nonzero status.
-To free the storage for the value field, use 
+To free the storage for the value field, use
 .BR XFree .
 .LP
-The 
+The
 .B XTextPropertyToStringList
-function returns a list of strings representing the null-separated elements 
+function returns a list of strings representing the null-separated elements
 of the specified
 .B XTextProperty
 structure.
-The data in text_prop must be of type STRING and format 8. 
-Multiple elements of the property 
-(for example, the strings in a disjoint text selection) 
+The data in text_prop must be of type STRING and format 8.
+Multiple elements of the property
+(for example, the strings in a disjoint text selection)
 are separated by NULL (encoding 0).
 The contents of the property are not null-terminated.
-If insufficient memory is available for the list and its elements, 
+If insufficient memory is available for the list and its elements,
 .B XTextPropertyToStringList
 sets no return values and returns a zero status.
 Otherwise, it returns a nonzero status.
-To free the storage for the list and its contents, use 
+To free the storage for the list and its contents, use
 .BR XFreeStringList .
 .LP
-The 
+The
 .B XFreeStringList
-function releases memory allocated by 
+function releases memory allocated by
 .BR XmbTextPropertyToTextList ,
 .B Xutf8TextPropertyToTextList
 and
 .B XTextPropertyToStringList
-and the missing charset list allocated by 
+and the missing charset list allocated by
 .BR XCreateFontSet .
 .SH STRUCTURES
 The
diff --git a/man/XStringToKeysym.man b/man/XStringToKeysym.man
index bfb00c6a..a1e6c37f 100644
--- a/man/XStringToKeysym.man
+++ b/man/XStringToKeysym.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,17 +50,17 @@
 XStringToKeysym, XKeysymToString, XKeycodeToKeysym, XKeysymToKeycode, XConvertCase \- convert keysyms
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-KeySym XStringToKeysym\^(\^char *\fIstring\fP\^); 
+KeySym XStringToKeysym\^(\^char *\fIstring\fP\^);
 .HP
-char *XKeysymToString\^(\^KeySym \fIkeysym\fP\^); 
+char *XKeysymToString\^(\^KeySym \fIkeysym\fP\^);
 .HP
 KeySym XKeycodeToKeysym\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, KeyCode \fIkeycode\fP\^,
-int \fIindex\fP\^); 
+int \fIindex\fP\^);
 .HP
 KeyCode XKeysymToKeycode\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, KeySym \fIkeysym\fP\^);
 .HP
 void XConvertCase(\^KeySym \fIkeysym\fP\^, KeySym *\fIlower_return\fP\^,
-KeySym *\fIupper_return\fP\^); 
+KeySym *\fIupper_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ Standard KeySym names are obtained from
 by removing the XK_ prefix from each name.
 KeySyms that are not part of the Xlib standard also may be obtained
 with this function.
-The set of KeySyms that are available in this manner 
+The set of KeySyms that are available in this manner
 and the mechanisms by which Xlib obtains them is implementation-dependent.
 .LP
 If the KeySym name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding,
diff --git a/man/XSupportsLocale.man b/man/XSupportsLocale.man
index 4aa6971e..ea7d92e1 100644
--- a/man/XSupportsLocale.man
+++ b/man/XSupportsLocale.man
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,23 +51,23 @@
 XSupportsLocale, XSetLocaleModifiers \- determine locale support and configure locale modifiers
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-Bool XSupportsLocale\^(void); 
+Bool XSupportsLocale\^(void);
 .HP
-char *XSetLocaleModifiers\^(\^char *\fImodifier_list\fP\^); 
+char *XSetLocaleModifiers\^(\^char *\fImodifier_list\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fImodifier_list\fP 1i
 Specifies the modifiers.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .B XSupportsLocale
-function returns 
+function returns
 .B True
 if Xlib functions are capable of operating under the current locale.
-If it returns 
+If it returns
 .BR False ,
-Xlib locale-dependent functions for which the 
+Xlib locale-dependent functions for which the
 .B XLocaleNotSupported
-return status is defined will return 
+return status is defined will return
 .BR XLocaleNotSupported .
 Other Xlib locale-dependent routines will operate in the \*(lqC\*(rq locale.
 .LP
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ function sets the X modifiers for the current locale setting.
 The modifier_list argument is a null-terminated string of the form
 \*(lq{@\^\fIcategory\fP\^=\^\fIvalue\fP\^}\*(rq, that is,
 having zero or more concatenated \*(lq@\^\fIcategory\fP\^=\^\fIvalue\fP\^\*(rq
-entries, where \fIcategory\fP is a category name 
+entries, where \fIcategory\fP is a category name
 and \fIvalue\fP is the (possibly empty) setting for that category.
 The values are encoded in the current locale.
 Category names are restricted to the POSIX Portable Filename Character Set.
diff --git a/man/XSynchronize.man b/man/XSynchronize.man
index e3922a67..2a6129f7 100644
--- a/man/XSynchronize.man
+++ b/man/XSynchronize.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -47,27 +47,27 @@
 .ds xC Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual
 .TH XSynchronize __libmansuffix__ __xorgversion__ "XLIB FUNCTIONS"
 .SH NAME
-XSynchronize, XSetAfterFunction \- enable or disable synchronization 
+XSynchronize, XSetAfterFunction \- enable or disable synchronization
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-int (*XSynchronize\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Bool \fIonoff\fP\^))(); 
+int (*XSynchronize\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Bool \fIonoff\fP\^))();
 .HP
 int (*XSetAfterFunction\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int
-(\^*\^\fIprocedure\fP\^)\^()))(); 
+(\^*\^\fIprocedure\fP\^)\^()))();
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIprocedure\fP 1i
 Specifies the procedure to be called.
 .IP \fIonoff\fP 1i
-Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether to enable 
+Specifies a Boolean value that indicates whether to enable
 or disable synchronization.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 The
 .B XSynchronize
-function returns 
+function returns
 the previous after function.
-If onoff is 
+If onoff is
 .BR True ,
 .B XSynchronize
 turns on synchronous behavior.
diff --git a/man/XTextExtents.man b/man/XTextExtents.man
index 24285208..752fa2c5 100644
--- a/man/XTextExtents.man
+++ b/man/XTextExtents.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -53,12 +53,12 @@ XTextExtents, XTextExtents16, XQueryTextExtents, XQueryTextExtents16 \- compute
 int XTextExtents\^(\^XFontStruct *\fIfont_struct\fP\^, char *\fIstring\fP\^,
 int \fInchars\fP\^, int *\fIdirection_return\fP\^, int
 *\fIfont_ascent_return\fP, int *\fIfont_descent_return\fP\^, XCharStruct
-*\fIoverall_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIoverall_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XTextExtents16\^(\^XFontStruct *\fIfont_struct\fP\^, XChar2b
 *\fIstring\fP\^, int \fInchars\fP\^, int *\fIdirection_return\fP\^, int
 *\fIfont_ascent_return\fP, int *\fIfont_descent_return\fP\^, XCharStruct
-*\fIoverall_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIoverall_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XQueryTextExtents\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XID \fIfont_ID\fP\^, char
 *\fIstring\fP\^, int \fInchars\fP\^, int *\fIdirection_return\fP\^, int
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ int XQueryTextExtents\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XID \fIfont_ID\fP\^, char
 int XQueryTextExtents16\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XID \fIfont_ID\fP\^,
 XChar2b *\fIstring\fP\^, int \fInchars\fP\^, int *\fIdirection_return\fP\^,
 int *\fIfont_ascent_return\fP, int *\fIfont_descent_return\fP\^, XCharStruct
-*\fIoverall_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIoverall_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdirection_return\fP 1i
 Returns the value of the direction hint
@@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ or
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIfont_ID\fP 1i
-Specifies either the font ID or the 
+Specifies either the font ID or the
 .B GContext
 ID that contains the font.
 .IP \fIfont_ascent_return\fP 1i
@@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Returns the font ascent.
 .IP \fIfont_descent_return\fP 1i
 Returns the font descent.
 .IP \fIfont_struct\fP 1i
-Specifies the 
+Specifies the
 .B XFontStruct
 structure.
 .IP \fInchars\fP 1i
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ The
 .B XTextExtents
 and
 .B XTextExtents16
-functions 
+functions
 perform the size computation locally and, thereby,
 avoid the round-trip overhead of
 .B XQueryTextExtents
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ The descent member is set to the maximum of the descent metrics.
 The width member is set to the sum of the character-width metrics of all
 characters in the string.
 For each character in the string,
-let W be the sum of the character-width metrics of all characters preceding 
+let W be the sum of the character-width metrics of all characters preceding
 it in the string.
 Let L be the left-side-bearing metric of the character plus W.
 Let R be the right-side-bearing metric of the character plus W.
@@ -126,9 +126,9 @@ The lbearing member is set to the minimum L of all characters in the string.
 The rbearing member is set to the maximum R.
 .LP
 For fonts defined with linear indexing rather than 2-byte matrix indexing,
-each 
+each
 .B XChar2b
-structure is interpreted as a 16-bit number with byte1 as the 
+structure is interpreted as a 16-bit number with byte1 as the
 most significant byte.
 If the font has no defined default character,
 undefined characters in the string are taken to have all zero metrics.
@@ -143,16 +143,16 @@ specified GC.
 These functions query the X server and, therefore, suffer the round-trip
 overhead that is avoided by
 .B XTextExtents
-and 
+and
 .BR XTextExtents16 .
 Both functions return a
 .B XCharStruct
 structure, whose members are set to the values as follows.
 .LP
-The ascent member is set to the maximum of the ascent metrics 
+The ascent member is set to the maximum of the ascent metrics
 of all characters in the string.
 The descent member is set to the maximum of the descent metrics.
-The width member is set to the sum of the character-width metrics 
+The width member is set to the sum of the character-width metrics
 of all characters in the string.
 For each character in the string,
 let W be the sum of the character-width metrics of all characters preceding
@@ -163,9 +163,9 @@ The lbearing member is set to the minimum L of all characters in the string.
 The rbearing member is set to the maximum R.
 .LP
 For fonts defined with linear indexing rather than 2-byte matrix indexing,
-each 
+each
 .B XChar2b
-structure is interpreted as a 16-bit number with byte1 as the 
+structure is interpreted as a 16-bit number with byte1 as the
 most significant byte.
 If the font has no defined default character,
 undefined characters in the string are taken to have all zero metrics.
diff --git a/man/XTextWidth.man b/man/XTextWidth.man
index 9c68aaba..5985bcbc 100644
--- a/man/XTextWidth.man
+++ b/man/XTextWidth.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,10 +51,10 @@ XTextWidth, XTextWidth16 \- compute text width
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XTextWidth\^(\^XFontStruct *\fIfont_struct\fP\^, char *\fIstring\fP\^,
-int \fIcount\fP\^); 
+int \fIcount\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XTextWidth16\^(\^XFontStruct *\fIfont_struct\fP\^, XChar2b
-*\fIstring\fP\^, int \fIcount\fP\^); 
+*\fIstring\fP\^, int \fIcount\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIcount\fP 1i
 Specifies the character count in the specified string.
diff --git a/man/XTranslateCoordinates.man b/man/XTranslateCoordinates.man
index 722026aa..e9cc3b69 100644
--- a/man/XTranslateCoordinates.man
+++ b/man/XTranslateCoordinates.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ XTranslateCoordinates \- translate window coordinates
 Bool XTranslateCoordinates\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIsrc_w\fP\^,
 \fIdest_w\fP\^, int \fIsrc_x\fP\^, int \fIsrc_y\fP\^, int
 *\fIdest_x_return\fP\^, int *\fIdest_y_return\fP\^, Window
-*\fIchild_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIchild_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIchild_return\fP 1i
 Returns the child if the coordinates are contained in a mapped child of the
@@ -80,12 +80,12 @@ If
 returns
 .BR True ,
 it takes the src_x and src_y coordinates relative
-to the source window's origin and returns these coordinates to 
+to the source window's origin and returns these coordinates to
 dest_x_return and dest_y_return
 relative to the destination window's origin.
 If
 .B XTranslateCoordinates
-returns 
+returns
 .BR False ,
 src_w and dest_w are on different screens,
 and dest_x_return and dest_y_return are zero.
diff --git a/man/XUnmapEvent.man b/man/XUnmapEvent.man
index 3f304448..c3d95688 100644
--- a/man/XUnmapEvent.man
+++ b/man/XUnmapEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
diff --git a/man/XUnmapWindow.man b/man/XUnmapWindow.man
index b31814a9..b0010e25 100644
--- a/man/XUnmapWindow.man
+++ b/man/XUnmapWindow.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,9 +50,9 @@
 XUnmapWindow, XUnmapSubwindows \- unmap windows
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-int XUnmapWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^); 
+int XUnmapWindow\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
 .HP
-int XUnmapSubwindows\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^); 
+int XUnmapSubwindows\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIw\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ function unmaps the specified window and causes the X server to generate an
 .IN "UnmapNotify Event"
 .IN "XUnmapWindow"
 event.
-If the specified window is already unmapped, 
+If the specified window is already unmapped,
 .B XUnmapWindow
 has no effect.
 Normal exposure processing on formerly obscured windows is performed.
@@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ Any child window will no longer be visible until another map call is
 made on the parent.
 In other words, the subwindows are still mapped but are not visible
 until the parent is mapped.
-Unmapping a window will generate 
+Unmapping a window will generate
 .B Expose
 events on windows that were formerly obscured by it.
 .LP
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ function unmaps all subwindows for the specified window in bottom-to-top
 stacking order.
 It causes the X server to generate an
 .B UnmapNotify
-event on each subwindow and 
+event on each subwindow and
 .B Expose
 events on formerly obscured windows.
 .IN "UnmapNotify Event"
diff --git a/man/XVaCreateNestedList.man b/man/XVaCreateNestedList.man
index f84261e4..44b0b5b0 100644
--- a/man/XVaCreateNestedList.man
+++ b/man/XVaCreateNestedList.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ XVaCreateNestedList \- allocate a nested variable argument list
 .SH SYNTAX
 typedef void * XVaNestedList;
 .HP
-XVaNestedList XVaCreateNestedList\^(\^int \fIdummy\fP\^, ...\^); 
+XVaNestedList XVaCreateNestedList\^(\^int \fIdummy\fP\^, ...\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdummy\fP 1i
 Specifies an unused argument (required by ANSI C).
diff --git a/man/XVisibilityEvent.man b/man/XVisibilityEvent.man
index 6c79111f..04169eec 100644
--- a/man/XVisibilityEvent.man
+++ b/man/XVisibilityEvent.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ The state member is set to the state of the window's visibility and can be
 or
 .BR VisibilityFullyObscured .
 The X server ignores all of a window's subwindows
-when determining the visibility state of the window and processes 
+when determining the visibility state of the window and processes
 .B VisibilityNotify
 events according to the following:
 .IP \(bu 5
@@ -104,15 +104,15 @@ the X server generates the event with the state member of the
 structure set to
 .BR VisibilityUnobscured .
 .IP \(bu 5
-When the window changes state from viewable and completely unobscured or 
+When the window changes state from viewable and completely unobscured or
 not viewable to viewable and partially obscured,
 the X server generates the event with the state member of the
 .B XVisibilityEvent
 structure set to
 .BR VisibilityPartiallyObscured .
 .IP \(bu 5
-When the window changes state from viewable and completely unobscured, 
-viewable and partially obscured, or not viewable to viewable and 
+When the window changes state from viewable and completely unobscured,
+viewable and partially obscured, or not viewable to viewable and
 fully obscured,
 the X server generates the event with the state member of the
 .B XVisibilityEvent
diff --git a/man/XWarpPointer.man b/man/XWarpPointer.man
index 499519ab..e4be6063 100644
--- a/man/XWarpPointer.man
+++ b/man/XWarpPointer.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ XWarpPointer \- move pointer
 int XWarpPointer\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Window \fIsrc_w\fP\^, Window
 \fIdest_w\fP\^, int \fIsrc_x\fP\^, int \fIsrc_y\fP\^, unsigned int
 \fIsrc_width\fP\^, unsigned int \fIsrc_height\fP\^, int \fIdest_x\fP\^, int
-\fIdest_y\fP\^); 
+\fIdest_y\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdest_w\fP 1i
 Specifies the destination window or
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ If dest_w is a window,
 moves the pointer to the offsets (dest_x, dest_y) relative to the origin of
 dest_w.
 However, if src_w is a window,
-the move only takes place if the window src_w contains the pointer 
+the move only takes place if the window src_w contains the pointer
 and if the specified rectangle of src_w contains the pointer.
 .LP
 The src_x and src_y coordinates are relative to the origin of src_w.
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ it is replaced with the current height of src_w minus src_y.
 If src_width is zero,
 it is replaced with the current width of src_w minus src_x.
 .LP
-There is seldom any reason for calling this function. 
+There is seldom any reason for calling this function.
 The pointer should normally be left to the user.
 If you do use this function, however, it generates events just as if the user
 had instantaneously moved the pointer from one position to another.
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Note that you cannot use
 .B XWarpPointer
 to move the pointer outside the confine_to window of an active pointer grab.
 An attempt to do so will only move the pointer as far as the closest edge of the
-confine_to window. 
+confine_to window.
 .LP
 .B XWarpPointer
 can generate a
diff --git a/man/XcmsAllocColor.man b/man/XcmsAllocColor.man
index ec324799..c8346e32 100644
--- a/man/XcmsAllocColor.man
+++ b/man/XcmsAllocColor.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ XcmsAllocColor, XcmsAllocNamedColor \- allocate colors
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 Status XcmsAllocColor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap \fIcolormap\fP\^,
-XcmsColor *\fIcolor_in_out\fP\^, XcmsColorFormat \fIresult_format\fP\^); 
+XcmsColor *\fIcolor_in_out\fP\^, XcmsColorFormat \fIresult_format\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XcmsAllocNamedColor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap
 \fIcolormap\fP\^, char *\fIcolor_string\fP\^, XcmsColor
@@ -65,10 +65,10 @@ Specifies the colormap.
 Returns the color specification parsed from the color string
 or parsed from the corresponding string found in a color-name database.
 .IP \fIcolor_in_out\fP 1i
-Specifies the color to allocate and returns the pixel and color 
+Specifies the color to allocate and returns the pixel and color
 that is actually used in the colormap.
 .IP \fIcolor_screen_return\fP 1i
-Returns the pixel value of the color cell and color specification 
+Returns the pixel value of the color cell and color specification
 that actually is stored for that cell.
 .ds St \
 .IP \fIcolor_string\fP 1i
@@ -83,7 +83,7 @@ function is similar to
 except the color can be specified in any format.
 The
 .B XcmsAllocColor
-function ultimately calls 
+function ultimately calls
 .B XAllocColor
 to allocate a read-only color cell (colormap entry) with the specified color.
 .B XcmsAllocColor
@@ -94,14 +94,14 @@ to an RGB value and then passes this to
 returns the pixel value of the color cell and the color specification
 actually allocated.
 This returned color specification is the result of converting the RGB value
-returned by 
+returned by
 .B XAllocColor
 into the format specified with the result_format argument.
-If there is no interest in a returned color specification, 
+If there is no interest in a returned color specification,
 unnecessary computation can be bypassed if result_format is set to
 .BR XcmsRGBFormat .
 The corresponding colormap cell is read-only.
-If this routine returns 
+If this routine returns
 .BR XcmsFailure ,
 the color_in_out color specification is left unchanged.
 .LP
@@ -127,7 +127,7 @@ structure (see
 converted
 to an RGB value, and finally passed to
 .BR XAllocColor .
-If the color name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding, 
+If the color name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding,
 the result is implementation-dependent.
 Use of uppercase or lowercase does not matter.
 .LP
diff --git a/man/XcmsCCCOfColormap.man b/man/XcmsCCCOfColormap.man
index 4d8bb326..b8a3a6ca 100644
--- a/man/XcmsCCCOfColormap.man
+++ b/man/XcmsCCCOfColormap.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ XcmsCCC XcmsCCCOfColormap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap
 \fIcolormap\fP\^);
 .HP
 XcmsCCC XcmsSetCCCOfColormap\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap
-\fIcolormap\fP\^, XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^); 
+\fIcolormap\fP\^, XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -66,11 +66,11 @@ Specifies the colormap.
 The
 .B XcmsCCCOfColormap
 function returns the CCC associated with the specified colormap.
-Once obtained, 
+Once obtained,
 the CCC attributes can be queried or modified.
 Unless the CCC associated with the specified colormap is changed with
 .BR XcmsSetCCCOfColormap ,
-this CCC is used when the specified colormap is used as an argument 
+this CCC is used when the specified colormap is used as an argument
 to color functions.
 .LP
 The
diff --git a/man/XcmsCIELabQueryMaxC.man b/man/XcmsCIELabQueryMaxC.man
index 3ba28d0e..141498c3 100644
--- a/man/XcmsCIELabQueryMaxC.man
+++ b/man/XcmsCIELabQueryMaxC.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Status XcmsCIELabQueryMaxL\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^, XcmsFloat
 \fIhue_angle\fP\^, XcmsFloat \fIchroma\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XcmsCIELabQueryMaxLC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^, XcmsFloat
-\fIhue_angle\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^); 
+\fIhue_angle\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XcmsCIELabQueryMinL\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^, XcmsFloat
 \fIhue_angle\fP\^, XcmsFloat \fIchroma\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^);
@@ -69,15 +69,15 @@ are ignored.
 .IP \fIchroma\fP 1i
 Specifies the chroma at which to find maximum lightness (MaxL) or minimum lightness (MinL).
 .IP \fIcolor_return\fP 1i
-Returns the CIE L*a*b* coordinates of 
-maximum chroma (MaxC and MaxLC), maximum lightness (MaxL), 
+Returns the CIE L*a*b* coordinates of
+maximum chroma (MaxC and MaxLC), maximum lightness (MaxL),
 or minimum lightness (MinL)
 displayable by the screen for the given hue angle and lightness (MaxC), hue angle and chroma (MaxL and MinL), or hue angle (MaxLC).
 The white point associated with the returned
 color specification is the Screen White Point.
 The value returned in the pixel member is undefined.
 .IP \fIhue_angle\fP 1i
-Specifies the hue angle (in degrees) at which to find maximum chroma (MaxC and MaxLC), maximum lightness (MaxL), 
+Specifies the hue angle (in degrees) at which to find maximum chroma (MaxC and MaxLC), maximum lightness (MaxL),
 or minimum lightness (MinL).
 .IP \fIL_star\fP 1i
 Specifies the lightness (L*) at which to find maximum chroma (MaxC).
@@ -91,10 +91,10 @@ It returns this point in CIE L*a*b* coordinates.
 The
 .B XcmsCIELabQueryMaxL
 function, given a hue angle and chroma,
-finds the point in CIE L*a*b* color space of maximum 
+finds the point in CIE L*a*b* color space of maximum
 lightness (L*) displayable by the screen.
 It returns this point in CIE L*a*b* coordinates.
-An 
+An
 .B XcmsFailure
 return value usually indicates that the given chroma
 is beyond maximum for the given hue angle.
@@ -110,7 +110,7 @@ The
 function, given a hue angle and chroma,
 finds the point of minimum lightness (L*) displayable by the screen.
 It returns this point in CIE L*a*b* coordinates.
-An 
+An
 .B XcmsFailure
 return value usually indicates that the given chroma
 is beyond maximum for the given hue angle.
diff --git a/man/XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxC.man b/man/XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxC.man
index 3a7ccc48..cd09f45b 100644
--- a/man/XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxC.man
+++ b/man/XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxC.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Status XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxL\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^, XcmsFloat
 \fIhue_angle\fP\^, XcmsFloat \fIchroma\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxLC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^, XcmsFloat
-\fIhue_angle\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^); 
+\fIhue_angle\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XcmsCIELuvQueryMinL\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^, XcmsFloat
 \fIhue_angle\fP\^, XcmsFloat \fIchroma\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^);
@@ -96,10 +96,10 @@ It returns this point in CIE L*u*v* coordinates.
 The
 .B XcmsCIELuvQueryMaxL
 function, given a hue angle and chroma,
-finds the point in CIE L*u*v* color space of maximum 
+finds the point in CIE L*u*v* color space of maximum
 lightness (L*) displayable by the screen.
 It returns this point in CIE L*u*v* coordinates.
-An 
+An
 .B XcmsFailure
 return value usually indicates that the given chroma
 is beyond maximum for the given hue angle.
@@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ The
 function, given a hue angle and chroma,
 finds the point of minimum lightness (L*) displayable by the screen.
 It returns this point in CIE L*u*v* coordinates.
-An 
+An
 .B XcmsFailure
 return value usually indicates that the given chroma
 is beyond maximum for the given hue angle.
diff --git a/man/XcmsColor.man b/man/XcmsColor.man
index 0921e5bd..aba9a694 100644
--- a/man/XcmsColor.man
+++ b/man/XcmsColor.man
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
diff --git a/man/XcmsConvertColors.man b/man/XcmsConvertColors.man
index 22907983..a8a791ad 100644
--- a/man/XcmsConvertColors.man
+++ b/man/XcmsConvertColors.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ XcmsConvertColors \- convert CCC color specifications
 .HP
 Status XcmsConvertColors\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^, XcmsColor
 \fIcolors_in_out\fP\^[\^]\^, unsigned int \fIncolors\fP\^, XcmsColorFormat
-\fItarget_format\fP\^, Bool \fIcompression_flags_return\fP\^[\^]\^); 
+\fItarget_format\fP\^, Bool \fIcompression_flags_return\fP\^[\^]\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIccc\fP 1i
 Specifies the CCC.
@@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ if the corresponding color was compressed and
 otherwise.
 Pass NULL if the compression status is not useful.
 .IP \fIncolors\fP 1i
-Specifies the number of 
+Specifies the number of
 .B XcmsColor
 structures in the color-specification array.
 .IP \fItarget_format\fP 1i
diff --git a/man/XcmsCreateCCC.man b/man/XcmsCreateCCC.man
index 4c5a362c..dc21d115 100644
--- a/man/XcmsCreateCCC.man
+++ b/man/XcmsCreateCCC.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -54,9 +54,9 @@ XcmsCCC XcmsCreateCCC\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int \fIscreen_number\fP\^,
 Visual *\fIvisual\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIclient_white_point\fP\^,
 XcmsCompressionProc \fIcompression_proc\fP\^, XPointer
 \fIcompression_client_data\fP\^, XcmsWhiteAdjustProc
-\fIwhite_adjust_proc\fP\^, XPointer \fIwhite_adjust_client_data\fP\^); 
+\fIwhite_adjust_proc\fP\^, XPointer \fIwhite_adjust_client_data\fP\^);
 .LP
-void XcmsFreeCCC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^); 
+void XcmsFreeCCC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -64,18 +64,18 @@ Specifies the connection to the X server.
 Specifies the CCC.
 .IP \fIclient_white_point\fP 1i
 Specifies the Client White Point.
-If NULL is specified, 
+If NULL is specified,
 the Client White Point is to be assumed to be the same as the
 Screen White Point.
 Note that the pixel member is ignored.
 .IP \fIcompression_client_data\fP 1i
 Specifies client data for use by the gamut compression procedure or NULL.
 .IP \fIcompression_proc\fP 1i
-Specifies the gamut compression procedure that is to be applied 
+Specifies the gamut compression procedure that is to be applied
 when a color lies outside the screen's color gamut.
 If NULL is specified and a function using this CCC must convert
 a color specification to a device-dependent format and encounters a color
-that lies outside the screen's color gamut, 
+that lies outside the screen's color gamut,
 that function will return
 .BR XcmsFailure .
 .IP \fIscreen_number\fP 1i
diff --git a/man/XcmsDefaultCCC.man b/man/XcmsDefaultCCC.man
index b2f6a3a2..3ca59318 100644
--- a/man/XcmsDefaultCCC.man
+++ b/man/XcmsDefaultCCC.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ XcmsDefaultCCC \- obtain the default CCC for a screen
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 XcmsCCC XcmsDefaultCCC\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, int
-\fIscreen_number\fP\^); 
+\fIscreen_number\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
diff --git a/man/XcmsQueryBlack.man b/man/XcmsQueryBlack.man
index 1e1bcede..de0a4cc5 100644
--- a/man/XcmsQueryBlack.man
+++ b/man/XcmsQueryBlack.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,19 +51,19 @@ XcmsQueryBlack, XcmsQueryBlue, XcmsQueryGreen, XcmsQueryRed, XcmsQueryWhite \- o
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 Status XcmsQueryBlack\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^, XcmsColorFormat
-\fItarget_format\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^); 
+\fItarget_format\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XcmsQueryBlue\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^, XcmsColorFormat
-\fItarget_format\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^); 
+\fItarget_format\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XcmsQueryGreen\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^, XcmsColorFormat
-\fItarget_format\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^); 
+\fItarget_format\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XcmsQueryRed\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^, XcmsColorFormat
-\fItarget_format\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^); 
+\fItarget_format\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XcmsQueryWhite\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^, XcmsColorFormat
-\fItarget_format\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^); 
+\fItarget_format\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIccc\fP 1i
 Specifies the CCC.
diff --git a/man/XcmsQueryColor.man b/man/XcmsQueryColor.man
index b5032915..b49af0bc 100644
--- a/man/XcmsQueryColor.man
+++ b/man/XcmsQueryColor.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,16 +51,16 @@ XcmsQueryColor, XcmsQueryColors, XcmsLookupColor \- obtain color values
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 Status XcmsQueryColor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap \fIcolormap\fP\^,
-XcmsColor *\fIcolor_in_out\fP\^, XcmsColorFormat \fIresult_format\fP\^); 
+XcmsColor *\fIcolor_in_out\fP\^, XcmsColorFormat \fIresult_format\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XcmsQueryColors\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap
 \fIcolormap\fP\^, XcmsColor \fIcolors_in_out\fP\^[\^]\^, unsigned int
-\fIncolors\fP\^, XcmsColorFormat \fIresult_format\fP\^); 
+\fIncolors\fP\^, XcmsColorFormat \fIresult_format\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XcmsLookupColor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap
 \fIcolormap\fP\^, char *\fIcolor_string\fP\^, XcmsColor
 *\fIcolor_exact_return\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_screen_return\fP\^,
-XcmsColorFormat \fIresult_format\fP\^); 
+XcmsColorFormat \fIresult_format\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -90,10 +90,10 @@ color specification.
 If the format is
 .B XcmsUndefinedFormat
 and the color string contains a color name,
-the specification is returned in the format used 
+the specification is returned in the format used
 to store the color in the database.
 .IP \fIncolors\fP 1i
-Specifies the number of 
+Specifies the number of
 .B XcmsColor
 structures in the color-specification array.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -136,10 +136,10 @@ The
 function looks up the string name of a color with respect to the screen
 associated with the specified colormap.
 It returns both the exact color values and
-the closest values provided by the screen 
+the closest values provided by the screen
 with respect to the visual type of the specified colormap.
 The values are returned in the format specified by result_format.
-If the color name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding, 
+If the color name is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding,
 the result is implementation-dependent.
 Use of uppercase or lowercase does not matter.
 .B XcmsLookupColor
@@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ if the name is resolved; otherwise, it returns
 .BR XcmsFailure .
 If
 .B XcmsSuccessWithCompression
-is returned, the color specification returned in 
+is returned, the color specification returned in
 color_screen_return is the result of gamut compression.
 .SH DIAGNOSTICS
 .TP 1i
diff --git a/man/XcmsSetWhitePoint.man b/man/XcmsSetWhitePoint.man
index f1b3a65f..1258ed00 100644
--- a/man/XcmsSetWhitePoint.man
+++ b/man/XcmsSetWhitePoint.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -50,10 +50,10 @@
 XcmsSetWhitePoint, XcmsSetWhiteAdjustProc \- modifying CCC attributes
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-Status XcmsSetWhitePoint\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor\fP\^); 
+Status XcmsSetWhitePoint\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor\fP\^);
 .HP
 XcmsWhiteAdjustProc XcmsSetWhiteAdjustProc\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^,
-XcmsWhiteAdjustProc \fIwhite_adjust_proc\fP\^, XPointer \fIclient_data\fP\^); 
+XcmsWhiteAdjustProc \fIwhite_adjust_proc\fP\^, XPointer \fIclient_data\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIccc\fP 1i
 Specifies the CCC.
@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Specifies the white point adjustment procedure.
 The
 .B XcmsSetWhitePoint
 function changes the Client White Point in the specified CCC.
-Note that the pixel member is ignored 
+Note that the pixel member is ignored
 and that the color specification is left unchanged upon return.
 The format for the new white point must be
 .BR XcmsCIEXYZFormat ,
@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ otherwise, it returns zero.
 .LP
 The
 .B XcmsSetWhiteAdjustProc
-function first sets the white point adjustment procedure and client data 
+function first sets the white point adjustment procedure and client data
 in the specified CCC with the newly specified procedure and client data
 and then returns the old procedure.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
diff --git a/man/XcmsStoreColor.man b/man/XcmsStoreColor.man
index aacf8b4c..be1880a4 100644
--- a/man/XcmsStoreColor.man
+++ b/man/XcmsStoreColor.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,11 +51,11 @@ XcmsStoreColor, XcmsStoreColors \- set colors
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 Status XcmsStoreColor\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap \fIcolormap\fP\^,
-XcmsColor *\fIcolor\fP\^); 
+XcmsColor *\fIcolor\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XcmsStoreColors\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Colormap
 \fIcolormap\fP\^, XcmsColor \fIcolors\fP\^[\^]\^, int \fIncolors\fP\^, Bool
-\fIcompression_flags_return\fP\^[\^]\^); 
+\fIcompression_flags_return\fP\^[\^]\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ if the corresponding color was compressed and
 otherwise.
 Pass NULL if the compression status is not useful.
 .IP \fIncolors\fP 1i
-Specifies the number of 
+Specifies the number of
 .B XcmsColor
 structures in the color-specification array.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -93,8 +93,8 @@ function converts the color specified in the
 structure into RGB values.
 It then uses this RGB specification in an
 .B XColor
-structure, whose three flags 
-.Pn ( DoRed , 
+structure, whose three flags
+.Pn ( DoRed ,
 .BR DoGreen ,
 and
 .BR DoBlue )
@@ -111,14 +111,14 @@ error results.
 If the color cell is unallocated or is allocated read-only, a
 .B BadAccess
 error results.
-If the colormap is an installed map for its screen, 
+If the colormap is an installed map for its screen,
 the changes are visible immediately.
 .LP
-Note that 
+Note that
 .B XStoreColor
 has no return value; therefore, an
 .B XcmsSuccess
-return value from this function indicates that the conversion 
+return value from this function indicates that the conversion
 to RGB succeeded and the call to
 .B XStoreColor
 was made.
@@ -142,8 +142,8 @@ function converts the colors specified in the array of
 .B XcmsColor
 structures into RGB values and then uses these RGB specifications in
 .B XColor
-structures, whose three flags 
-.Pn ( DoRed , 
+structures, whose three flags
+.Pn ( DoRed ,
 .BR DoGreen ,
 and
 .BR DoBlue )
@@ -162,14 +162,14 @@ If a color cell is unallocated or is allocated read-only, a
 error results.
 If more than one pixel is in error,
 the one that gets reported is arbitrary.
-If the colormap is an installed map for its screen, 
+If the colormap is an installed map for its screen,
 the changes are visible immediately.
 .LP
-Note that 
+Note that
 .B XStoreColors
 has no return value; therefore, an
 .B XcmsSuccess
-return value from this function indicates that conversions 
+return value from this function indicates that conversions
 to RGB succeeded and the call to
 .B XStoreColors
 was made.
diff --git a/man/XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxC.man b/man/XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxC.man
index 8bfc325c..f6bce1ea 100644
--- a/man/XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxC.man
+++ b/man/XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxC.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -51,20 +51,20 @@ XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxC, XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxV, XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxVC, XcmsTekHVCQueryM
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 Status XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^, XcmsFloat \fIhue\fP\^,
-XcmsFloat \fIvalue\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^); 
+XcmsFloat \fIvalue\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxV\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^, XcmsFloat \fIhue\fP\^,
-XcmsFloat \fIchroma\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^); 
+XcmsFloat \fIchroma\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxVC\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^, XcmsFloat \fIhue\fP\^,
-XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^); 
+XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XcmsTekHVCQueryMaxVSamples\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^, XcmsFloat
 \fIhue\fP\^, XcmsColor \fIcolors_return[]\fP\^, unsigned int
-\fInsamples\fP\^); 
+\fInsamples\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XcmsTekHVCQueryMinV\^(\^XcmsCCC \fIccc\fP\^, XcmsFloat \fIhue\fP\^,
-XcmsFloat \fIchroma\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^); 
+XcmsFloat \fIchroma\fP\^, XcmsColor *\fIcolor_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIccc\fP 1i
 Specifies the CCC.
@@ -78,22 +78,22 @@ such that the Chroma is the maximum attainable for the Value and Hue.
 The white point associated with the returned
 color specification is the Screen White Point.
 The value returned in the pixel member is undefined.
-.ds Lc 
-.ds lC 
+.ds Lc
+.ds lC
 .IP \fIcolor_return\fP 1i
-Returns the maximum Chroma along with the actual Hue and Value (MaxC), 
-maximum Value along with the Hue and Chroma (MaxV), 
-color specification in XcmsTekHVC for the maximum Chroma, 
-the Value at which that maximum Chroma is reached and actual Hue (MaxVC) 
+Returns the maximum Chroma along with the actual Hue and Value (MaxC),
+maximum Value along with the Hue and Chroma (MaxV),
+color specification in XcmsTekHVC for the maximum Chroma,
+the Value at which that maximum Chroma is reached and actual Hue (MaxVC)
 or minimum Value and the actual Hue and Chroma (MinL)
-at which the maximum Chroma (MaxC and MaxVC), maximum Value (MaxV), or 
+at which the maximum Chroma (MaxC and MaxVC), maximum Value (MaxV), or
 minimum Value (MinL) was found.
 The white point associated with the returned
 color specification is the Screen White Point.
 The value returned in the pixel member is undefined.
 .IP \fIhue\fP 1i
-Specifies the Hue in which to find the maximum Chroma (MaxC and MaxVC), 
-maximum Value (MaxV), the maximum Chroma/Value samples (MaxVSamples), 
+Specifies the Hue in which to find the maximum Chroma (MaxC and MaxVC),
+maximum Value (MaxV), the maximum Chroma/Value samples (MaxVSamples),
 or the minimum Value (MinL).
 .IP \fInsamples\fP 1i
 Specifies the number of samples.
diff --git a/man/XmbDrawImageString.man b/man/XmbDrawImageString.man
index e79eb1e0..379d8456 100644
--- a/man/XmbDrawImageString.man
+++ b/man/XmbDrawImageString.man
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
 .\"
-.\" 
+.\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
 .ds xL Xlib \- C Language X Interface
@@ -53,18 +53,18 @@ XmbDrawImageString, XwcDrawImageString, Xutf8DrawImageString \- draw image text
 .HP
 void XmbDrawImageString\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^,
 XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, char
-*\fIstring\fP\^, int \fInum_bytes\fP\^); 
+*\fIstring\fP\^, int \fInum_bytes\fP\^);
 .HP
 void XwcDrawImageString\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^,
 XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^,
-wchar_t *\fIstring\fP\^, int \fInum_wchars\fP\^); 
+wchar_t *\fIstring\fP\^, int \fInum_wchars\fP\^);
 .HP
 void Xutf8DrawImageString\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^,
 XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, char
-*\fIstring\fP\^, int \fInum_bytes\fP\^); 
+*\fIstring\fP\^, int \fInum_bytes\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fId\fP 1i
-Specifies the drawable. 
+Specifies the drawable.
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIfont_set\fP 1i
@@ -93,15 +93,15 @@ in the GC and then paint the text with the foreground pixel.
 The filled rectangle is the rectangle returned to overall_logical_return by
 .BR XmbTextExtents ,
 .B XwcTextExtents
-or 
+or
 .B Xutf8TextExtents
-for the same text and 
+for the same text and
 .BR XFontSet .
 .LP
-When the 
+When the
 .B XFontSet
-has missing charsets, each unavailable character is drawn 
-with the default string returned by 
+has missing charsets, each unavailable character is drawn
+with the default string returned by
 .BR XCreateFontSet .
 The behavior for an invalid codepoint is undefined.
 .LP
diff --git a/man/XmbDrawString.man b/man/XmbDrawString.man
index 8eef694d..e8a056ed 100644
--- a/man/XmbDrawString.man
+++ b/man/XmbDrawString.man
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
 .\"
-.\" 
+.\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
 .ds xL Xlib \- C Language X Interface
@@ -53,18 +53,18 @@ XmbDrawString, XwcDrawString, Xutf8DrawString \- draw text using a single font s
 .HP
 void XmbDrawString\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, XFontSet
 \fIfont_set\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, char
-*\fIstring\fP\^, int \fInum_bytes\fP\^); 
+*\fIstring\fP\^, int \fInum_bytes\fP\^);
 .HP
 void XwcDrawString\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, XFontSet
 \fIfont_set\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, wchar_t
-*\fIstring\fP\^, int \fInum_wchars\fP\^); 
+*\fIstring\fP\^, int \fInum_wchars\fP\^);
 .HP
 void Xutf8DrawString\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^,
 XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^, GC \fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, char
 *\fIstring\fP\^, int \fInum_bytes\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fId\fP 1i
-Specifies the drawable. 
+Specifies the drawable.
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIfont_set\fP 1i
@@ -89,10 +89,10 @@ The
 and
 .B Xutf8DrawString
 functions draw the specified text with the foreground pixel.
-When the 
+When the
 .B XFontSet
-has missing charsets, each unavailable character is drawn 
-with the default string returned by 
+has missing charsets, each unavailable character is drawn
+with the default string returned by
 .BR XCreateFontSet .
 The behavior for an invalid codepoint is undefined.
 .LP
diff --git a/man/XmbDrawText.man b/man/XmbDrawText.man
index 7faab427..7288b6da 100644
--- a/man/XmbDrawText.man
+++ b/man/XmbDrawText.man
@@ -41,29 +41,29 @@
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
 .\"
-.\" 
+.\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
 .ds xL Xlib \- C Language X Interface
 .ds xC Inter-Client Communication Conventions Manual
 .TH XmbDrawText __libmansuffix__ __xorgversion__ "XLIB FUNCTIONS"
 .SH NAME
-XmbDrawText, XwcDrawText, Xutf8DrawText \- draw text using multiple font sets 
+XmbDrawText, XwcDrawText, Xutf8DrawText \- draw text using multiple font sets
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 void XmbDrawText\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
 \fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, XmbTextItem *\fIitems\fP\^, int
-\fInitems\fP\^); 
+\fInitems\fP\^);
 .HP
 void XwcDrawText\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
 \fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, XwcTextItem *\fIitems\fP\^, int
-\fInitems\fP\^); 
+\fInitems\fP\^);
 .HP
 void Xutf8DrawText\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, Drawable \fId\fP\^, GC
 \fIgc\fP\^, int \fIx\fP\^, int \fIy\fP\^, XmbTextItem *\fIitems\fP\^, int \fInitems\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fId\fP 1i
-Specifies the drawable. 
+Specifies the drawable.
 .IP \fIdisplay\fP 1i
 Specifies the connection to the X server.
 .IP \fIgc\fP 1i
@@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ Specify the x and y coordinates.
 The
 .BR XmbDrawText ,
 .B XwcDrawText
-and 
+and
 .B Xutf8DrawText
 functions allow complex spacing and font set shifts between text strings.
 Each text item is processed in turn, with the origin of a text
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ element advanced in the primary draw direction by the escapement of the
 previous text item.
 A text item delta specifies an additional escapement of the text item
 drawing origin in the primary draw direction.
-A font_set member other than 
+A font_set member other than
 .B None
 in an item causes the font set to be used for this and subsequent text items
 in the text_items list.
@@ -110,10 +110,10 @@ or
 .BR XmbTextPerCharExtents ,
 .BR XwcTextPerCharExtents .
 .BR Xutf8TextPerCharExtents .
-When the 
+When the
 .B XFontSet
-has missing charsets, each unavailable character is drawn 
-with the default string returned by 
+has missing charsets, each unavailable character is drawn
+with the default string returned by
 .BR XCreateFontSet .
 The behavior for an invalid codepoint is undefined.
 .LP
diff --git a/man/XmbLookupString.man b/man/XmbLookupString.man
index d16db62c..a46968b9 100644
--- a/man/XmbLookupString.man
+++ b/man/XmbLookupString.man
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
 .\"
-.\" 
+.\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
 .ds xL Xlib \- C Language X Interface
@@ -55,15 +55,15 @@ XmbLookupString, XwcLookupString, Xutf8LookupString \- obtain composed input fro
 .HP
 int XmbLookupString\^(\^XIC \fIic\fP\^, XKeyPressedEvent *\fIevent\fP, char
 *\fIbuffer_return\fP\^, int \fIbytes_buffer\fP\^, KeySym
-*\fIkeysym_return\fP\^, Status *\fIstatus_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIkeysym_return\fP\^, Status *\fIstatus_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XwcLookupString\^(\^XIC \fIic\fP\^, XKeyPressedEvent *\fIevent\fP\^,
 wchar_t *\fIbuffer_return\fP\^, int \fIwchars_buffer\fP\^, KeySym
-*\fIkeysym_return\fP\^, Status *\fIstatus_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIkeysym_return\fP\^, Status *\fIstatus_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int Xutf8LookupString\^(\^XIC \fIic\fP\^, XKeyPressedEvent *\fIevent\fP, char
 *\fIbuffer_return\fP\^, int \fIbytes_buffer\fP\^, KeySym
-*\fIkeysym_return\fP\^, Status *\fIstatus_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIkeysym_return\fP\^, Status *\fIstatus_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIbuffer_return\fP 1i
 Returns a multibyte string or wide character string (if any)
@@ -121,20 +121,20 @@ begins in the initial state of the encoding of the locale
 (if the encoding of the locale is state-dependent).
 .LP
 Note: To ensure proper input processing,
-it is essential that the client pass only 
+it is essential that the client pass only
 .B KeyPress
 events to
 .BR XmbLookupString ,
 .B XwcLookupString
 and
 .BR Xutf8LookupString .
-Their behavior when a client passes a 
+Their behavior when a client passes a
 .B KeyRelease
 event is undefined.
 .LP
 Clients should check the status_return argument before
 using the other returned values.
-These three functions each return a value to status_return 
+These three functions each return a value to status_return
 that indicates what has been returned in the other arguments.
 The possible values returned are:
 .TS
@@ -157,7 +157,7 @@ T{
 .B XLookupNone
 T}	T{
 No consistent input has been composed so far.
-The contents of buffer_return and keysym_return are not modified, 
+The contents of buffer_return and keysym_return are not modified,
 and the function returns zero.
 T}
 T{
diff --git a/man/XmbResetIC.man b/man/XmbResetIC.man
index 80c42f2b..d6617fe1 100644
--- a/man/XmbResetIC.man
+++ b/man/XmbResetIC.man
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
 .\"
-.\" 
+.\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
 .ds xL Xlib \- C Language X Interface
@@ -51,11 +51,11 @@
 XmbResetIC, XwcResetIC, Xutf8ResetIC \- reset the state of an input context
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
-char *XmbResetIC\^(\^XIC \fIic\fP\^); 
+char *XmbResetIC\^(\^XIC \fIic\fP\^);
 .HP
-wchar_t *XwcResetIC\^(\^XIC \fIic\fP\^); 
+wchar_t *XwcResetIC\^(\^XIC \fIic\fP\^);
 .HP
-char *Xutf8ResetIC\^(\^XIC \fIic\fP\^); 
+char *Xutf8ResetIC\^(\^XIC \fIic\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIic\fP 1i
 Specifies the input context.
@@ -77,7 +77,7 @@ the current input context state is preserved.
 In both cases, any input pending on that context is deleted.
 The input method is required to clear the preedit area, if any,
 and update the status accordingly.
-Calling 
+Calling
 .BR XmbResetIC ,
 .B XwcResetIC
 or
@@ -95,8 +95,8 @@ The return value of
 is its current preedit string as an UTF-8 string.
 If there is any preedit text drawn or visible to the user,
 then these procedures must return a non-NULL string.
-If there is no visible preedit text, 
-then it is input method implementation-dependent 
+If there is no visible preedit text,
+then it is input method implementation-dependent
 whether these procedures return a non-NULL string or NULL.
 .LP
 The client should free the returned string by calling
diff --git a/man/XmbTextEscapement.man b/man/XmbTextEscapement.man
index a7140462..43c83ec9 100644
--- a/man/XmbTextEscapement.man
+++ b/man/XmbTextEscapement.man
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
 .\"
-.\" 
+.\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
 .ds xL Xlib \- C Language X Interface
@@ -52,13 +52,13 @@ XmbTextEscapement, XwcTextEscapement, Xutf8TextEscapement \- obtain the escapeme
 .SH SYNTAX
 .HP
 int XmbTextEscapement\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^, char *\fIstring\fP\^, int
-\fInum_bytes\fP\^); 
+\fInum_bytes\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XwcTextEscapement\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^, wchar_t *\fIstring\fP\^,
-int \fInum_wchars\fP\^); 
+int \fInum_wchars\fP\^);
 .HP
-int Xutf8TextEscapement\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^, char *\fIstring\fP\^, 
-int \fInum_bytes\fP\^); 
+int Xutf8TextEscapement\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^, char *\fIstring\fP\^,
+int \fInum_bytes\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIfont_set\fP 1i
 Specifies the font set.
diff --git a/man/XmbTextExtents.man b/man/XmbTextExtents.man
index 1393bca1..9409c1bc 100644
--- a/man/XmbTextExtents.man
+++ b/man/XmbTextExtents.man
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
 .\"
-.\" 
+.\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
 .ds xL Xlib \- C Language X Interface
@@ -53,11 +53,11 @@ XmbTextExtents, XwcTextExtents, Xutf8TextExtents \- compute text extents
 .HP
 int XmbTextExtents\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^, char *\fIstring\fP\^, int
 \fInum_bytes\fP\^, XRectangle *\fIoverall_ink_return\fP\^, XRectangle
-*\fIoverall_logical_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIoverall_logical_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XwcTextExtents\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^, wchar_t *\fIstring\fP\^, int
 \fInum_wchars\fP\^, XRectangle *\fIoverall_ink_return\fP\^, XRectangle
-*\fIoverall_logical_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIoverall_logical_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int Xutf8TextExtents\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^, char *\fIstring\fP\^, int
 \fInum_bytes\fP\^, XRectangle *\fIoverall_ink_return\fP\^, XRectangle
@@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ functions set the components of the specified overall_ink_return and
 overall_logical_return
 arguments to the overall bounding box of the string's image
 and a logical bounding box for spacing purposes, respectively.
-They return the value returned by 
+They return the value returned by
 .BR XmbTextEscapement ,
 .B XwcTextEscapement
 or
@@ -110,11 +110,11 @@ to other graphical features for the string.
 Other graphical features, for example, a border surrounding the text,
 should not intersect this rectangle.
 .LP
-When the 
+When the
 .B XFontSet
 has missing charsets,
-metrics for each unavailable character are taken 
-from the default string returned by 
+metrics for each unavailable character are taken
+from the default string returned by
 .B XCreateFontSet
 so that the metrics represent the text as it will actually be drawn.
 The behavior for an invalid codepoint is undefined.
diff --git a/man/XmbTextListToTextProperty.man b/man/XmbTextListToTextProperty.man
index 7cca6ae7..542f9c53 100644
--- a/man/XmbTextListToTextProperty.man
+++ b/man/XmbTextListToTextProperty.man
@@ -55,27 +55,27 @@ XmbTextListToTextProperty, XwcTextListToTextProperty, Xutf8TextListToTextPropert
 .HP
 int XmbTextListToTextProperty\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, char
 **\fIlist\fP\^, int \fIcount\fP\^, XICCEncodingStyle \fIstyle\fP\^,
-XTextProperty *\fItext_prop_return\fP\^); 
+XTextProperty *\fItext_prop_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XwcTextListToTextProperty\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, wchar_t
 **\fIlist\fP\^, int \fIcount\fP\^, XICCEncodingStyle \fIstyle\fP\^,
-XTextProperty *\fItext_prop_return\fP\^); 
+XTextProperty *\fItext_prop_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int Xutf8TextListToTextProperty\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, char
 **\fIlist\fP\^, int \fIcount\fP\^, XICCEncodingStyle \fIstyle\fP\^,
-XTextProperty *\fItext_prop_return\fP\^); 
+XTextProperty *\fItext_prop_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XmbTextPropertyToTextList\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XTextProperty
-*\fItext_prop\fP\^, char ***\fIlist_return\fP\^, int *\fIcount_return\fP\^); 
+*\fItext_prop\fP\^, char ***\fIlist_return\fP\^, int *\fIcount_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int XwcTextPropertyToTextList\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XTextProperty
 *\fItext_prop\fP\^, wchar_t ***\fIlist_return\fP\^, int
-*\fIcount_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIcount_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 int Xutf8TextPropertyToTextList\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XTextProperty
-*\fItext_prop\fP\^, char ***\fIlist_return\fP\^, int *\fIcount_return\fP\^); 
+*\fItext_prop\fP\^, char ***\fIlist_return\fP\^, int *\fIcount_return\fP\^);
 .HP
-void XwcFreeStringList\^(\^wchar_t **\fIlist\fP\^); 
+void XwcFreeStringList\^(\^wchar_t **\fIlist\fP\^);
 .HP
 char *XDefaultString\^(void)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
@@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ The
 .B XwcTextListToTextProperty
 and
 .B Xutf8TextListToTextProperty
-functions set the specified 
+functions set the specified
 .B XTextProperty
 value to a set of null-separated elements representing the concatenation
 of the specified list of null-terminated text strings. The input text
@@ -120,40 +120,40 @@ or in UTF-8 encoding (for
 .LP
 The functions set the encoding field of text_prop_return to an
 .B Atom
-for the specified display 
+for the specified display
 naming the encoding determined by the specified style
 and convert the specified text list to this encoding for storage in
 the text_prop_return value field.
-If the style 
+If the style
 .B XStringStyle
-or 
+or
 .B XCompoundTextStyle
 is specified,
 this encoding is \*(lqSTRING\*(rq or \*(lqCOMPOUND_TEXT\*(rq, respectively.
 If the style
 .B XUTF8StringStyle
 is specified,
-this encoding is \*(lqUTF8_STRING\*(rq. 
+this encoding is \*(lqUTF8_STRING\*(rq.
 (This is an extension introduced by The XFree86 Project, Inc. in their 4.0.2
 release. Its presence is indicated by the macro
 .BR X_HAVE_UTF8_STRING .)
-If the style 
+If the style
 .B XTextStyle
 is specified,
 this encoding is the encoding of the current locale.
-If the style 
+If the style
 .B XStdICCTextStyle
 is specified,
 this encoding is \*(lqSTRING\*(rq if the text is fully convertible to STRING,
 else \*(lqCOMPOUND_TEXT\*(rq.
-A final terminating null byte is stored at the end of the value field 
+A final terminating null byte is stored at the end of the value field
 of text_prop_return but is not included in the nitems member.
 .LP
 If insufficient memory is available for the new value string,
-the functions return 
+the functions return
 .BR XNoMemory .
 If the current locale is not supported,
-the functions return 
+the functions return
 .BR XLocaleNotSupported .
 In both of these error cases,
 the functions do not set text_prop_return.
@@ -167,19 +167,19 @@ If the supplied text is not fully convertible to the specified encoding,
 the functions return the number of unconvertible characters.
 Each unconvertible character is converted to an implementation-defined and
 encoding-specific default string.
-Otherwise, the functions return 
+Otherwise, the functions return
 .BR Success .
-Note that full convertibility to all styles except 
+Note that full convertibility to all styles except
 .B XStringStyle
 is guaranteed.
 .LP
 To free the storage for the value field, use
 .BR XFree .
 .LP
-The 
+The
 .BR XmbTextPropertyToTextList ,
 .B XwcTextPropertyToTextList
-and 
+and
 .B Xutf8TextPropertyToTextList
 functions return a list of text strings representing the
 null-separated elements of the specified
@@ -203,12 +203,12 @@ If insufficient memory is available for the list and its elements,
 .B XwcTextPropertyToTextList
 and
 .B Xutf8TextPropertyToTextList
-return 
+return
 .BR XNoMemory .
 If the current locale is not supported,
 the functions return
 .BR XLocaleNotSupported .
-Otherwise, if the encoding field of text_prop is not convertible 
+Otherwise, if the encoding field of text_prop is not convertible
 to the encoding of the current locale,
 the functions return
 .BR XConverterNotFound .
@@ -216,7 +216,7 @@ For supported locales,
 existence of a converter from COMPOUND_TEXT, STRING, UTF8_STRING
 or the encoding of the current locale is guaranteed if
 .B XSupportsLocale
-returns 
+returns
 .B True
 for the current locale (but the actual text
 may contain unconvertible characters).
@@ -224,7 +224,7 @@ Conversion of other encodings is implementation-dependent.
 In all of these error cases,
 the functions do not set any return values.
 .LP
-Otherwise, 
+Otherwise,
 .BR XmbTextPropertyToTextList ,
 .B XwcTextPropertyToTextList
 and
@@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ encoding of the current locale,
 the functions return the number of unconvertible characters.
 Each unconvertible character is converted to a string in the
 current locale that is specific to the current locale.
-To obtain the value of this string, 
+To obtain the value of this string,
 use
 .BR XDefaultString .
 Otherwise,
@@ -245,7 +245,7 @@ Otherwise,
 .B XwcTextPropertyToTextList
 and
 .B Xutf8TextPropertyToTextList
-return 
+return
 .BR Success .
 .LP
 To free the storage for the list and its contents returned by
@@ -267,9 +267,9 @@ function frees memory allocated by
 The
 .B XDefaultString
 function returns the default string used by Xlib for text conversion
-(for example, in 
+(for example, in
 .BR XmbTextPropertyToTextList ).
-The default string is the string in the current locale that is output 
+The default string is the string in the current locale that is output
 when an unconvertible character is found during text conversion.
 If the string returned by
 .B XDefaultString
@@ -278,10 +278,10 @@ no character is output in the converted text.
 .B XDefaultString
 does not return NULL.
 .LP
-The string returned by 
+The string returned by
 .B XDefaultString
 is independent of the default string for text drawing;
-see 
+see
 .B XCreateFontSet
 to obtain the default string for an
 .BR XFontSet .
diff --git a/man/XmbTextPerCharExtents.man b/man/XmbTextPerCharExtents.man
index ab8488ac..33b35451 100644
--- a/man/XmbTextPerCharExtents.man
+++ b/man/XmbTextPerCharExtents.man
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
 .\"
-.\" 
+.\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
 .ds xL Xlib \- C Language X Interface
@@ -55,13 +55,13 @@ Status XmbTextPerCharExtents\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^, char
 *\fIstring\fP\^, int \fInum_bytes\fP\^, XRectangle *\fIink_array_return\fP\^,
 XRectangle *\fIlogical_array_return\fP\^, int \fIarray_size\fP\^, int
 *\fInum_chars_return\fP\^, XRectangle *\fIoverall_ink_return\fP\^, XRectangle
-*\fIoverall_logical_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIoverall_logical_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XwcTextPerCharExtents\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^, wchar_t
 *\fIstring\fP\^, int \fInum_wchars\fP\^, XRectangle
 *\fIink_array_return\fP\^, XRectangle *\fIlogical_array_return\fP, int
 \fIarray_size\fP\^, int *\fInum_chars_return\fP\^, XRectangle
-*\fIoverall_ink_return\fP\^, XRectangle *\fIoverall_logical_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIoverall_ink_return\fP\^, XRectangle *\fIoverall_logical_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status Xutf8TextPerCharExtents\^(\^XFontSet \fIfont_set\fP\^, char
 *\fIstring\fP\^, int \fInum_bytes\fP\^, XRectangle *\fIink_array_return\fP\^,
@@ -100,34 +100,34 @@ functions return the text dimensions of each character of the specified text,
 using the fonts loaded for the specified font set.
 Each successive element of ink_array_return and logical_array_return
 is set to the successive character's drawn metrics,
-relative to the drawing origin of the string and one 
+relative to the drawing origin of the string and one
 rectangle
 for each character in the supplied text string.
 The number of elements of ink_array_return and logical_array_return
 that have been set is returned to num_chars_return.
 .LP
-Each element of ink_array_return is set to the bounding box 
+Each element of ink_array_return is set to the bounding box
 of the corresponding character's drawn foreground color.
-Each element of logical_array_return is set to the bounding box 
+Each element of logical_array_return is set to the bounding box
 that provides minimum spacing to other graphical features
 for the corresponding character.
 Other graphical features should not intersect any of the
 logical_array_return rectangles.
 .LP
-Note that an 
+Note that an
 .B XRectangle
 represents the effective drawing dimensions of the character,
 regardless of the number of font glyphs that are used to draw
 the character or the direction in which the character is drawn.
 If multiple characters map to a single character glyph,
-the dimensions of all the 
+the dimensions of all the
 .B XRectangles
 of those characters are the same.
 .LP
-When the 
+When the
 .B XFontSet
 has missing charsets, metrics for each unavailable
-character are taken from the default string returned by 
+character are taken from the default string returned by
 .B XCreateFontSet
 so that the metrics represent the text as it will actually be drawn.
 The behavior for an invalid codepoint is undefined.
@@ -140,13 +140,13 @@ Otherwise, the functions return a nonzero value.
 If the overall_ink_return or overall_logical_return argument is non-NULL,
 .BR XmbTextPerCharExtents ,
 .B XwcTextPerCharExtents
-and 
+and
 .B Xutf8TextPerCharExtents
 return the maximum extent of the string's metrics to overall_ink_return
-or overall_logical_return, as returned by 
+or overall_logical_return, as returned by
 .BR XmbTextExtents ,
 .B XwcTextExtents
-or 
+or
 .BR Xutf8TextExtents .
 .LP
 The function
diff --git a/man/XrmEnumerateDatabase.man b/man/XrmEnumerateDatabase.man
index eb7e8af3..a84e0227 100644
--- a/man/XrmEnumerateDatabase.man
+++ b/man/XrmEnumerateDatabase.man
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ T}
 .HP
 Bool XrmEnumerateDatabase\^(\^XrmDatabase \fIdatabase\fP\^, XrmNameList
 \fIname_prefix\fP\^, XrmClassList \fIclass_prefix\fP\^, int \fImode\fP\^, Bool
-(\^*\fIproc\fP\^)\^(\^)\^, XPointer \fIarg\fP\^); 
+(\^*\fIproc\fP\^)\^(\^)\^, XPointer \fIarg\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIdatabase\fP 1i
 Specifies the resource database.
diff --git a/man/XrmGetFileDatabase.man b/man/XrmGetFileDatabase.man
index 5b1daaad..15b26141 100644
--- a/man/XrmGetFileDatabase.man
+++ b/man/XrmGetFileDatabase.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -62,21 +62,21 @@ XrmGetFileDatabase, XrmPutFileDatabase, XrmGetStringDatabase, XrmLocaleOfDatabas
 .HP
 #include <X11/Xresource.h>
 .HP
-XrmDatabase XrmGetFileDatabase\^(\^char *\fIfilename\fP\^); 
+XrmDatabase XrmGetFileDatabase\^(\^char *\fIfilename\fP\^);
 .HP
 void XrmPutFileDatabase\^(\^XrmDatabase \fIdatabase\fP\^, char
-*\fIstored_db\fP\^); 
+*\fIstored_db\fP\^);
 .HP
 XrmDatabase XrmGetStringDatabase\^(\^char *\fIdata\fP\^);
 .HP
-char *XrmLocaleOfDatabase\^(\^XrmDatabase \fIdatabase\fP\^); 
+char *XrmLocaleOfDatabase\^(\^XrmDatabase \fIdatabase\fP\^);
 .HP
-XrmDatabase XrmGetDatabase\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^); 
+XrmDatabase XrmGetDatabase\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^);
 .HP
 void XrmSetDatabase\^(\^Display *\fIdisplay\fP\^, XrmDatabase
-\fIdatabase\fP\^); 
+\fIdatabase\fP\^);
 .HP
-void XrmDestroyDatabase\^(\^XrmDatabase \fIdatabase\fP\^); 
+void XrmDestroyDatabase\^(\^XrmDatabase \fIdatabase\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIfilename\fP 1i
 Specifies the resource database file name.
@@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ read in from the specified file.
 The specified file should contain a sequence of entries in valid ResourceLine
 format (see section 15.1); the database that results from reading a file
 with incorrect syntax is implementation-dependent.
-The file is parsed in the current locale, 
+The file is parsed in the current locale,
 and the database is created in the current locale.
 If it cannot open the specified file,
 .B XrmGetFileDatabase
@@ -129,7 +129,7 @@ The string should contain a sequence of entries in valid ResourceLine
 format (see section 15.1) terminated by a null character;
 the database that results from using a string
 with incorrect syntax is implementation-dependent.
-The string is parsed in the current locale, 
+The string is parsed in the current locale,
 and the database is created in the current locale.
 .LP
 If database is NULL,
diff --git a/man/XrmGetResource.man b/man/XrmGetResource.man
index 2686c0d7..41021ef1 100644
--- a/man/XrmGetResource.man
+++ b/man/XrmGetResource.man
@@ -40,7 +40,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -56,21 +56,21 @@ XrmGetResource, XrmQGetResource, XrmQGetSearchList, XrmQGetSearchResource \- ret
 .HP
 Bool XrmGetResource\^(\^XrmDatabase \fIdatabase\fP\^, char *\fIstr_name\fP\^,
 char *\fIstr_class\fP\^, char **\fIstr_type_return\fP\^, XrmValue
-*\fIvalue_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIvalue_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 Bool XrmQGetResource\^(\^XrmDatabase \fIdatabase\fP\^, XrmNameList
 \fIquark_name\fP\^, XrmClassList \fIquark_class\fP\^, XrmRepresentation
-*\fIquark_type_return\fP\^, XrmValue *\fIvalue_return\fP\^); 
+*\fIquark_type_return\fP\^, XrmValue *\fIvalue_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 typedef XrmHashTable *XrmSearchList;
 .sp
 Bool XrmQGetSearchList\^(\^XrmDatabase \fIdatabase\fP\^, XrmNameList
 \fInames\fP\^, XrmClassList \fIclasses\fP\^, XrmSearchList
-\fIlist_return\fP\^, int \fIlist_length\fP\^); 
+\fIlist_return\fP\^, int \fIlist_length\fP\^);
 .HP
 Bool XrmQGetSearchResource\^(\^XrmSearchList \fIlist\fP\^, XrmName
-\fIname\fP\^, XrmClass \fIclass\fP\^, XrmRepresentation *\fItype_return\fP\^, 
-XrmValue *\fIvalue_return\fP\^); 
+\fIname\fP\^, XrmClass \fIclass\fP\^, XrmRepresentation *\fItype_return\fP\^,
+XrmValue *\fIvalue_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIclass\fP 1i
 Specifies the resource class.
@@ -106,32 +106,32 @@ Returns data representation type.
 .IP \fIvalue_return\fP 1i
 Returns the value in the database.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
-The 
+The
 .B XrmGetResource
-and 
+and
 .B XrmQGetResource
 functions retrieve a resource from the specified database.
 Both take a fully qualified name/class pair, a destination
 resource representation, and the address of a value
-(size/address pair).  
+(size/address pair).
 The value and returned type point into database memory;
 therefore, you must not modify the data.
 .LP
 The database only frees or overwrites entries on
 .BR XrmPutResource ,
 .BR XrmQPutResource ,
-or 
+or
 .BR XrmMergeDatabases .
 A client that is not storing new values into the database or
-is not merging the database should be safe using the address passed 
+is not merging the database should be safe using the address passed
 back at any time until it exits.
 If a resource was found, both
 .B XrmGetResource
 and
 .B XrmQGetResource
-return 
+return
 .BR True ;
-otherwise, they return 
+otherwise, they return
 .BR False .
 .LP
 The
@@ -139,48 +139,48 @@ The
 function takes a list of names and classes
 and returns a list of database levels where a match might occur.
 The returned list is in best-to-worst order and
-uses the same algorithm as 
+uses the same algorithm as
 .B XrmGetResource
 for determining precedence.
 If list_return was large enough for the search list,
 .B XrmQGetSearchList
-returns 
+returns
 .BR True ;
 otherwise, it returns
 .BR False .
 .LP
 The size of the search list that the caller must allocate is
-dependent upon the number of levels and wildcards in the resource specifiers 
+dependent upon the number of levels and wildcards in the resource specifiers
 that are stored in the database.
 The worst case length is %3 sup n%,
 where \fIn\fP is the number of name or class components in names or classes.
 .LP
-When using 
+When using
 .B XrmQGetSearchList
 followed by multiple probes for resources with a common name and class prefix,
-only the common prefix should be specified in the name and class list to 
+only the common prefix should be specified in the name and class list to
 .BR XrmQGetSearchList .
 .LP
 The
 .B XrmQGetSearchResource
-function searches the specified database levels for the resource 
+function searches the specified database levels for the resource
 that is fully identified by the specified name and class.
 The search stops with the first match.
 .B XrmQGetSearchResource
-returns 
+returns
 .B True
 if the resource was found;
 otherwise, it returns
 .BR False .
 .LP
-A call to 
+A call to
 .B XrmQGetSearchList
-with a name and class list containing all but the last component 
-of a resource name followed by a call to 
+with a name and class list containing all but the last component
+of a resource name followed by a call to
 .B XrmQGetSearchResource
-with the last component name and class returns the same database entry as 
+with the last component name and class returns the same database entry as
 .B XrmGetResource
-and 
+and
 .B XrmQGetResource
 with the fully qualified name and class.
 .SH "MATCHING RULES"
diff --git a/man/XrmInitialize.man b/man/XrmInitialize.man
index 5d46bc49..683ae650 100644
--- a/man/XrmInitialize.man
+++ b/man/XrmInitialize.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ void XrmInitialize\^(void\^);
 .HP
 void XrmParseCommand\^(\^XrmDatabase *\fIdatabase\fP\^, XrmOptionDescList
 \fItable\fP\^, int \fItable_count\fP\^, char *\fIname\fP\^, int
-*\fIargc_in_out\fP\^, char **\fIargv_in_out\fP\^); 
+*\fIargc_in_out\fP\^, char **\fIargv_in_out\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIargc_in_out\fP 1i
 Specifies the number of arguments and returns the number of remaining arguments.
@@ -93,8 +93,8 @@ Recognized options in the table are removed from argv,
 and entries are added to the specified resource database
 in the order they occur in argv.
 The table entries contain information on the option string,
-the option name, the style of option, 
-and a value to provide if the option kind is 
+the option name, the style of option,
+and a value to provide if the option kind is
 .BR XrmoptionNoArg .
 The option names are compared byte-for-byte to arguments in argv,
 independent of any locale.
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ typedef struct {
         char *option;   /\&* Option specification string in argv                    */
         char *specifier;        /\&* Binding and resource name (sans application name)    */
         XrmOptionKind argKind;  /\&* Which style of option it is            */
-        XPointer value; /\&* Value to provide if XrmoptionNoArg or 
+        XPointer value; /\&* Value to provide if XrmoptionNoArg or
                 \ \ \ XrmoptionSkipNArgs   */
 } XrmOptionDescRec, *XrmOptionDescList;
 .EE
diff --git a/man/XrmMergeDatabases.man b/man/XrmMergeDatabases.man
index 364edd2f..2a6ada2f 100644
--- a/man/XrmMergeDatabases.man
+++ b/man/XrmMergeDatabases.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -53,18 +53,18 @@ XrmMergeDatabases, XrmCombineDatabase, XrmCombineFileDatabase \- merge resource
 #include <X11/Xresource.h>
 .HP
 void XrmMergeDatabases(\^XrmDatabase \fIsource_db\fP, XrmDatabase
-*\fItarget_db\fP\^); 
+*\fItarget_db\fP\^);
 .HP
 void XrmCombineDatabase(\^XrmDatabase \fIsource_db\fP, XrmDatabase
-*\fItarget_db\fP, Bool \fIoverride\fP\^); 
+*\fItarget_db\fP, Bool \fIoverride\fP\^);
 .HP
 Status XrmCombineFileDatabase(\^char *\fIfilename\fP, XrmDatabase
-*\fItarget_db\fP\^, Bool \fIoverride\fP); 
+*\fItarget_db\fP\^, Bool \fIoverride\fP);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIsource_db\fP 1i
 Specifies the resource database that is to be merged into the target database.
 .IP \fItarget_db\fP 1i
-Specifies the resource database into which the source 
+Specifies the resource database into which the source
 database is to be merged.
 .IP \fIfilename\fP 1i
 Specifies the resource database file name.
diff --git a/man/XrmPutResource.man b/man/XrmPutResource.man
index 4c8e5be0..86258f58 100644
--- a/man/XrmPutResource.man
+++ b/man/XrmPutResource.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -53,20 +53,20 @@ XrmPutResource, XrmQPutResource, XrmPutStringResource, XrmQPutStringResource, Xr
 #include <X11/Xresource.h>
 .HP
 void XrmPutResource\^(\^XrmDatabase *\fIdatabase\fP\^, char
-*\fIspecifier\fP\^, char *\fItype\fP\^, XrmValue *\fIvalue\fP\^); 
+*\fIspecifier\fP\^, char *\fItype\fP\^, XrmValue *\fIvalue\fP\^);
 .HP
 void XrmQPutResource\^(\^XrmDatabase *\fIdatabase\fP\^, XrmBindingList
 \fIbindings\fP\^, XrmQuarkList \fIquarks\fP\^, XrmRepresentation \fItype\fP\^,
-XrmValue *\fIvalue\fP\^); 
+XrmValue *\fIvalue\fP\^);
 .HP
 void XrmPutStringResource\^(\^XrmDatabase *\fIdatabase\fP\^, char
-*\fIspecifier\fP\^, char *\fIvalue\fP\^); 
+*\fIspecifier\fP\^, char *\fIvalue\fP\^);
 .HP
 void XrmQPutStringResource\^(\^XrmDatabase *\fIdatabase\fP\^, XrmBindingList
-\fIbindings\fP\^, XrmQuarkList \fIquarks\fP\^, char *\fIvalue\fP\^); 
+\fIbindings\fP\^, XrmQuarkList \fIquarks\fP\^, char *\fIvalue\fP\^);
 .HP
 void XrmPutLineResource\^(\^XrmDatabase *\fIdatabase\fP\^, char
-*\fIline\fP\^); 
+*\fIline\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIbindings\fP 1i
 Specifies a list of bindings.
diff --git a/man/XrmUniqueQuark.man b/man/XrmUniqueQuark.man
index 7248ed39..544ffced 100644
--- a/man/XrmUniqueQuark.man
+++ b/man/XrmUniqueQuark.man
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@
 .\" Digital and Tektronix makes no representations about the suitability
 .\" of this documentation for any purpose.
 .\" It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
-.\" 
+.\"
 .\"
 .ds xT X Toolkit Intrinsics \- C Language Interface
 .ds xW Athena X Widgets \- C Language X Toolkit Interface
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ XrmUniqueQuark, XrmStringToQuark, XrmPermStringToQuark, XrmQuarkToString, XrmStr
 .HP
 #include <X11/Xresource.h>
 .HP
-XrmQuark XrmUniqueQuark\^(void); 
+XrmQuark XrmUniqueQuark\^(void);
 .LP
 \&#define XrmStringToName(string) XrmStringToQuark(string)
 .br
@@ -60,9 +60,9 @@ XrmQuark XrmUniqueQuark\^(void);
 .br
 \&#define XrmStringToRepresentation(string) XrmStringToQuark(string)
 .HP
-int XrmQuark XrmStringToQuark\^(\^char *\fIstring\fP\^); 
+int XrmQuark XrmStringToQuark\^(\^char *\fIstring\fP\^);
 .HP
-XrmQuark XrmPermStringToQuark\^(\^char *\fIstring\fP\^); 
+XrmQuark XrmPermStringToQuark\^(\^char *\fIstring\fP\^);
 .LP
 \&#define XrmStringToName(string) XrmStringToQuark(string)
 .br
@@ -70,9 +70,9 @@ XrmQuark XrmPermStringToQuark\^(\^char *\fIstring\fP\^);
 .br
 \&#define XrmStringToRepresentation(string) XrmStringToQuark(string)
 .HP
-XrmQuark XrmStringToQuark\^(\^char *\fIstring\fP\^); 
+XrmQuark XrmStringToQuark\^(\^char *\fIstring\fP\^);
 .HP
-XrmQuark XrmPermStringToQuark\^(\^char *\fIstring\fP\^); 
+XrmQuark XrmPermStringToQuark\^(\^char *\fIstring\fP\^);
 .LP
 \&#define XrmNameToString(name) XrmQuarkToString(name)
 .br
@@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ XrmQuark XrmPermStringToQuark\^(\^char *\fIstring\fP\^);
 .br
 \&#define XrmRepresentationToString(type) XrmQuarkToString(type)
 .HP
-char *XrmQuarkToString\^(\^XrmQuark \fIquark\fP\^); 
+char *XrmQuarkToString\^(\^XrmQuark \fIquark\fP\^);
 .LP
 \&#define XrmStringToNameList(str, name)  XrmStringToQuarkList((str), (name))
 .br
@@ -88,10 +88,10 @@ char *XrmQuarkToString\^(\^XrmQuark \fIquark\fP\^);
 .sp
 .HP
 void XrmStringToQuarkList\^(\^char *\fIstring\fP\^, XrmQuarkList
-\fIquarks_return\fP\^); 
+\fIquarks_return\fP\^);
 .HP
 XrmStringToBindingQuarkList\^(\^char *\fIstring\fP\^, XrmBindingList
-\fIbindings_return\fP\^, XrmQuarkList \fIquarks_return\fP\^); 
+\fIbindings_return\fP\^, XrmQuarkList \fIquarks_return\fP\^);
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .IP \fIbindings_return\fP 1i
 Returns the binding list.
@@ -161,9 +161,9 @@ The
 .B XrmStringToQuarkList
 function converts the null-terminated string (generally a fully qualified name)
 to a list of quarks.
-The caller must allocate sufficient space for the quarks list before calling 
+The caller must allocate sufficient space for the quarks list before calling
 .BR XrmStringToQuarkList .
-Note that the string must be in the valid ResourceName format 
+Note that the string must be in the valid ResourceName format
 (see section 15.1).
 If the string is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding,
 the conversion is implementation-dependent.
@@ -186,7 +186,7 @@ The
 .B XrmStringToBindingQuarkList
 function converts the specified string to a binding list and a quark list.
 The caller must allocate sufficient space for the quarks list and the
-binding list before calling 
+binding list before calling
 .BR XrmStringToBindingQuarkList .
 If the string is not in the Host Portable Character Encoding
 the conversion is implementation-dependent.